RDR-GX350/HX650/

HX750/HX950
RMT-D245P/D246P/D247P

SERVICE MANUAL AEP Model

RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

UK Model
RDR-GX350/HX750
Ver. 1.3 2007.11 Russian Model
RDR-GX350/HX750/HX950
Revised-2

Photo: RDR-HX750
RMT-D247P

(HX750/HX950) (HX750/HX950) (GX350/HX650)

SPECIFICATIONS
System Inputs and outputs
Laser: Semiconductor laser LINE 2 OUT
Channel coverage: (AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms
PAL/SECAM (B/G, D/K, I, L) (VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10, (S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
Africa 4 to 11, 13 LINE 2 IN
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to (AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than
B69, F21 to F69 22 kilohms
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France (VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
B to Q (S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
HYPER: S21 to S41 C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin
The above channel coverage merely ensures CVBS OUT
the channel reception within these ranges. It
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)
does not guarantee the ability to receive
LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin
signals in all circumstances. For details, see
“Receivable channels”. CVBS IN/OUT
S-Video/RGB IN
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer Decoder
system DV IN:
Audio reception: Split carrier system RDR-HX750/HX950:
4-pin/i.LINK S100
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/
socket
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR):
Power back-up duration: 1 hour
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
Video recording format: MPEG-2,
MPEG-1 PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p
Audio recording format/applicable G-LINK:
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch RDR-HX750/HX950:
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and mini jack
SEP mode), PCM HDMI OUT: HDMI 19-pin-Standard
Connector
USB:
RDR-HX750/HX950:
USB jack Type A (For connecting
digital still camera, Memory card
reader and USB memory)
USB jack Type B (For connecting
PictBridge-compatible printers)
General
Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
Power consumption:
RDR-GX350: 22 W
RDR-HX650: 40 W
RDR-HX750/HX950: 44 W
Dimensions (approx.):
430 × 66.5 × 286 mm (width/height/
depth) incl. projecting parts
Hard disk drive capacity:
RDR-HX650/HX750: 160 GB
RDR-HX950: 250 GB
Mass (approx.):
RDR-GX350 : 3.6 kg
RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950: 4.4 kg
Operating temperature: 5°C to 35°C
Operating humidity: 25% to 80%
Supplied accessories:
Mains lead (1)
Aerial cable (1)
Remote commander (remote) (1)
RDR-HX750: AEP, UK/HX950: AEP, UK:
Set top box controller (1)
R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
Specifications and design are subject to
change without notice.

DVD RECORDER
 WARNING!!
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH
THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO
CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE
FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE
OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.
CAUTION:
The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye
hazard.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes
and bridges.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
—2—
Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
: LEAD FREE MARK
Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
ordinary solder.
Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
about 350°C.
Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Strong viscosity
Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
Special Component Notice
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential
information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired
and/or replaced.
4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
recommend their replacement.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
during repairing.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE
1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY
CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION) ············ 5
2. BOARD CONNECTION, SERVICE REMOTE
CONTROLLER ·································································· 5
3. MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE
IS REPLACED ··································································· 6
4. HOW TO DIAGNOSE HDD FAILURE ···························· 7
4-1. Defective HDD ··································································· 7
4-2. HDD Recognition status ····················································· 7
4-3. Display [E01] on FLD with unrecognized HDD ················ 8
4-4. Display [E02] on FLD ························································ 9
4-5. When playing a video, MP3, or JPG, the contents freeze ·· 9
4-6. Factory Check ··································································· 10
4-7. Final Check ······································································· 10
5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL
Revised-2 ·········································································· 12
1. GENERAL
WARNING ············································································ 1-1
Precautions ············································································· 1-1
Quick Guide to Disc Types ···················································· 1-1
Hookups and Settings ································································ 1-2
Hooking Up the Recorder ······················································ 1-2
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Control-
ler ······················································································· 1-2
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord ················· 1-3
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord ················· 1-4
Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead ······································· 1-4
Step 5: Preparing the Remote ················································ 1-4
Step 6: Easy Setup ································································· 1-5
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device ··································· 1-6
Connecting an External Decoder ··········································· 1-6
Eight Basic Operations
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder ······················· 1-7
1. Inserting a Disc ·································································· 1-7
2. Recording a Programme ···················································· 1-7
3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List) ··················· 1-7
4. Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information ·········· 1-8
5. Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme ················ 1-8
6. Labelling and Protecting a Disc ········································· 1-9
7. Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment (Finalise) ····· 1-9
8. Reformatting a Disc ························································· 1-10
Guide Plus+ ············································································· 1-10
Introduction to the GUIDE Plus+ System ··························· 1-10
Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus+ System ··················· 1-10
Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+
System ·············································································· 1-11
Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information
(My TV) ··········································································· 1-11
Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus+ System ···················· 1-11
Timer Recording ······································································ 1-12
Before Recording ································································· 1-12
Timer Recording (GUIDE Plus+/Manual) ·························· 1-12
Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings ·················· 1-13
Recording from Connected Equipment ······························· 1-14
Playback ·················································································· 1-14
Playing the Recorded Programme/DVD ····························· 1-14
Pausing a TV Broadcast (TV Pause/Pause Live TV) ·········· 1-16
Playing from the Beginning of the Programme You Are
Recording (Chase Play) ··················································· 1-16
Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another
(Simultaneous Rec and Play) ··········································· 1-16
Searching for a Time/Title/Chapter/Track, etc ···················· 1-16
Erasing and Editing ································································· 1-17
Before Editing ······································································ 1-17
Erasing and Editing a Title ·················································· 1-17
—3—
Erasing and Editing a Chapter ············································· 1-18
Creating and Editing a Playlist ············································ 1-18
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) ······················································ 1-19
Before Dubbing ··································································· 1-19
HDD/DVD Dubbing ···························································· 1-19
Dubbing Using Dubbing List ·············································· 1-19
Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup) ······························· 1-20
DV Camcorder Dubbing ·························································· 1-20
Before DV Camcorder Dubbing ·········································· 1-20
Dubbing an Entire DV Format Tape
(DV One Touch Dubbing) ················································ 1-21
Dubbing Selected Scenes (Manual Dubbing) ······················ 1-21
Playing from a DV Camcorder ············································ 1-21
Audio Tracks ··········································································· 1-21
Playing Audio Tracks from CD/DVD ································· 1-21
Searching for an Audio Track ·············································· 1-22
About Jukebox ····································································· 1-22
Preparing for Using Jukebox ··············································· 1-22
Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox/USB Device ············ 1-23
Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox ·················· 1-23
JPEG Image Files ···································································· 1-24
About the “Photo Album” Function ···································· 1-24
Preparing for Using the “Photo Album” Function ··············· 1-24
Using the “Photo Album” List ············································· 1-25
Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD ··························· 1-25
Printing JPEG Image Files ·················································· 1-26
Settings and Adjustments ························································ 1-26
Disc Settings (Disc Setup) ··················································· 1-26
Recording Settings (Basic) ·················································· 1-26
Aerial Reception Settings (Tuner) ······································· 1-27
Video Settings (Video In/Out) ············································· 1-28
Audio Input Settings (Audio In) ·········································· 1-28
Audio Output Settings (Audio Out) ····································· 1-28
Language Settings (Language) ············································ 1-29
Recording Settings (Recording) ·········································· 1-29
Playback Settings (Playback) ·············································· 1-30
HDMI Settings (HDMI Output) ·········································· 1-30
Other Settings (Options) ······················································ 1-31
Additional Information ···························································· 1-31
Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-31
Resetting the Recorder ························································· 1-33
Notes About This Recorder ················································· 1-33
Specifications ······································································· 1-34
Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files, and DivX
Video Files ······································································· 1-34
About i.LINK ······································································· 1-34
Guide to Parts and Controls ················································· 1-35
Language Code List ····························································· 1-36
Country/Area Code ······························································ 1-36
2. DISASSEMBLY
2-1. UPPER CASE ································································· 2-2
2-2. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY ·········································· 2-2
2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION ············································· 2-3
2-4 FR-274 BOARD, FL-178 BOARD ································· 2-3
2-5. DVD DRIVE ··································································· 2-4
2-6. DC FAN ··········································································· 2-4
2-7. HARD DISK (Except GX350) ········································ 2-5
2-8. AV-114/118 BOARD ······················································· 2-5
2-9. VDC-001 BOARD (Type AS, BS only) ·························· 2-6
2-10. POWER SUPPLY BLOCK ············································· 2-6
2-11. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ··································· 2-7
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM ···································· 3-1
3-2. AV-114/118 BLOCK DIAGRAM ··································· 3-3
3-3. RD-065 BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········································· 3-5
3-4. FR-274, FL-178, VDC-001 BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········· 3-7 5-2. AV ENCODER/DECODER IC
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM ········································ 3-9 (IC1001:MC10050F1-105/505-LU1-A
(RD-65 BOARD)) ··························································· 5-3
4. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 6. SERVICE MODE
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ································ 4-1 6-1. SERVICE MODE MAP ····················································· 2
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-3 6-2. Diagnostic Mode ································································ 3
WAVEFORMS ································································ 4-4 6-2-1. Model Setting ····································································· 3
• AV-114/118 (1/5) (IT CONTROLLER, IR) 6-2-2. Service Mode ······································································ 4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-5 6-2-3. Version Information and Other Information (First screen) 4
• AV-114 (2/5) (POWER/FAN CONT.) 6-2-4. RF Level Simplified Diagnosis (Subscreen1) ···················· 5
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-7 6-2-5. HDD Information for the HDD return sheet
• AV-118 (2/5) (POWER/FAN CONT.) (Simplified measurement mode) ········································ 6
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9 6-2-6. Cautions for handling the HDD ·········································· 7
• AV-114/118 (3/5) (VIDEO/AUDIO) 6-2-7. HDD Error Logging ··························································· 9
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11 6-2-8. ATA/ATAPI History - ERR ············································· 10
• AV-114/118 (4/5) (EURO) 6-2-9. How to confirm HDD Access Flow ·································· 10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 6-2-10. ATA/ATAPI Debugging Screen Second Screen and LD
• AV-114/118 (5/5) (TUNER) Deterioration Judgment (for writer) ······························· 11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15 6-2-11. History of VR Recording-related Errors ························ 13
• VDC-001 (VIDEO ENCODER) 6-2-12. DV Service Mode ·························································· 17
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17 6-2-13. EPG Service Mode ························································· 19
• FR-274 (FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW) 6-2-14. Aging Mode ··································································· 21
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19 6-2-15. HDD Check Mode ························································· 22
• FL-178 (DV, USB, REMOCON RECEIVER, 6-3. Setup Related Menu ························································· 23
POWER SW) 6-3-1. Firmware Downloading ···················································· 23
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21 6-3-2. Area-Specific Channel Setting ········································· 23
• RD-065 (1/7) (POWER BLOCK) 6-3-3. OSD Filter Setting ···························································· 24
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23
• RD-065 (2/7) (EMMA BLOCK) 7. ADJUSTMENTS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25 7-1. Video System Adjustment ··············································· 7-1
• RD-065 (3/7) (VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27 8. REPAIR PARTS LIST
• RD-065 (4/7) (MEMORY BLOCK) 8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-29 8-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 8-1
• RD-065 (5/7) (SATA/IDE IF) 8-1-2. CHASSIS SECTION ······················································· 8-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-31 8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 8-3
• RD-065 (6/7) (HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-33
• RD-065 (7/7) (DVD DRIVE)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-35
• SWITCHING REGULATOR (SRV-2058EK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-37
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ····································· 4-39
• VDC-001 (VIDEO ENCODER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-39
• FR-274 (FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-41
• AV-114 (IT CONTROLLER, IR, POWER/FAN CONT.,
VIDEO/AUDIO, EURO, TUNER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-43
• AV-118 (IT CONTROLLER, IR, POWER/FAN CONT.,
VIDEO/AUDIO, EURO, TUNER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-47
• RD-065 (POWER BLOCK, EMMA BLOCK, VIDEO/
AUDIO BLOCK, MEMORY BLOCK, SATA/IDE IF,
HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK, DVD DRIVE)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-51
• FL-178 (DV, USB, REMOCON RECEIVER,
POWER SW)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-55

5. IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

5-1. IT CONTROL IC
(IC101:LC87F06J2A-F58W3-E (AV-114 BOARD)) ······ 5-1

—4—
 SERVICE NOTE

1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION)

1. Remove the upper case.
2. Insert the stiff wire in the hole and eject the tray.

Hole

1 The stiff wire

Open the tray

NOTES DURING THE FORCED EJECTION

1. If the forced ejection is executed while a blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) exists on the tray
• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) in the tray and then close the tray.
Note1: If you close the tray while it is empty, ejection of the tray becomes impossible.
Note2: If you close the tray with a CD disc inserted in it, the CD can be ejected. However, if you close the tray while it is empty, there can be a case that
ejection of the tray becomes impossible.
Note3: Even if you replace the DVD drive unit while the tray remains under the state as described above, the situation cannot be improved.

2. If the tray cannot be ejected while the disc is not inserted

• Execute the forced ejection.
• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) on the tray and try to close the tray.
(There are cases that it recovers the trouble.)

3. Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) can be damaged. (There can be a case that initialization is also impossible.)

2. BOARD CONNECTION, SERVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER

Extension cable
(J-6090-201-A)

RD-065 board : CN2301(40core)

AV-114 board : CN101(40core)

SERVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER

(J-6090-203-A)

—5—
3. MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE IS REPLACED
Required equipment:
• Remote controller (RMT-D245P/D246P/D247P)
• Service remote controller (J-6090-203-A)
• Monitor

Model name delete method

1. Turn the main POWER ON.
2. Press the following buttons on the service remote controller in this order.:
“ESC” k “CHAP” k “1”
* Confirm that the above operation is performed in the state that the screen has exited all settings such as “Home Menu” or “Simple
Setting”.
3. Turn the main POWER OFF.
4. Turn the main POWER ON. (The screen as shown in Fig. 1 appears.)
5. Select “2” on the screen by using the service remote controller.
* If “1” is selected on the screen, the machine will not work at all. Be sure to select “2”.
6. Find out the tentative model name from the Correspondence Table (Table 1) for the client machine. Then, enter the 4-digit “Input No.”
on the screen using the service remote controller.
7. The model name setting method is complete. (Screen disappears.)
* Upon completion of the model name setting, be sure to press both “ENTER” and “3” simultaneously on the service remote controller
without fail. It sets the remote control code “3”.

Fig.1 S-company/P-company selection

[Recorder's Model Setting]

Input the number using the remote for Service

> ?

Input No. Manufacturer

[ 1 : P ]
[ 2 : S ]

Table1 Correspondence table between tentative model name and final product name
Tentative model name
Model name
AEP1 AEP2 AEP3 UK
RDR-GX350 MRX-1600/EC1 MRX-1600/EC2 — MRX-1600/CEK
RDR-HX650 MRX-1620/EC1 MRX-1620/EC2 MRX-1620/EC1 —
RDR-HX750 MRX-1635/EC1 MRX-1630/EC2 — MRX-1635/CEK
RDR-HX950 MRX-1655/EC1 MRX-1650/EC2 — —

—6—
4. HOW TO DIAGNOSE HDD FAILURE

4-1. Defective HDD

There are four symptoms of defects in the HDD.
1. “E01” is displayed on the FLD.
(The HDD is not recognized or is not authorized.)
2. “E02” is displayed on the FLD.
3. When playing a video, MP3, or JPG, contents freeze.
4. Irregular noises from the HDD

4-2. HDD Recognition status

How to enter Recognition status and sub screen mode.
• While the GUI screen is not displayed, use the service remote controller and press “ESC” key followed by “DISP” key.
• While the first screen is displayed, press “DIG/ANA” key repeatedly until the desired subscreen is displayed.
The subscreens change.
Service remote controller
(Part code: J-6090-203-A)

MRX-1635/EC1 VERSION : 1.01

SYSCON : RELEASE 104
Rev. 1. 5895
TUNERCON : 1.178 OK
DRIVE : DVD-RW DVR-L12X OK
1.00 OK
• Details on HDD data are described below:
PIC SERIAL : 000800004940
HDD INT : WDC WD2500AAJS 9 250 HDD : WDC1023456 # 160

Capacity of the HDD (unit: Gbytes)

DEVICE : E2R-FEx1.0 FLASH : 64M HDD identification error indication
REGION : 2 C : 0000400259 HDD model name
HDCP : 0000400259

HDD identification Details on HDD data

FL Display OS Display Remarks
conditions are described below.
“Repaining the HDD”.
r
REPAIR
“HDD repair is
complete”.
Check the connection to the
SATA cable and power cable.
An error occurred. Failure to physically
Replace the SATA cable or
Please consult your identify the HDD (no
Blank space power cable.
nearest Sony dealer. connection, defective
Replace the HDD.
E01 Note that contents on HDD, interface error).
Replace the FE or part in the
the HDD may be
SATA/ATA communication.
erased when servicing
this unit. Physical identification of
“#” indicates that the HDD is
HDD possible, but not WDC 10234564 # 160
not recognized.
identified
The Hard Disk Drive Physical identification of
“!” indicates an HDD
info is incorrect. HDD possible, HDD
E02 WDC 10234564 ! 160 authorization error. Initialize
Use the Disk Setup identified, but failure in
the HDD.
menu to reformat. logical formatting.
Physical identification of
HDD possible, HDD
Normal identified, and correct WDC 10234564 160
logical formatting (HDD
correctly identified).

—7—
4-3. Display [E01] on FLD with unrecognized HDD

E01

NO
Is the HDD free from
abnormal noises?

YES

NO
Is not “#” displayed? Unauthorized HDD Replace the HDD * Refer to “Note”.

Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD

YES return sheet before replacing the HDD.
Note the information on pages 6-6, 6-7, 6-9,
and 6-10 of Chapter 6, “SERVICE MODE”.
Reconnect the SATA NO
cable. Does the problem Replace the SATA Cable For information about replacing the HDD, see
still occur? page 2-5 of Chapter 2, “DISASSEMBLY”.
After replacing the HDD, perform
“Factory Check” on “SERVICE NOTE”, page 10.
YES
When performing “Factory Check”, the data
saved to the HDD by the customer is erased.
Replace the SATA cable. NO Obtain customer consent before performing
Does the problem “Factory Check”.
still occur?

YES

Replace the HDD with a new

one and perform Factory Check. * Refer to “Note”.

Does the problem

NO
END
still occur?

YES
Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD
There may be a problem with the Engine.
Therefore, put the original HDD back in the unit.
Then, follow the procedure to replace the Engine.
After replacing the Engine, perform “Setting the Model Name”
on “Service Note”, page 6.
return sheet before replacing the Engine.
For information about replacing the Engine,
see page 2-4 of Chapter 2, “DISASSEMBLY”.
When performing “Factory Check”, the data
saved to the HDD by the customer is erased.
Obtain customer consent before performing
“Factory Check”.

Does the problem NO

Final check
still occur?

Note: Performing “Final Check” will not erase the HDD data.
YES

Another defect
has occurred.

—8—
4-4. Display [E02] on FLD

Note: When E02 is displayed, the user data has

E02 already broken due to system DATA Error.

Is the HDD free from NO

Replace the HDD * Refer to “Note”.
abnormal noises?

YES

Factory check

Final check Note: Performing “Final Check” will not erase the HDD data.

Has the Final check ended

NO
Replace the HDD * Refer to “Note”.
with success?

YES

END

4-5. When playing a VIDEO, MP3, or JPG, the contents freeze

When playing a VIDEO, MP3, or JPG,

the contents freeze.
(Any error is not displayed on the FLD.)

Is the HDD free from

NO
abnormal noises?

YES

Display the ATA/ATAPI history by using

“HDD Access Flow” on page 6-10.

NO
Does the history show
no errors?

YES

Has the Final check ended

NO
Final check Replace the HDD
with success?
* Refer to “Note”.
YES
Note: Performing “Final Check”
will not erase the HDD data.
END

—9—
4-6. Factory Check
1. Pull out and then reconnect the AC cable.
2. Press “ESC” key followed by “P.RUN” key to start Formatting.
3. When “B COMPLETE” appears, the Factory Check is complete.
4. Press “Power” button. The unit starts normally.

When “Factory Check” has finished completely without error, reset “Recording Error History” and “ATA/ATAPI History Error” with the
Clear key.
Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD return sheet before
Recording Error History Display
replacing the HDD.
Note the information on pages 6-6, 6-7, 6-9, and 6-10 of Chapter 6,
07-03-19 12:36:06 ESFSYS INIT
“SERVICE MODE”.
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Zero MR
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Initialze
When performing “Factory Check”, the data saved to the HDD by the
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Zero MR
customer is erased.
07-03-19 12:27:27 Status NG
Obtain customer consent before performing “Factory Check”.

“Recording Error History” and “ATA/ATAPI History Error”, see pages

6-9, 6-10 of Chapter 6, “SERVICE MODE”.

4-7. Final Check

4-7-1. SELF TEST (SMART TEST)

This is a simplified diagnosis for the HDD.
A serious failure in the HDD can be detected with this test.
Time required for testing: Approx. 60 sec.

How to start/terminate the diagnostic program

Use the remote control unit for servicing.
• How to start: Press “ESC”, “CX”, “0”, and “1” keys simultaneously.
• How to terminate: Press “ESC” key.

Execute Self-Test.
• Press “3” key on the remote control unit for servicing while the menu screen is displayed.
• When the following screen is displayed, press “1” key to start the Self-Test.

Note: “2. Exe Ext Self Test” is not used. Note: Performing “Self Test” will not erase the HDD data.

Diagnosis results
• Without an error: “. . . Completed” is displayed.
Then, proceed to the Extended Self-Test.
• With an error: “. . . Error” is displayed. Look at the number in Test Result.
If the place value for tens is 1 or 2, execute the Self-Test again.
If it is from 3 to 7, the HDD must be replaced.

Note: If the result of the second test is the same, replacement of the HDD is required.

Example: No error Example: With an error

— 10 —
4-7-2. Performance Check

Press “ESC” key, then “A.MON” key.

This is a reading test across all sectors of the HDD.

Data recorded on the HDD will not be erased, because no writing operation is performed.
Time required for testing: Approx. 45 min/160 G
75 min/250 G
130 to 150 min/500 G

When “Performance Check” finishes completely without error, reset “ATA/ATAPI History Error” with the Clear key.

FL display specification
HDD factory Check HDD performance Check
aNormal display aError display aNormal display aError display

0:Factory Check start 0 0 000000 80:Performance Check start 80 0 00000

Power On Power On

1:Power ON Test 1 0 000000 81:Power ON Test 81 0 00000

HDD ERR 01 HDD ERR 81

2:Random Write/Read/Compare Test 2 0 000000 82:all Sequential Read Verify Test 8 2 * * *H * *M* *S
HDD ERR 02 HDD ERR 82

3:ID Sequential Read Verify Test 3 * * *H * *M* *S 83:Power OFF Test 83 0 00000
HDD ERR 03 Power off H M S

4:OD Sequential Read Verify Test 4 * * *H * *M* *S 15s

HDD ERR 04
84:Complete 8 4 COMPLETE
5:Format 5 FM *H * *M* *S HDD ERR 05

6:Power OFF Test 6 0 000000

Power off

15s Power On
7 0 000000
20s HDD ERR 07 7:Power ON Test
Power off 8 0 000000 8:Power OFF Test
9:Power ON Test
15s Power On a:Power OFF Test
9 0 000000 b:Complete
20s HDD ERR 09
Power off A 0 000000

15s
B COMPLETE

Fig 1. FL Display Flow

* The logo for “Factory Check” and “Performance Check” is recorded in “ATA/ATAPI History Error”.

— 11 —
5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2
• When repairing or replacing parts, check for the correct combinations by referring to the table shown below.

1) Check for the correct combination in accordance with the MAIN IC (IC1001) mounted on the RD-065 board.

Type MAIN IC (IC1001) AV Board VDC Board Flexible Flat Cable

RD-065 (AS) Board
AS IC1001: MC10050F1-105-LU1-A AV-114 (AG) Board
FVR-001 FFC
(not supplied) VDC-001 (AG)
FVA-002 FFC
RD-065 (BS) Board Board
PV-145 HARNESS
BS IC1001: MC10050F1-105-LU1-A AV-114 (BG) Board
(not supplied)
RD-065 (CS) EM Board
AV-118 (AG) EM
CS IC1001: MC10050F1-505-LU1-A
Board
(not supplied) PAE-002 HARNESS
–
RD-065 (DS) EM Board AV-118 (AG) EM (not supplied)
DS IC1001: MC10050F1-505-LU1-A AV-118 (BG) EM
(not supplied) Board

Check of Destination

Model Destination Board

RDR-GX350 AEP1, AEP2, UK, Russian RD-065 (AS) AV-114 (AG) DTC-001
RD-065 (CS) AV-118 (AG) EM –
RDR-HX650 AEP1, AEP2, AEP3 RD-065 (BS) AV-114 (AG) DTC-001
RD-065 (DS) AV-118 (AG) –
RDR-HX750 AEP1, UK, Russian RD-065 (BS) AV-114 (BG) DTC-001
RD-065 (DS) AV-118 (BG) –
AEP2 RD-065 (BS) AV-114 (AG) DTC-001
RD-065 (DS) AV-118 (AG) –
RDR-HX950 AEP1 RD-065 (BS) AV-114 (BG) DTC-001
RD-065 (DS) AV-118 (BG) –
AEP2 RD-065 (BS) AV-114 (AG) DTC-001
RD-065 (DS) AV-118 (AG) –

2) Location of MAIN IC (IC1001).

Check type name of IC1001

CN3802

CN4501

IC1001

IC1221

JA5701

— 12 —

This section is extracted from instruction manual.
(RDR-HX750/HX950 : 2-899-893-E1 (1))
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this apparatus
to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
open the cabinet. Refer servicing to
qualified personnel only.
The mains lead must be changed
only at a qualified service shop.
Do not expose the battery to
excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
This appliance is classified as a
CLASS 1 LASER product. The
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
MARKING is located on the rear
of the unit.
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with
this product will increase eye
hazard. As the laser beam used in
this DVD recorder is harmful to
eyes, do not attempt to disassemble
the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
This label is located on the laser
protective housing inside the
enclosure.
2 ,continued
• This Product includes
FontAvenue® fonts licenced
by NEC corporation.
FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC
corporation.
Copy guard function
Since the recorder has a copy
guard function, programmes
received through an external
tuner (not supplied) may contain
copy protection signals (copy
guard function) and as such may
not be recordable, depending on
the type of signal.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Caution: This recorder is
capable of holding a still
video image or on-screen
display image on your
television screen
indefinitely. If you leave the
still video image or on-
screen display image
displayed on your TV for an
extended period of time you
risk permanent damage to
your television screen.
Plasma display panels and
projection televisions are
especially susceptible to this.
If you have any questions or
problems concerning your
recorder, please consult your
nearest Sony dealer.
4 ,continued
Precautions
• This unit operates on 220 –
240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Check that
the unit’s operating voltage is
identical with your local power
supply.
• To prevent fire or shock hazard,
do not place objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, on the
apparatus.
• Install this system so that the
mains lead can be unplugged
from the wall socket
immediately in the event of
trouble.
GUIDE Plus+ and G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject
of various international patents and
patent applications owned by, or
licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE
INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES
ARE NOT IN ANY WAY
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY
OF THE PROGRAM
SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE
PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT
SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE
INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND /
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES
BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNTS REPRESENTING
LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT,
OR SERVICES RELATING TO
THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
About this manual
Check your model name
The instructions in this
manual are for 2 models:
RDR-HX750 and RDR-
HX950. Check your model
name by looking at the front
panel of the recorder.
• In this manual, the internal
hard disk drive is written as
“HDD,” and “disc” is used as a
general reference for the HDD,
DVDs, or CDs unless
otherwise specified by the text
or illustrations.
• Icons, such as DVD , listed
at the top of each explanation
indicate what kind of media
can be used with the function
being explained.
• Instructions in this manual
describe the controls on the
remote. You can also use the
controls on the recorder if they
have the same or similar
names as those on the remote.
• The on-screen display
illustrations used in this
manual may not match the
graphics displayed on your TV
screen.
• The explanations regarding
DVDs in this manual refer to
DVDs created on this recorder.
The explanations do not apply
to DVDs that are created on
other recorders and played
back on this recorder.
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SECTION 1
GENERAL
Precautions
This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the
Disposal of Old Electrical limits set out in the EMC
& Electronic Equipment Directive using a connection
(Applicable in the cable shorter than 3 metres.
European Union and
On safety
other European countries
Should any solid object or liquid
with separate collection
fall into the cabinet, unplug the
systems) recorder and have it checked by
This symbol on the product or on qualified personnel before
its packaging indicates that this
operating it any further.
product shall not be treated as
household waste. Instead it shall be
About the hard disk drive
handed over to the applicable
collection point for the recycling of The hard disk has a high storage
electrical and electronic density, which enables long
equipment. By ensuring this
recording durations and quick
product is disposed of correctly,
access to the written data.
you will help prevent potential
However, it can easily be
negative consequences for the
damaged by shock, vibration or
environment and human health,
which could otherwise be caused
dust, and should be kept away
by inappropriate waste handling of from magnets. To avoid losing
this product. The recycling of important data, observe the
materials will help to conserve following precautions.
natural resources. For more • Do not apply a strong shock to
detailed information about the recorder.
recycling of this product, please • Do not place the recorder in a
contact your local Civic Office,
location subject to mechanical
your household waste disposal
service or the shop where you
vibrations or in an unstable
location.
purchased the product.
• Do not place the recorder on
top of a hot surface, such as a
VCR or amplifier (receiver).
• Do not use the recorder in a
place subject to extreme
changes in temperature
(temperature gradient less than
10 °C/hour).
• Do not move the recorder with
its mains lead connected.
• Do not disconnect the mains
lead while the power is on.
• When disconnecting the mains
lead, turn off the power and
make sure that the hard disk
drive is not operating (the
clock is displayed in the front
panel display for at least 30
seconds and all recording or
dubbing has stopped).
• Do not move the recorder for
one minute after you have
unplugged the mains lead.
Quick Guide to Disc Types
Recordable and playable discs
Type Disc Logo
VR
mode
Hard disk
drive
(internal)
Video
mode
DVD+RW
VR
mode
DVD-RW
Video
mode
DVD+R
DVD+R DL
VR
DVD-R
mode
DVD-R Video
DL mode
1-1
• Do not attempt to replace or
upgrade the hard disk by
yourself, as this may result in
malfunction.
If the hard disk drive should
malfunction, you cannot recover
lost data. The hard disk drive is
only a temporary storage space.
About repairing the hard
disk drive
• The contents of the hard disk
drive may be checked in case
of repair or inspection during a
malfunction or modification.
However, the contents will not
be backed up or saved by
Sony.
• If the hard disk needs to be
formatted or replaced, it will
be done at the discretion of
Sony. All contents of the hard
disk drive will be erased,
including contents that violate
copyright laws.
On power sources
• The recorder is not
disconnected from the AC
power source (mains) as long
as it is connected to the wall
outlet, even if the recorder
itself has been turned off.
• If you are not going to use the
recorder for a long time, be
sure to disconnect the recorder
from the wall outlet. To
disconnect the AC power cord
(mains lead), grasp the plug
itself; never pull the cord.
On placement
• Place the recorder in a location
with adequate ventilation to
prevent heat build-up in the
recorder.
• Do not place the recorder on a
soft surface such as a rug that
might block the ventilation
holes.
• Do not place the recorder in a
confined space such as a
bookshelf or similar unit.
• Do not place the recorder in a
location near heat sources, or
in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust, or
mechanical shock.
Icon used
Formatting
in this
(new discs)
manual
Select “Video Mode
Off” in “HDD
Recording Format”
(page 122)
HDD
Select “Video Mode
On” (default) in
“HDD Recording
Format” (page 122)
Automatically
formatted in +VR
+RW
mode (DVD+RW
VIDEO)
Format in VR mode
-RWVR
(page 31)
Format in Video
-RWVideo
mode (page 31)
Automatically
formatted in +VR
+R
mode (DVD+R
VIDEO)
Format in VR mode
(page 31)*1
Formatting is
-RVR
performed in the
“Format” setup
(page 42).
Automatically
-RVideo formatted in Video
mode
• Do not place the recorder in an
inclined position. It is
designed to be operated in a
horizontal position only.
• Keep the recorder and discs
away from equipment with
strong magnets, such as
microwave ovens, or large
loudspeakers.
• Do not place heavy objects on
the recorder.
On recording
Make trial recordings before
making the actual recording.
On compensation for lost
recordings
Sony is not liable and will not
compensate for any lost
recordings or relevant losses,
including when recordings are
not made due to reasons
including recorder failure, or
when the contents of a recording
are lost or damaged as a result of
recorder failure or repair
undertaken to the recorder. Sony
will not restore, recover, or
replicate the recorded contents
under any circumstances.
Copyrights
• Television programmes, films,
video tapes, discs, and other
materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of
such material may be contrary
to the provisions of the
copyright laws. Also, use of
this recorder with cable
television transmission may
require authorization from the
cable television transmitter
and/or programme owner.
• This product incorporates
copyright protection
technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright
protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
3
Compatibility with other
DVD players (finalising)
Dub HDD contents to a
DVD (VR mode) to play
on other DVD players
Dub HDD contents to a
DVD (Video mode) to play
on other DVD players
Playable on DVD+RW
compatible players
(automatically finalised)
Playable only on VR mode
compatible players
(finalisation unnecessary)
Playable on most DVD
players (finalisation
necessary) (page 40)
Playable on most DVD
players (finalisation
necessary) (page 40)
Playable only on DVD-R
in VR mode compatible
players (finalisation
necessary) (page 40)
Playable on most DVD
players (finalisation
necessary) (page 40)
9
 Usable disc versions (as of April 2007)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs Playable discs
• 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1,
Ver.1.2 with CPRM*2)
Icon used in
• 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs Type Disc Logo Characteristics
this manual
• 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0,
Ver.2.1 with CPRM*2)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double Discs such as movies that can be
purchased or rented
Layer) discs
DVD VIDEO DVD This recorder also recognises DVD-
• 8x-speed or slower DVD-R DL (Dual RAMs* as DVD Video compatible
Layer) discs (Ver.3.0 with CPRM*2) discs.
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R
DL,” “DVD-R,” and “DVD-R DL” are trademarks. VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
VIDEO CD VCD VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format
*1
When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into
this recorder, it is automatically formatted in
Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
mode, format in the “Format” setup (page 42). CD CD
*2
music CD format
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable
Media) is a coding technology that protects
copyrights for images. DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs containing MP3
audio tracks or DivX video files
Discs that cannot be recorded on DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs*/
DATA DVD — DATA DVD
• DVD-RAMs DVD-ROMs containing MP3 audio
tracks, JPEG image files or DivX video
files

CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs
DATA CD — DATA CD containing either MP3 audio tracks,
JPEG image files or DivX video files

“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” are trademarks. • DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/

DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs that do not contain
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are DVD Video, DivX video, JPEG image
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
files, or MP3 audio tracks.
license.
• DVD Audio discs
DivX® is a video file compression technology,
developed by DivX, Inc. • Cartridge-only type DVD-RAMs.
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs
* If the DVD-RAM has a removable cartridge, • DVD VIDEOs with a different region code
remove the cartridge before playback.
(page 12).
• DVDs that were recorded on a different
Discs that cannot be played
recorder and not correctly finalised.
• PHOTO CDs
• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are Maximum recordable number of titles
recorded in a format different from the
Disc Number of titles
formats mentioned in the table above.
• Data part of CD-Extras HDD* 999
• BDs DVD-RW/DVD-R 99
• HD DVDs
• Discs recorded with an AVCHD- DVD+RW/DVD+R 49
compatible DVD video camera DVD+R DL 49
DVD-R DL 99

* The maximum length for one title is 12 hours.

10 ,continued 11

Note on playback operations of DVD b Notes

VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs
Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by
software producers. Since this recorder plays
DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the
disc contents the software producers
• Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD- Using the set top box receiver
Rs, DVD-RAMs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be Hookups and Settings
played on this recorder due to the recording control function
quality or physical condition of the disc, or the
characteristics of the recording device and Hooking Up the Recorder The set top box receiver control function can
authoring software. The disc will not play if it has be used with hookup A. It allows the recorder
to control a set top box receiver via the

Hookups and Settings

designed, some playback features may not be
available. See the instructions supplied with
the DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs.
Region code (DVD VIDEO only)
Your recorder has a region code printed on
the rear of the unit and will only play DVD
VIDEOs (playback only) labelled with
identical region codes. This system is used to
protect copyrights.
DVD VIDEOs labelled ALL will also play
on this recorder.
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the
message “Playback prohibited by region
code.” will appear on the TV screen.
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region
code indication may be labelled even though
playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by
area restrictions.
Region code
Music discs encoded with copyright
protection technologies
This product is designed to play back discs
that conform to the Compact Disc (CD)
standard.
Recently, various music discs encoded with
copyright protection technologies are being
marketed by some record companies. Please
be aware that among those discs, there are
some that do not conform to the CD standard
and may not be playable by this product.
Note on DualDiscs
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which
mates DVD recorded material on one side
with digital audio material on the other side.
However, since the audio material side does
not conform to the Compact Disc (CD)
standard, playback on this product is not
guaranteed.
not been correctly finalised. For more
information, see the operating instructions for the
recording device.
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the
same DVD-RW. To change the disc’s format,
reformat the disc (page 42). Note that the disc’s
contents will be erased after reformatting.
• You cannot shorten the time required for
recording even with high-speed discs.
• It is recommended that you use discs with “For
Video” printed on their packaging.
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD+Rs,
DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (Video mode) that
contain recordings made on other DVD
equipment.
• In some cases, you may not be able to add new
recordings to DVD+RWs that contain recordings
made on other DVD equipment. If you do add a
new recording, note that this recorder will rewrite
the DVD menu.
• You cannot edit recordings on DVD+RWs,
DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs
that are made on other DVD equipment.
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by
this recorder, the data may be erased.
• You may not be able to record, edit, or dub on
some recordable discs, depending on the disc.
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or
played on this recorder. This may cause the
recorder to malfunction.
Follow steps 1 through 6 to hook up and
supplied set top box controller. The recorder
adjust the settings of the recorder. Do not
controls programme positions on the set top
connect the mains lead until you reach
box receiver for timer recording. You can
“Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead” on
also use the recorder’s remote control to
page 20.
change programme positions on the set top
b Notes box receiver whenever the set top box
• See “Specifications” (page 138) for a list of receiver and recorder are turned on.
supplied accessories. To use the set top box receiver control
• Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise. function, you need to connect the set top box
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the controller (page 14). After setting up the set
components to be connected. top box receiver control, check that the
• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that recorder can correctly control the set top box
does not have a SCART or video input jack.
receiver (page 24).
• Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each
component before connecting.
b Notes
• If your aerial is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead
cable), use an external aerial connector (not
supplied) to connect the aerial to the recorder.
Step 1: Connecting the • If you have separate cables for AERIAL
antennas, use an AERIAL UHF/VHF band mixer
Aerial Cable and Set Top (not supplied) to connect the aerial to the
recorder.
Box Controller • If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you
will not be able to view the signals from the
connected set top box receiver.
Select one of the following aerial hookups.
Do NOT set “LINE 1 In” to “Decoder” in the
“Video In/Out” setup (page 115) when
making connection A.
If you have Hookup
Set top box receiver A (page 14)
No set top box receiver B (page 15)
If the set top box receiver can output RGB
signals
This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the set
top box receiver can output RGB signals,
connect the TV SCART connector on the set
top box receiver to the LINE 1/DECODER
jack, and set “LINE 1 In” to “RGB” in the
“Video In/Out” setup (page 115). See the
instructions supplied with the set top box
receiver.

12 ,continued 13

1-2
 A: Connecting a set top box receiver B: Connecting the aerial cable only (no set top box receiver)
With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver. Use this hookup if you watch cable programme position without a set top box receiver. Also
To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the use this hookup if you are connecting only an aerial antenna.
aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver. With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position
on the recorder.

Hookups and Settings

Place the set top box controller
near the remote sensor on the
set top box receiver. Wall

Wall

Set top box

controller
Set top box (page 13)
receiver

ANT IN
TO TV

to AERIAL IN

Aerialcable*1 SCART cord*2

(not supplied) (not supplied)

to AERIAL IN
DVD recorder
to G-LINK
to AERIAL OUT
TV

to aerial input

DVD recorder Aerial cable (supplied)

to AERIAL OUT
: Signal flow
Aerial cable TV
(supplied)

to aerial input

: Signal flow
*1 If your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack, connect the aerial cable to the recorder’s
AERIAL IN jack.
*2
Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector.

14 15

A SCART input jack 2 Insert the HDMI connector straight into

Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord When setting “LINE 3 Out” to “S-Video” or
“RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup
the HDMI jack.
Do not bend or apply pressure to the
(page 115), use a SCART cord that conforms HDMI connector.
Select one of the following patterns, A through E, according to the input jack on your TV to the selected signal.
monitor, projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable
you to view pictures. B Video input jack

Hookups and Settings

You will enjoy standard quality images.
B A C S VIDEO input jack
You will enjoy high quality images.

D Component video input jacks (Y, PB/CB, b Notes

• Be sure to disconnect the HDMI cord when
PR/CR) moving the recorder.
TV
Audio/video You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction • Do not apply too much pressure to the cabinet
cord (not and high quality images. wall, if you place the recorder on the cabinet with
TV, projector, or audio supplied) If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p the HDMI cord connected. It may damage the
component format signals, use this connection and set HDMI jack or the HDMI cord.
“Progressive” to “Compatible” in the “Easy • Do not twist the HDMI connector while
Setup” setup (page 23). Then set connecting to or disconnecting from the HDMI
to LINE 2 OUT jack to avoid damaging the HDMI jack and
(VIDEO) “Component Video Out” to “Progressive” in
connector.
SCART cord (not supplied) the “Video In/Out” setup to send progressive
video signals. For details, see “Component When playing “wide screen” images
(yellow) Video Out” on page 115.
Some recorded images may not fit your TV
to T LINE 3 – TV screen. To change the picture size, see
E HDMI input jack
page 122.
Use a certified HDMI cord (not supplied) to
enjoy high quality digital picture and sound If you are connecting to a VCR
through the HDMI OUT jack.
Connect your VCR to the LINE 1/
DECODER jack on the recorder (page 26).
When connecting a Sony TV that is
DVD recorder compatible with the HDMI control function, b Notes
to LINE 2 OUT to HDMI OUT
see page 18. • Do not connect more than one type of video cord
(green) (blue) (red)
(S VIDEO) To see the signals from the connected set top between the recorder and your TV at the same
box receiver when the set top box receiver is time.
connected to the recorder using a SCART • Do not make connections A and E at the same
to COMPONENT cord only, turn the recorder on. time.
VIDEO OUT S-video cord HDMI cord • When you connect the recorder to your TV via the
Component video
cord (not supplied) (not supplied) (not supplied) When connecting to the HDMI jack SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to the
recorder automatically when you start playback.
Follow the steps below. Improper handling If necessary, press the TV t button on the
(green) (blue) (red) may damage the HDMI jack and the remote to return the input to the TV.
connector. • If you connect the recorder to a TV with
1 Carefully align the HDMI jack on the SMARTLINK, set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in
the “Video In/Out” setup.
rear of the recorder and the HDMI
D C E connector by checking their shapes.
• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack
(connection E) to DVI jacks that are not HDCP
Make sure the connector is not upside compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).
down or tilted. • Component video and RGB signals are not output
TV, projector, or audio when using the HDMI connection.
component
TV, projector, or audio TV, projector, or audio
component component * This DVD recorder incorporates High-Definition
Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.
: Signal flow HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
Connector is upside down Not straight trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
16 ,continued 17

1-3
 About the SMARTLINK About the HDMI Control Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord
features (for SCART functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre
connections only) Sync (for HDMI connections Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,
only) projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to listen
If the connected TV (or other connected to sound.

Hookups and Settings

equipment such as a set top box) complies By connecting Sony components that are [Speakers] [Speakers]
with SMARTLINK, NexTView Link*3,
MEGALOGIC*1, EASYLINK*2,
compatible with the HDMI Control function
with an HDMI cord (not supplied), operation
Rear (L) Rear (R) A
CINEMALINK*2, Q-Link*3, EURO VIEW is simplified as below:
Audio component with
LINK*4, or T-V LINK*5, you can enjoy the • One-Touch Play (page 61) Front (L) a decoder Front (R)
following SMARTLINK features. • System Power-Off
• TV Direct Rec. (page 32) When you turn the TV off by using the Centre Subwoofer
• One-Touch Play (page 61) power button on the TV’s remote, the
• Preset Download components compatible with the HDMI or to coaxial/HDMI digital input
You can download the tuner preset data Control function turn off automatically.
from your TV to this recorder, and tune the HDMI cord Coaxial digital cord
recorder according to that data in “Easy To prepare for the ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre Sync (not supplied) (not supplied)
Setup.” features
• NexTView Download
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” in the “HDMI
You can easily set the timer by using the
Output” setup (page 126). For details on TV to HDMI OUT to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)
NexTView Download function on your TV.
settings, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the TV.
To prepare for the SMARTLINK features
Set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in the “Video b Notes
In/Out” setup (page 115) and • Depending on the connected component, the
“SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder Only” in HDMI Control function may not work. Refer to
the “Options” setup (page 128). the operating instructions supplied with the
component.
b Notes • The recorder supports only the playback option of
• For correct SMARTLINK connection, you will HDMI Control. “Player” appears on the TV to LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) DVD recorder
need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins. screen when using the HDMI Control functions.
Refer to your TV’s instruction manual as well for
this connection.
• Not all TVs respond to the functions above. INPUT

VIDEO
B
*1 “MEGALOGIC” is a registered trademark of
(white) (yellow)
Grundig Corporation.
*2 “EASYLINK” and “CINEMALINK” are L
trademarks of Philips Corporation.
*3 (red) (white) AUDIO
“Q-Link” and “NexTView Link” are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation. Audio/video cord
R
*4 “EURO VIEW LINK” is a trademark of Toshiba (not supplied)
(yellow)* (red)
Corporation.
*5 TV, projector, or
“T-V LINK” is a trademark of JVC Corporation.
audio component
: Signal flow
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 16).

A Digital audio input jack
If your audio component has a Dolby*1
Digital, DTS*2, or MPEG audio decoder and
a digital input jack, use this connection. You
can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS
(5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround
effects.
18
If you connect a Sony audio component that
is compatible with the HDMI control
function, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the audio component.
,continued 19

B Audio L/R (left/right) input jacks

This connection will use your TV’s or audio Step 4: Connecting the Step 5: Preparing the Controlling TVs with the
component’s two speakers for sound. remote
Mains Lead Remote
z Hint You can adjust the remote’s signal to control
For correct speaker location, see the operating your TV.
instructions supplied with the connected Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN You can control the recorder using the

Hookups and Settings

components.
b Notes
• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to
the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) jacks at the same
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come
from your TV’s speakers.
• With connection B, do not connect the LINE IN
(R-AUDIO-L) and LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)
jacks to your TV’s audio output jacks at the same
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come
from your TV’s speakers.
• With connection A, after you have completed the
connection, make the appropriate settings in the
“Audio Out” setup (page 117). Otherwise, no
sound or a loud noise will come from your
speakers.
• When you connect the recorder to an audio
component using an HDMI cord, you will need to
do one of the following:
– Connect the audio component to the TV with
the HDMI cord, or
– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video
cord other than HDMI cord (component video
cord, S-video cord, or audio/video cord).
*1 Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
*2 “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
terminal of the recorder. Then plug the
recorder and TV mains leads (AC power
cords) into the mains. After you connect the
mains lead, you must wait for a short
while before operating the recorder.
You can operate the recorder once the front
panel display lights up and the recorder enters
standby mode.
If you connect additional equipment to this
recorder (page 26), be sure to connect the
mains lead after all connections are complete.
1 to AC IN
2
to mains
supplied remote. Insert two R6 (size AA)
batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on b Notes
• Depending on the connected unit, you may not be
the batteries to the markings inside the
able to control your TV with some or all of the
battery compartment. When using the buttons below.
remote, point it at the remote sensor on the • If you enter a new code number, the code number
recorder. previously entered will be erased.
Number
buttons
TV/DVD
b Notes
• If the supplied remote interferes with your other DISPLAY
Sony DVD recorder or player, change the
command mode number for this recorder
(page 22).
x
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible
leakage and corrosion. Should leakage occur, do
not touch the liquid with bare hands. Observe the TV [/1
TV 2 +/–
following: TV t
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or
TV PROG
batteries of different manufacturers.
+/–
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an
extended period of time, remove the batteries.
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid
1 Hold down TV [/1 located at the
bottom of the remote.
inside the battery compartment, and insert new
batteries. Do not press the [/1 button at the top of
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked on the remote.
the front panel) to strong light, such as direct
sunlight or a lighting apparatus. The recorder may
2 With TV [/1 pressed down, enter the
not respond to the remote. TV’s manufacturer code using the
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the number buttons.
code number and Command Mode may be reset For instance, to enter “09,” press “0” then
to the default setting. Set the appropriate code “9.” After you enter the last number,
number and Command Mode again. release the TV [/1 button.

20 ,continued 21

1-4
 Code numbers of controllable TVs Auto Channel Setting
If more than one code number is listed, If you have a Sony DVD player Step 6: Easy Setup If you connect a TV to this recorder not
try entering them one at a time until you or more than one Sony DVD using SMARTLINK, select “Auto
find the one that works with your TV. Scan.” Then select your country/region
recorder Make the basic adjustments by following the using </,, and press ENTER. The
Manufacturer Code number on-screen instructions in “Easy Setup.” programme position order will be set
If the supplied remote interferes with your Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit
Sony 01 (default) according to the country/region you

Hookups and Settings

other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the the “Easy Setup” function during this select.
Hitachi 24 command mode number for this recorder and procedure.
JVC 33 the supplied remote to one that differs from
If you connect a TV to this recorder with
the other Sony DVD recorder or player after
Panasonic 17, 49 [/1 SMARTLINK, select “Download from
you have completed “Step 6: Easy Setup.”
TV.” Then select your country/region
Philips 06, 08 The default command mode setting for this
using </,, and press ENTER. The
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.
Samsung 71 tuner preset data will be downloaded
You can check the current Command Mode
from your TV to this recorder. (For
Sanyo 25 in the front panel display. For details, see
details, refer to the operating instructions
Thomson 43 page 127.
GUIDE supplied with your TV.)
Toshiba 38 The default command mode setting for this
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3. </M/m/,, To skip this setting, select “Do not set.”
The remote performs the following: The remote does not function if different ENTER To set the programme positions
command modes are set for the recorder and O RETURN manually, see page 111.
Buttons Operations
remote. Set the same command mode. Clock Setting
TV [/1 Turns your TV on or Select “Auto” when a programme
off.
position in your local area broadcasts a
TV 2 (volume) Adjusts the volume Changing programme positions time signal. The “Auto Clock Setting”
+/– of your TV. of the recorder using the TV [/1 display appears.
TV PROG +/– Selects the remote 1 Select the programme position of the
programme position station that carries a time signal
on your TV. You can change programme positions of the using </,.
TV t (input Switches your TV’s recorder using the number buttons. 1 Turn on the recorder and your TV.
2 Select “Start” using m, and press
select) input source. Then switch the input selector on your ENTER.
TV so that the signal from the recorder If a clock signal cannot be found,
appears on your TV screen. press O RETURN, and set the
To operate the TV/DVD button Number The “Language” display appears. clock manually.
buttons
(for SCART connections only) • If the “Language” display does not
The TV/DVD button switches between TV appear, select “Easy Setup” in the Select “Manual” to set the clock
mode and DVD mode. Press the TV/DVD “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in manually. The “Manual Clock Setting”
button when in stop mode or no menu appears the System Menu (page 110). display appears.
on the TV screen. Point your remote at the
recorder when using this button.
2 Select a language for the on-screen 1 Select the time zone for your area
ENTER displays using M/m, and press using </,, and press m.
TV mode: switch to this when you use the
TV’s tuner mainly. When you start playback, ENTER. 2 Select “On” if you are now on
the input source for the TV is set to the The initial settings message appears. summer time, and press ENTER.
recorder automatically. When you press the 3 Select “Start” using M/m, and press 3 Set the day, month, year, hour, and
x (stop) button during playback, the ENTER. minutes using </M/m/,, and
programme tuned by the TV or external Follow the on-screen instructions to press ENTER to start the clock.
equipment appears. Example: for channel 50
Press “5,” “0,” then press ENTER. make the following settings. TV Screen Size (page 122)
DVD mode: switch to this when you use the
If you have a wide-screen TV, select
recorder’s tuner mainly. When you press the
“Wide (16:9).” If you have a standard
x (stop) button during playback, the
TV, select “Standard (4:3).” This will
programme tuned by the recorder appears.
determine how “wide-screen” images are
To check the current mode, press DISPLAY
displayed on your TV.
(page 35).

22 ,continued 23

Progressive 2 Select “Postal Code,” and press 11 Select “YES” using M/m, and press To fix the set top box controller to your set
When you connect a progressive format ENTER. ENTER. top box receiver
TV to this recorder using the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, 3 Enter your postal code using </M/m/
The display asks for confirmation.
If the Video Window does not switch to
Once you have confirmed that the set top box
controller controls your set top box receiver,
select “Compatible.” ,, and press ENTER. the specified programme position, select fix it in place.
HDD caution messages If “Country” is set to “Others,” you “NO” and press ENTER until the Video
cannot enter a postal code and the 1 Remove the backing on the double-sided
Window switches to the specified

Hookups and Settings

Read the HDD caution messages, and tape.
press ENTER. GUIDE Plus+ system will not search for programme position.
a host channel.
4 Select “Finish Setup” using M/m, and
4 Select “External Receiver 1,” and To receive GUIDE Plus+ system data
press ENTER. your recorder must be turned off
press ENTER.
“Easy Setup” is completed. when not in use. If your recorder is
You can also select “External Receiver connected to a set top box receiver, be
2” or “External Receiver 3” if you have sure to leave the set top box receiver 2 Attach it so that the set top box controller
To return to the previous step connected additional set top box turned on. After initial setup, it may is directly above the remote control
receivers.
Press O RETURN. take up to 24 hours to begin receiving sensor on your set top box receiver.

z Hint
5 Press ENTER to select “Continue.” TV programme listings.

If you want to run “Easy Setup” again, select “Easy
Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in
the System Menu (page 110).
Setting up your set top box
receiver for the GUIDE Plus+®
system
Follow the steps below to set up your set top
box receiver for the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Note that the OSD language, Clock and
Country are all set for the GUIDE Plus+
system when “Easy Setup” is completed.
1 Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Basic Setup”
appears.
6 Select the set top box receiver type
using M/m, and press ENTER.
7 Select the provider using M/m, and
press ENTER.
8 Select the receiver brand using M/m,
and press ENTER.
If you select “Other providers,” you can
select a receiver brand from a list of all
available brands.
If your receiver brand is not on the list,
select “???.”
The receiver brand list is automatically
updated, so your receiver may be
available at a later date. Select your brand
when it becomes available. Until then,
use “???.”
9 Select the connection you used for
your set top box receiver using M/m,
and press ENTER.
When the set top box receiver is
connected to the recorder using hookup
A with both an aerial cable and a SCART
cord, select either “Line1” or “Antenna.”
The display asks for confirmation.
10 Press ENTER to select “Continue.”
The Video Window switches to the
specified programme position.
b Note
You cannot set tuner system or “OSD
Language” to a country/region or language
that is not supported by the GUIDE Plus+
system.
To change the basic GUIDE Plus+ settings
If you cannot get the recorder to control 1 Press GUIDE.
your set top box receiver The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Check the connection and position of the set Screen” appears.
top box controller (page 14).
2 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar using M/
If your set top box receiver still does not
,, and press ENTER.
operate with this recorder, refer to the The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.
instructions supplied with your set top box
receiver and contact your cable or satellite 3 Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and
company to see if they can provide you with press ENTER.
a compatible set top box receiver. 4 Repeat from step 2 of “Setting up your
set top box receiver for the GUIDE
b Notes Plus+® system” on page 24.
• The list of external receivers controllable by the
GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and is
distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data
signals. Since the time your recorder has been
produced and the time you installed your recorder
for the first time, new external receiver codes
might have been added.
• If the external receiver is still not on the list or is
not controlled properly by the recorder, please
call Customer Support to report the brand and
model of your external receiver.

24 25

1-5
 Connecting a VCR or Similar Device Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel
After disconnecting the recorder’s mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder. equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord.
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack) OUTPUT VCR, etc.
(page 84).

Hookups and Settings

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment. L R
To record on this recorder, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 59.

Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack

Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 1/DECODER jack of this recorder.
VCR TV
S-video cord Audio/video cord
(not supplied) (not supplied)

SCART cord (not supplied)

to SCART input
to LINE 2 IN

to i LINE 1/DECODER to T LINE 3 – TV

DVD recorder
DVD recorder : Signal flow
z Hint
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to only the L(MONO) and VIDEO
b Notes
input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack.
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.
• If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.
b Notes
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.
DVD recorder VCR TV
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other
Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).
video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV. • Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.
Line input 1

VCR DVD recorder TV

Line input 2

• The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder’s LINE 1/
DECODER jack.
• When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the
TV/DVD button on the remote.
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected
VCR.

26 27

4 Select “LINE 3 Out,” and press

Connecting an External Decoder Setting external decoder (PAY- ENTER.
TV/Canal Plus analogue
You can watch or record external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) decoder) programme positions
programmes if you connect a decoder (not supplied) to the recorder. Disconnect the recorder’s
mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder. Note that when you set “LINE 1 In” To watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus

Hookups and Settings

to “Decoder” in step 7 of “Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) analogue programmes, set your recorder to
programme positions” (page 29), you will not be able to select “L1” because Line 1 will receive the programme positions using the
become a dedicated line for the decoder. on-screen display.
In order to set the programme positions
correctly, be sure to follow all of the steps
Connecting a decoder below. 5 Press M/m to select “Video” or
“RGB,” and press ENTER.

External decoder (PAY-TV/ 6 Select “LINE 1 In,” and press ENTER.

TV Canal Plus analogue decoder)
Number
buttons
to AERIAL IN

Aerial cable SYSTEM

(supplied) MENU
to SCART input

SCART cord </M/m/,,

(not supplied) ENTER
SCART cord
to T LINE 3 – TV (not supplied) O RETURN 7 Press M/m to select “Decoder,” and
. > press ENTER.
to AERIAL OUT to i LINE 1/DECODER 8 Press O RETURN to return the cursor
to the left column.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
9 Select “Tuner,” and press ENTER.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
ENTER.
DVD recorder

10 Select “Manual CH Setting,” and

press ENTER.

3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press

11 Select “Next Screen,” and press
ENTER.
ENTER.

28 ,continued 29

1-6
 12 Select your country/region, and press
ENTER. Eight Basic Operations
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
2. Recording a
Programme position
Programme
1. Inserting a Disc +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
HDD
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVR -RVideo
-RVideo DVD VCD CD DATA DVD
This section introduces the basic operation to
DATA CD
record a current TV programme to the hard

Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

disk (HDD) or to a disc (DVD). For an
explanation of how to make timer recordings,
Z (open/ see page 51.
close) DVD
13 Select the desired programme
position using ./> or number HDD DVD
buttons. PROG +/–

14 Select “Channel” using M/m. TV/DVD

15 Select the external decoder
programme position using </,. 1 Press DVD.
16 Select “Sound System” using M/m. 2 Press Z (open/close), and place a
disc on the disc tray.
17 Press </, to select an available TV DISPLAY
system, B/G, D/K, I, or L.
To receive broadcasts in France, select
“L.” TV PAUSE
18 Select “Decoder” using M/m. z REC REC MODE
x REC
19 Select “On” using </,, and press STOP
ENTER. Recording/playing side facing down TV t

3 Press Z (open/close) to close the disc

tray.
To return to the previous step Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the 1 Press HDD or DVD.
Press O RETURN. front panel display. If you want to record to a DVD, insert a
Unused DVDs are formatted recordable DVD.
b Note
If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you
automatically. 2 Press PROG +/– to select the
will not be able to view the signals from the • For DVD-RW discs programme position or input source
connected decoder. DVD-RWs are formatted in the
you want to record.
recording format (VR mode or Video
mode) set by “Format DVD-RW” of
“Basic” in the “Disc Setup” setup
(page 108).
• For DVD-R discs
DVD-Rs are automatically formatted in
Video mode. To format an unused
DVD-R in VR mode, format the disc in
the “Format” setup (page 42) before
you make a recording.
If the disc is recordable on this recorder,
you can manually re-format the disc to
make a blank disc (page 42).
30 ,continued 31

3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select
the recording mode.
Each time you press the button, the
display on the TV screen changes as
follows:
* Available when “Manual Rec. Mode” is set
b Notes 4-Title List (Example: HDD)
• To turn off the TV Direct Rec. function, set
“SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through” in the 3. Playing the Recorded
“Options” setup (page 128).
• If you press the [/1 button while recording, the
Programme (Title List)
recorder stops recording and turns off.
• After pressing the z REC button, it may take a HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
short while to start recording. -RVR -RVideo
• You cannot change the recording mode while
recording. To play a recorded title, select the title from
• If there is a power failure, the programme you are the Title List.

Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording”
setup (page 119). recording may be erased.
For more details about the recording • You cannot watch a PAY-TV/Canal Plus
mode, see page 51. programme while recording another PAY-TV/
Canal Plus programme.
HDD DVD m
4 Press z REC. • To use the TV Direct Rec. function, you must first
8-Title List
Recording starts. correctly set the recorder’s clock.
When recording to the HDD, recording
PLAY
stops after 12 hours of continuous
recording or when the HDD is full. Checking the disc status while MODE
TITLE LIST
When recording to a DVD, recording recording
stops when the DVD is full. </M/m/,,
You can check the recording information ENTER
such as recording time or disc type. O RETURN DISPLAY
To stop recording . >
Press x REC STOP. Press DISPLAY during recording.
H
Note that it may take a few seconds for The recording information appears. x
X
recorder to stop recording. A Disc type:
Displays the media type, HDD or DVD.
To watch another TV programme while
B Total number of titles
recording
If your TV is connected to the T LINE 3 – C Sub-menu:
TV jack, set your TV to the TV input using 1 Press HDD or DVD. Press , to display the sub-menu.
the TV/DVD button and select the If you select DVD, insert a DVD (see “1. The sub-menu displays options
programme you want to watch. If your TV is Inserting a Disc” on page 31). applicable only to the selected item. The
connected to the LINE 2 OUT or Playback starts automatically depending displayed options differ depending upon
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the on the disc. the model, situation, and disc type.
TV to TV input using the TV t button
(page 21).
A Recording mode
2 Press TITLE LIST.
To show the 8-Title List, press < to
TV Direct Rec. (for SMARTLINK B Recording time select “Title View,” and press ENTER,
connections only) then select “8 Titles” using M/m, and
C Disc type/format press ENTER.
When the TV is turned on and the recorder is
turned off, press TV PAUSE. The recorder D Recording status
automatically turns on and starts recording
what you are watching on the TV to the HDD. Press DISPLAY to turn off the display.
Sub-menu
Set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 128). D Scroll bar:
Appears when all of the titles do not fit
on the list. To view the hidden titles,
press M/m.

32 ,continued 33

1-7
 E Title information:
Displays the title number, title thumbnail
picture (playback picture for the selected
title, still images for the other titles),
recording date, recorded station name (or
programme position number), recording
mode, title name, and title size.
“Recording”: Indicates that the title is
currently being recorded.
: Indicates protected title.
“NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly
recorded (not played back) (HDD only).
: Press DISPLAY to display
“ .” “ ” indicates titles
containing “Copy-Once” copy protection
signals (HDD only) (page 79).
: Indicates that the title is recorded
using the Update function.
Genre icons: Indicates the title’s genre
(HDD only).
F Remaining time of the current disc in
the current recording mode (example:
SP mode)
G Detailed information for the selected
title
The resume point time is shown in the 8-
Title List.
3 Select a title using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected title.
To stop playback
Press x (stop).
To scroll the list display by page (Page
mode)
Press ./> while the Title List is
displayed. Each time you press ./>,
the entire Title List changes to the next/
previous page of titles.
About the Title List for DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs
(VR mode)
You can switch the Title List to show
Original or Playlist titles.
1 Press < while the Title List is
displayed.
2 Select “Original” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
34
During playback
Example: DVD-R in Video mode
A Playing status
B Shows that the Resume Play is
available (page 61).
C Current selected recording mode
(remaining DVD recording time/disc
type) (page 51)
D Remaining time
E Station name and programme position
number
F Audio setting for the current
programme
G Recording restrictions for the current
programme
H TV mode or DVD mode (page 22)
I Disc information
J Title type (Original or Playlist) for
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode
K Disc type/format (page 9)
Displays the finalised disc in Video
mode as “DVD-Video.”
L Title number-Chapter number
(page 69)
M Playing time
N Multi-angles indicator (page 60)
O Copy-protected indicator (page 79)
P Data transfer bar and rate
36
3 Select “Original” or “Play List” using M/ 4 Select “Set Thumbnail” using M/m, and
m, and press ENTER. press ENTER. 4. Displaying the Playing
The display for setting the thumbnail
To change the title order for HDD (Sort point appears and the title starts to play. Time and Play
Titles) 5
1 Press < while the Title List is
While watching the playback picture,
press H, X or c m/M C
Information
displayed. to select the scene you want to set for a
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
thumbnail picture, and press X.
2 Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press
Playback pauses.
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD CD
ENTER.
Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
You can also select a scene using the DATA DVD DATA CD
3 Select the item using M/m, and press PLAY MODE button (page 69).
ENTER. You can check the playing time of the current
6 Select “OK” using M/m, and press title, chapter, track, or disc. Also, you can
Order Sorted ENTER. check the disc name recorded on the DVD/
By Date In order of when the titles The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail CD.
were recorded. The title picture.
that is recorded most To return to the Title List, press
recently is listed at the top. O RETURN.
Unseen Title In order of when the titles
were recorded. The title To change the thumbnail preview mode
that is recorded most (Set Preview) (HDD only)
recently and has not been You can select “Quick Preview” or “Normal”
played is listed at the top. for the thumbnail preview mode in the Title
Playlist titles are not List. Set “Set Preview” in the “Options” setup
displayed. (page 128).
By Title In alphabetical order.
To turn off the Title List
By Number In order of recorded title DISPLAY
number.
Press TITLE LIST.
z Hint
To search for a title by genre (HDD only)
You can select “Title List” from the System Menu.
1 Press < while the Title List is
b Notes
displayed. Press DISPLAY repeatedly.
• The title names may not appear for DVDs created
The displays differ depending on the disc
2 Select “Genre” using M/m, and press on other DVD recorders.
• It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail type or playing status.
ENTER.
pictures to be displayed.
3 Select a genre using M/m, and press • After editing, the title thumbnail picture may In stop mode
ENTER. change to the first scene of the recording (title). Example: DVD-RW in VR mode
• After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on
To change a title thumbnail picture the source recording is cancelled.
(Thumbnail)
After recording, the first scene of the
recording (the title) is automatically set as the
thumbnail picture.
You can select a favourite scene for the
thumbnail picture shown in the Title List.
1 Press TITLE LIST.
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode),
switch the Title Lists, if necessary.
2 Select a title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
,continued 35
z Hints 4 Select “Title Name,” and press
• When “On Screen Display” is set to “On”
(default) in the “Options” setup (page 127), 5. Changing the Name of ENTER.
The display for entering characters
information automatically appears on the screen
when the recorder is operated.
a Recorded Programme appears.
• To increase disc space, see “To open up disc The current name is displayed at the
space” (page 72). HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R input row.
-RVR -RVideo Input row
b Note
Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be You can label a DVD, title, or programme by
displayed correctly. entering characters. You can enter up to 64 Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
characters for a title recorded in the HDD/
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), 40 characters
for a title recorded in the DVD+RW/DVD-
RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
mode), but the actual number of characters
displayed in the menus such as the Title List
will vary. The steps below explain how to
change the name of the recorded programme. 5 Move the cursor to the point where you
want to insert the character using
m/M.
Number
To erase all of the characters, press and
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.
buttons
6 Select “Upper case” or “Lower case”
CLEAR using ./>.
The characters for the selected type are
TITLE LIST displayed.
</M/m/,, The type of characters will change
ENTER according to the language you select in
O RETURN “Easy Setup.”
. > 7 Press </M/m/, to select the
m M character you want to enter, and press
x
X ENTER.
The selected character appears at the
input row.
To insert a space, press X (or select
“Space,” and press ENTER).
1 Press TITLE LIST. 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the
remaining characters.
2 Select a title, and press ,. To erase a character, move the cursor to
The sub-menu appears. the character at the input row, and press
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER. CLEAR (or select “Clear,” and press
ENTER).
To insert a character, move the cursor to
the right of the point where you want to
insert the character. Then select the
character, and press ENTER.
To erase all of the characters, press and
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.
,continued 37
1-8
 9 Press x (or select “OK,” and press
ENTER).
To cancel the setting, press
O RETURN.
To use the number buttons
You can also use the number buttons to enter
characters. Refer to the number next to each
row of letters on your TV screen.
1 In step 7 above, press a number button
repeatedly to select a character.
Example:
Press the number 3 button once to enter
“D.”
Press the number 3 button three times to
enter “F.”
2 Press ENTER and select the next
character.
3 Press x (or select “OK,” and press
ENTER).
38
7. Playing the Disc on
Other DVD Equipment
(Finalise)
+RW
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR
Finalising is necessary when you play discs
recorded with this recorder on other DVD
equipment.
When you finalise a DVD+RW, DVD-RW
(Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video
mode), a DVD menu will be automatically
created, which can be displayed on other
DVD equipment.
Before finalising, check the differences
between the disc types in the table below.
Differences between disc types
+RW
Discs are automatically finalised
when removed from the recorder.
However, you may need to finalise
the disc for certain DVD
equipment, or if the recording time
is short. You can edit or record on
the disc even after finalising.
-RWVR Finalising is unnecessary when
playing a disc on VR format
compatible equipment.
Even if your other DVD equipment
is VR format compatible, you may
need to finalise the disc, especially
if the recording time is short. You
can edit or record on the disc even
after finalising.
-RWVideo
Finalising is necessary when
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder.
After finalising, you cannot edit or
record on the disc. If you want to
record on it again, unfinalise
(page 41) or reformat the disc
(page 42). However, if you
reformat the disc, all recorded
contents will be erased.
Finalising is necessary. The disc
-RVR
can be played only on equipment
that supports DVD-R in VR mode.
After finalising you cannot edit or
record on the disc using this
recorder.
40
4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER. 4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
6. Labelling and
Protecting a Disc
You can execute options effective for the
entire disc in the “Disc Setup” setup.
Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
5 Select “Input Disc Name,” and press 5 Select “Protect Disc,” and press
ENTER. ENTER.
6 Select “Next Screen,” and press
SYSTEM ENTER.
MENU Enter the disc name (page 37).
</M/m/,,
ENTER b Note
You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD-RW/
DVD-R (VR mode) disc name, and 40 characters
for a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/
DVD-R (Video mode) disc name. The disc name 6 Select “On,” and press ENTER.
may not appear when the disc is played on other
DVD equipment. 7 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
Labelling a disc
Protecting a disc To cancel the protection
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR Select “Off” in step 6.
-RVideo -RWVR -RVR
z Hint
1 Insert a disc. 1 Insert a disc. You can set protection for individual titles
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31. (page 72).
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU. 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears. The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press 3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER. ENTER.
39
+R
Finalising is necessary when 6 Select “Next Screen,” and press b Note
-RVideo
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder.
ENTER. The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs
(Video mode) that have been finalised on another
For DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), the
After finalising, you cannot edit or
record on the disc.
recorder starts finalising the disc. Go to
recorder.
step 9.
1 Insert a disc.
7 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31.
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)
Select a title menu style, and press
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
ENTER.
Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
The menu appears in the selected title 3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
menu style when the “top menu” (or ENTER.
“menu” for a DVD+RW/DVD+R) is
SYSTEM selected on the DVD equipment.
MENU
8 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/
</M/m/,, DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)
ENTER
DISPLAY
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts finalising the disc.
9 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.
1 Insert a disc. z Hint
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31. You can check whether the disc has been finalised
or not. Press DISPLAY after step 1 (page 35).
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears. b Notes
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
• Depending on the condition of the disc,
recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not
ENTER. play even if the discs are finalised.
• The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc
if it was recorded on another recorder.
• Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD 5 Select “Unfinalise,” and press
equipment may damage the recorded contents. ENTER.
• When using a DVD+RW, you can edit or record
on the disc even after finalising. However, the
title menu will not be displayed. Finalise the disc
again to display the title menu.
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER. Unfinalising a disc
-RWVR -RWVideo
For DVD-RWs (Video mode)
DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts unfinalising the disc.
finalised to prohibit additional recording or
Unfinalising may take several minutes.
editing can be unfinalised to allow further
recording or editing.
For DVD-RWs (VR mode)
5 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER. If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW
(VR mode) that has been finalised with other
DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.
41
1-9

8. Reformatting a Disc
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo -RVR -RVideo
New discs are automatically formatted when
inserted. If necessary, you can manually re-
format a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R
disc to make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs or
DVD-Rs, you can select a recording format
(VR mode or Video mode) according to your
needs.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Insert a disc.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
42
“Info”: Shows information when
available.
“Editor”: Allows you to edit the
channel lineup and channel display
(page 49).
“Setup”: Allows you to change the
language, country/region, postal code,
input source, or host channel.
E “Home” position: When you press the
blue button (“Home”), the cursor
returns to the last programme position
on the “Grid.”
F Tiles: Shows the programme titles and
category; green (sports), purple
(movies), blue (children’s), teal
(others).
G Broadcast station Logo: Shows the
broadcast station logo.
H Time Slot: Indicates the currently
selected time slot. Use </, to select
a different time slot.
z Hint
You can also move the cursor to the Menu Bar by
pressing MENU.
Troubleshooting guide
If you are having trouble displaying the
television programme list, please check the
following:
• Your country/region must be set correctly
(page 23).
• The clock must be set correctly. If the clock
is not set, set it manually (page 109).
• This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus+
data several times a day when the recorder
is turned off (standby mode). Turn off the
recorder when you are not using it (for
example, at night). After initial setup
(page 23), it may take up to 24 hours for
your recorder to start receiving programme
listings. It may take up to one day to receive
all seven days of TV programme listings.
44
4 Select “Format,” and press ENTER.
5 Select an item, and press ENTER.
“VR Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/DVD-
Rs (VR mode or unrecorded discs) in VR
mode.
“Video Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs in Video mode.
“Format DVD+RW”: Formats
DVD+RWs.
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
All contents on the disc are erased.
z Hint
By reformatting, you can change the recording
format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-
RWs that have been finalised.
• Check the following if the programme
guide data has not been received after
waiting for a day:
– “Easy Setup” (page 23) is completed.
– The host channel is not disabled (see
“Disabling programme positions” on
page 50).
– The timer is not set.
If the programme guide data still cannot be
received after checking the above, search
for the host channel at the following
website and set the host channel manually
(page 49):
www.europe.guideplus.com
• If the host channel has changed or moved,
the programme guide data cannot be
received. In this case, follow the steps in
“Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel” (page 48) to update the host
channel setting.
• If the set top box receiver is connected to
the recorder using a SCART cord only, do
the following:
– Turn on your set top box receiver.
– Connect the set top box controller.
– Follow the steps in “Changing the GUIDE
Plus+ host channel manually” (page 49)
to set the host channel manually. Be sure
to set your set top box receiver (tuner) as
the source.
b Notes
• Your set top box receiver’s programme position
may suddenly change even if the recorder is
turned off. This is because the set top box
controller has changed the programme position to
receive the GUIDE Plus+ data.
• When you reset the recorder (page 136) the
following GUIDE Plus+ system settings are reset:
– Country/region setting in “Easy Setup”
– “Country” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the
Menu Bar
– “Postal Code” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the
Menu Bar
Note that the GUIDE Plus+ system is also reset
when you make changes to the host channel
settings.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used when
“Input Line System” is set to “NTSC” in the
“Basic” setup (page 110).
1-10
GUIDE Plus+
Introduction to the
GUIDE Plus+ System
The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free
interactive programme guide. It displays up
to seven days of programme listings,
including programme titles, promotions, and
broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data for
the television programme listings are carried
by your local broadcast host channel and are
received through your aerial, set top box
receiver, or direct cable connection from the
wall.
Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list of
all European host channels.
These are just a few of the ways to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
– Search for programmes by listing them
according to category (such as Movies or
Sport) or by using the Keyword Search
function (page 46).
– Once you have found the programme you
are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+
system to set the timer for recording
(page 53).
– You can set the system to display your
favourite programmes according to
conditions that you set, such as category
and keyword (page 47).
For more information, see “Watching TV
Using the GUIDE Plus+ System” (page 45).
Watching TV Using the
GUIDE Plus+ System
Colour
buttons
GUIDE
</M/m/,,
ENTER
PAGE – PAGE +
DAY – DAY +
1 Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Screen” appears.
2 Select a programme using </M/m/
,, and press ENTER.
The GUIDE Plus+ system disappears and
the programme position changes to the
selected programme.
Learning the common elements
Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”
appears.
GUIDE Plus+
A Video Window: This shows the
programme you were watching when
you pressed GUIDE.
B Action Bar: When the same colour
button on the remote is pressed, the
Action Bar functions. The Action Bar
function differs according to the
screen.
C Information Box: Shows information
about the selected programme when
the “Home Screen” is displayed.
Contents will differ according to the
displayed screen.
D Menu Bar: Press the blue button
(“Home”), and press M to move the
cursor to the Menu Bar. Then select
one of the following features using </
,, and press ENTER.
“Grid”: Shows the programmes for the
current time slot and next 7 days.
“Search”: Allows you to search for
titles by category or by keyword
(page 46). The displayed category
depends upon the programme data
received by this recorder. Movies,
Sport, and Children are examples of
possible categories.
“My TV”: Sets the profile for your
favourite programmes (page 47).
“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer
settings (page 57).
,continued 43
To select a programme position quickly
using the TV broadcast station logo
1
Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Screen” appears.
2 Press the yellow button (“Channels”).
GUIDE Plus+
3 Select the TV broadcast station logo
using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.
The display returns to “Grid” and the
programme currently being broadcast by
the selected TV station is selected.
4 Select a programme using </,, and
press ENTER.
To return to the “Home” position
Press the blue button (“Home”).
The cursor returns to the home position on the
“Grid.”
To set a programme for timer recording
See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+)”
(page 53).
To close the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press GUIDE.
z Hints
• Press the PAGE +/– buttons to change the
programme list by page.
• Press the DAY +/– buttons to change the
programme list by day.
,continued 45
 To unlock the Video Window
The Video Window is locked so that it does
not change programme positions when you
move the cursor across other titles.
From “Grid,” select the logo of the
programme position that is locked, and press
the red button (“Unlock”). “ ” changes to
“ ” and the Video Window is unlocked. To
lock the Video Window, select the logo of the
programme position you want to lock and
press the red button (“Lock”).
b Notes
• The Video Window is locked during recording
and the lock indicator appears in the Video
Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window
while recording.
• If you are watching programmes through a set top
box receiver, the Video Window may not change
as fast as you move the cursor. In this case, lock
the Video Window (page 46).
46
2 Select “Channels,” “Categories,” or
“Keywords,” and press the yellow
button (“Add”).
“Channels”: Select the programme
position using </M/m/,, and press
ENTER. To add more programme
positions, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 16
programme positions.
To cancel the registration, select a
programme position, and press the red
button (“Delete”).
“Categories”: Select the category using
</M/m/,, and press ENTER. To add
more categories, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 4
categories.
To cancel the registration, select a
category, and press the red button
(“Delete”).
“Keywords”: Enter a keyword. See “To
enter a new keyword” on page 47. To add
more keywords, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 16
keywords.
To cancel the registration, select a
keyword, and press the red button
(“Delete”).
3 Press ENTER.
To change the profile settings
Repeat from step 1 above.
Selecting and watching a
programme from My TV
1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
The programmes that match the profile
conditions are displayed.
2 Select a programme using </M/m/
,, and press ENTER.
To set a programme for timer recording
See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+)”
(page 53).
48
Searching for a
Programme Using the
GUIDE Plus+ System
Colour
buttons
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
2 Select a category using </,.
To search for a programme by keyword,
select “My Choice.” You can search for
all programmes that contain the keyword
in the programme’s title and in the
programme’s Information Box. If no
keywords are displayed, enter the
keyword. See “To enter a new keyword”
below.
3 Select a sub-category using M/m, and
press ENTER.
Programmes that meet the conditions are
listed.
The sub-categories differ according to
country/region.
Making Changes to the
GUIDE Plus+ System
[/1
Number
buttons
Colour
buttons
GUIDE
</M/m/,,
ENTER
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+
host channel
The default host channel setting is set to
“Automatic,” so you should not have to
change the host channel setting. However, if
the host channel has changed or moved,
update the host channel setting.
If the set top box receiver is connected to the
recorder using a SCART cord only (page 14),
see “Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel manually” on page 49.
1
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.
2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/
m, and press ENTER.
3 Press the yellow button (“Reset”).
4 Press [/1 to turn off the recorder.
1-11
4 Select a programme using M/m, and
press ENTER. Listing Up Your Favourite
Programme Information
To enter a new keyword
(My TV)
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
You can set a profile and list up only your
2 Select “My Choice” using </,. favourite programme information.
GUIDE Plus+
3 Press the yellow button (“Add”).
The display for entering characters
appears.
Colour
buttons
</M/m/,,
ENTER
4 Select a character on the keyboard using
</M/m/,, and press ENTER.
To switch between upper-case, lower-
case, or characters with accents, press the Setting a profile
yellow button (“Keyboard”) repeatedly.
To cancel entering a new keyword, press 1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and
the red button (“Back”). press the yellow button (“Profile”).
5 Repeat step 4 to enter the keyword.
6 Press the green button (“Save”).
The entered keyword is registered.
To delete the keyword, select the
keyword you want to delete, and press
the red button (“Delete”).
To change the keyword, select the
keyword you want to change, and press
the green button (“Edit”).
To set a programme for timer recording
See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+)”
(page 53).
z Hint
When two or more keywords are set for “My
Choice,” you can select “All” for sub-category.
,continued 47
5 Wait for one day until the programme 9 Select “Confirm” using </,, and
guide data can be received. press ENTER.
If the programme guide data has not been The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+
received after waiting for a day, search setup menu.
for the host channel at the following
website and set the host channel
10 Wait one day until the programme
manually (“Changing the GUIDE Plus+ guide data can be received.
host channel manually” (page 49)).
www.europe.guideplus.com
To cancel the settings
GUIDE Plus+
Press the red button (“Back”).
Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host
To return to the “Home” position
channel manually Press the blue button (“Home”).
The cursor returns to the home position on the
If the set top box receiver is connected to the
“Grid.”
recorder using a SCART cord only and you
want to receive the programme guide data
To check the GUIDE Plus+ system
from your set top box receiver, search for the
host channel on the following website and set
information
it for your area, following the steps below: 1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar, and
www.europe.guideplus.com press ENTER.
2 Select “GUIDE Plus+ system
1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar. Information” using M/m, and press
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears. ENTER.
2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/
m, and press ENTER.
Checking programme positions
3 Press the yellow button (“Change”)
twice. Check whether programme position numbers
“Manual” appears. are the same as the programme position
numbers set in the “Tuner” setup.
If you want to make adjustments to the
channel settings or change the channel name,
see “Aerial Reception Settings (Tuner)”
(page 111).
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar.
4 Select “Source” using ,.
5
Press the yellow button (“Source”)
repeatedly to select the input source.
6 Select “Prog. No.” using ,.
7 Enter the programme position number
using the number buttons. 2 Press ENTER.
8 Press the green button (“Save”). 3 Press , to move the cursor to the
The display asks for confirmation. right column.
,continued 49
 4 Select the programme position you Approx. recording time
want to check using M/m. (hours)
To change the programme position, press Timer Recording Recording
HDD DVD*1
the green button (“Prog. No.”), then enter mode
a programme position number using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
Before Recording RDR-
HX750
RDR-
HX950

Before you start recording… HQ (High 34 53 1 hr.

quality) 1 min.
b Note • Check that the disc has enough available
To receive from the recorder a programme position space for the recording (page 35). For the HSP R 50 79 1 hr.
that can be received by either the set top box HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you 30 min.
receiver or the recorder, change the input source in can free up disc space by erasing titles SP (Standard 68 105 2
step 4. (page 72).

Timer Recording
mode)
• Adjust the recording picture quality if
LSP r 84 130 2 hr.
necessary (page 56). 30 min.
Disabling programme positions
b Note ESP r 100 155 3
If any programme positions are unused or To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment,
LP r 135 210 4
contain unwanted channels, you can hide finalise the disc (page 40).
them. EP r 200 315 6
SLP r 270 425 8
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar, and Recording mode
press ENTER. SEP*2 (Long 340 530 10
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of duration)
2 In the left column, select the video tapes, you can select the desired *1 The approximate recording time is for 12 cm
programme position you want to hide recording mode using the REC MODE DVD discs.
or display using M/m. button. The approximate recording times for DVD+R
Recording modes with higher quality provide DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)
3 Press the red button (“On/Off”). a more beautiful recording, but the large data discs are as follows:
The disabled positions will turn grey. volume also results in a shorter recording HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes
To show the disabled positions, press the time. HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes
red button (“On/Off”) again. SP: 3 hours 35 minutes
Conversely, a longer duration provides a
LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes
longer recording time, but the lower data
ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes
volume results in a coarser picture quality.
b Notes LP: 7 hours 11 minutes
• You cannot record a programme position if it is EP: 10 hours 46 minutes
not set in “Aerial Reception Settings (Tuner)”
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes
(page 111) even if it is set to “On” in the “Editor” recording modes. SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes
*2 When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP
in the Menu Bar. To select further options for recording mode
• If you are using your set top box receiver to is the longest recording time available. If you
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec.
receive programmes (when the set top box select SEP, the recording mode will
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the
receiver is connected to the recorder using a automatically revert to SLP.
“Recording” setup (page 119). To record
SCART cord only, page 14) and are able to
pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on z Hint
receive the same programme with both the set top
the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On To easily select a manual recording mode, press
box receiver and the recorder, change the
“Source” to receive the programme with the (go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and
recorder’s tuner. details about manual recording mode, see select a manual recording mode using </,.
page 119.
For timer recording, you can also select
“AUTO” as recording mode, which
maximizes the recording quality for the space
available on the disc (if recording to DVD),
or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to
HDD).

50 ,continued 51

b Notes ZWEITON (German stereo) system 1 Press GUIDE.

• The maximum continuous recording time to the
HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer
When a stereo-based programme is received,
“Stereo” appears.
Timer Recording (GUIDE
than 12 hours is divided.
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies
When a bilingual ZWEITON-based Plus+/Manual)
with the recording time. programme is received, “L,” “R,” or “L+R”
– Recording a programme with poor reception, or appears. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
a programme or video source of low picture -RVR -RVideo
quality. NICAM system
– Recording on a disc that has already been To record a NICAM programme, be sure to There are two methods to set the timer within
edited. set “NICAM Select” to “NICAM” (default) the GUIDE Plus+ system: One Button
– Recording only a still picture or just sound. in the “Audio In” setup. If the sound is not Recording and setting the timer manually.
• Programmes are recorded in the following aspect clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts, You can set the timer for a total of 32
ratio.
Timer Recording

– In the original aspect ratio, when recording to

set “NICAM Select” to “Standard”
(page 116).
programmes (8 programmes when using the
VPS/PDC function), up to 30 days in
2 Select a programme using </M/m/
the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is
advance.
,.
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” To search for a programme by category
setup (page 122))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR z Hint
mode). You can select the audio (main or sub) while b Notes or by keyword, select “Search” in the
– In 4:3, when recording to DVD+RWs/ recording bilingual programmes using the AUDIO • When the recorder is connected to a set top box Menu Bar. See “Searching for a
DVD+Rs. button. This does not affect the recorded sound. receiver and you want to record using the GUIDE Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+
• When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode), Plus+ system, turn on the set top box receiver and System” on page 46 for more
the title is divided when the layer switches. connect the set top box controller. information about searching for a
Unrecordable pictures • Do not operate your set top box receiver just programme.
before or during a timer recording. This may
You can select a programme from “My
prevent the accurate recording of a programme.
Recording stereo and bilingual Pictures with copy protection cannot be TV” (page 47).
recorded on this recorder.
programmes 3 Press the red button (“Record”) or
Copy control Recordable discs One Button Recording (GUIDE z REC.
The recorder automatically receives and signals Plus+) The set programme and Time Slot
records stereo and bilingual programmes Copy-Free change colour and the recorder is ready
HDD +RW -RWVR
based on the ZWEITON system or the You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set to start recording. When recording from a
NICAM system. -RWVideo +R -RVR the timer to record a programme up to seven set top box receiver, be sure to turn it on.
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” -RVideo days in advance. Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off
is set to “Video Mode Off” in the the recorder before the timer recording
Copy-Once HDD
“Recording” setup (page 122)) and a DVD- starts.
RW (VR mode) and DVD-R (VR mode) can -RWVR (CPRM*) • To record on a DVD
record both main and sub sounds. You can See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling
-RVR (CPRM*)
switch between main and sub when playing Timer Settings” on page 57.
the disc. Copy-Never None • To make more detailed timer settings
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” Colour
See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM buttons
is set to “Video Mode On” in the “Recording” Timer Settings” on page 57.
compatible equipment (page 9). GUIDE
setup (page 122)) and a DVD+RW, DVD+R,
DVD-RW (Video mode), or DVD-R (Video
mode) can record only one sound track (main </M/m/, To confirm, change, or cancel a timer
or sub) at a time. Select the sound track in the recording
“Audio In” setup before recording starts. Set See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” (default) or Settings” on page 57.
“B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 116).
About HDD Recording format, see page 122. To stop recording during timer recording
z REC
x REC Press x REC STOP.
STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.

52 ,continued 53

1-12
 Rec. Mode Adjust
If there is not enough available disc space for
the recording, the recorder automatically
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”
setup (page 121).
If the timer settings overlap
If one or more timer settings overlap, a
message appears. To change the timer
settings, see “Checking/Changing/
Cancelling Timer Settings” on page 57.
z Hint
If you are recording to the HDD, you can play the
title as it is being recorded by selecting the
programme title on the Title List (page 68).
b Notes
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full
appears on the screen, change the recording
destination to “DVD,” or make available space
for the recording (page 72).
• If there is not enough available DVD disc space
for the recording, the recorder automatically
records the programme to the HDD even if you
select “DVD” (Recovery Recording).
• The last recording mode you selected manually
becomes the default recording mode for timer
recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system.
• You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or
DVD) once the recording starts.
• The beginning of some recordings may not be
made when using the VPS/PDC function.
• You cannot extend the recording duration time
when “VPS/PDC” is selected (page 58).
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works
with a timer recording to DVD, and the VPS/PDC
function set to off.
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”
54
Adjusting the recording picture
quality
You can adjust the picture quality from the
connected equipment, such as a TV or VCR
by selecting a preset setting. You can also
adjust the picture quality by changing
detailed settings, and store up to three settings
in the memory.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
DISPLAY
1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and
press ENTER.
3 Select a preset setting, and press
ENTER.
“Tuner”: TV broadcasts
“VCR”: Video cassettes
“DTV”: Digital broadcasts
“Memory1”/“Memory2”/“Memory3”:
Your own settings. To create your own
settings, see “To create your own setting”
on page 56.
To check the detailed settings for the
selected preset, press DISPLAY.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
56
Setting the timer manually
Number
buttons
Colour
buttons
GUIDE
</M/m/,,
ENTER
z REC
x REC
STOP
1 Press GUIDE.
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.
The SCHEDULE list appears.
3 Press the green button (“Manual”).
4 Set the date using the number buttons
and </M/m/,. Then press the
green button (“Next”).
5 Set the start time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
6 Set the stop time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
To create your own setting
1 Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or
“Memory3” in step 3.
2 Select “Detailed Settings,” and press
ENTER.
The display for adjusting detailed
settings appears.
3 Select an item using M/m, and adjust
settings using </,.
For details about each setting, see the
explanation of the display.
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive
video signal when “Component Video
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 115).
Select “Motion” for a picture, including
subjects that move dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture with little
movement.
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive
video signal to match the type of DVD
software that you are watching when
“Component Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 115).
Select “Auto” to detect the software type
(Film-based or Video-based)
automatically and select the appropriate
conversion mode. Normally select this
position.
Select “Off” to fix the conversion mode
to the mode for Video-based software.
“3-D Y/C”: Adjusts the brightness/
colour separation for the video signals.
Select “Motion” for a picture, including
subjects that move dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture with little
movement.
“YNR” (luminance noise reduction):
Reduces noise contained in the
luminance element of the video signal.
“CNR” (chroma noise reduction):
Reduces noise contained in the chroma
element of the video signal.
“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of
images outlines.
“White AGC”: Turn on for automatic
white level adjustment.
“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of white.
“Black Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of black.
1-13
7 Select the input source using M/m,
and select the programme position Using the Quick Timer function
using the number buttons or M/m.
You can set the recorder to record in 30-
You can also select the programme
minute increments.
position using the yellow button
(“Channels”).
Press z REC repeatedly to set the
8 Press the green button (“Next”). duration.
The display for entering characters Each press advances the time in 30-minute
appears. increments. The maximum duration is six
To change the title name, select a hours.
character on the keyboard using </M/
m/,, and press ENTER.
Timer Recording
To switch between upper-case, lower-
case, or characters with accents, press the (normal recording)
yellow button (“Keyboard”).
The time counter decreases minute by minute
9 Press the green button (“Save”). to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the
The date, start and stop times, power turns off).
programme position, etc. settings appear.
The recorder is ready to start recording. To cancel the Quick Timer
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter
appears in the front panel display. The
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer recorder returns to normal recording mode.
recording To stop recording, press x REC STOP.
See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
Settings” on page 57. b Note
If you turn off the recorder during recording,
To stop recording during timer recording
recording is stopped.
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
Rec. Mode Adjust
If there is not enough available disc space for
the recording, the recorder automatically
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”
setup (page 121).
,continued 55
“Black Level”: Selects the black level
(setup level) for the NTSC video signals. Checking/Changing/
Select “ON” to raise the standard black
level. Select this when the picture Cancelling Timer
appears too dark.
Select “OFF” to set the black level of the Settings
input signals to the standard level.
Normally, select this position. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance. -RVR -RVideo
“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours
deeper or lighter. You can change or cancel timer settings using
the SCHEDULE list.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
Timer Recording
The setting is automatically stored as the
setting you selected in step 1.
Number
buttons
Creating chapters in a title
Colour
The recorder can automatically divide a buttons
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting GUIDE
chapter marks. To select chapter mark
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto
</M/m/,
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)”
in the “Recording” setup (page 121).
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can
edit chapter marks (page 75).
Changing timer settings
1 Press GUIDE.
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.
The SCHEDULE list appears.
,continued 57
 3 Select the timer setting you want to
change using M/m, and press the
green button (“Edit”).
b Notes
• The new settings become effective when you exit
the GUIDE Plus+ system.
• When you set the recording destination to
“HDDr,” the previous timer recording will be
replaced with the new one even if you have not
watched it.
About the VPS/PDC function
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV
programmes in some broadcast systems.
These signals ensure that timer recordings are
made regardless of any broadcast delays,
3 Select the desired audio signal when
Recording from recording a bilingual programme to
the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video
Connected Equipment mode).
Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R “Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R”
-RVR -RVideo in the “Audio In” setup (page 116).
You can record from a connected VCR or 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar the recording mode.
device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar For details about the recording mode, see
Device” on page 26. Use the DV IN jack on page 51.

4 In the left column, select an item
using the red button (“Back”) or the
green button (“Next”), and adjust
using the number buttons or </M/m/
,.
You can change the date, start time, stop
time, programme position, or input
source.
The cursor moves to the right column.
5 Press the corresponding colour button
repeatedly to change settings.
• Yellow button (“Destination”): Sets the
recording destination. If there is not
enough available DVD disc space for
the recording, the recorder
automatically records the programme
to the HDD even if you select “DVD”
(Recovery Recording). When you set a
daily or weekly timer, “HDDr” allows
you to replace the previous timer
recording with the new one
automatically (HDD only).
• Green button (“Frequency”): Selects
the recording pattern.
• Red button (“Quality”): Selects the
recording mode (page 51).
6 Press , to display “Timing.”
7 Press the green button (“Timing”)
repeatedly to select the duration time
or to set the VPS/PDC function.
See “About the VPS/PDC function”
below.
• If you want to record to a particular
HDD genre, press the yellow button
(“Genre”) repeatedly.
58
Timer Recording
the front panel if the equipment has a DV
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.
output jack (i.LINK jack). 5 Insert the source tape into the
To use the VPS/PDC function connected equipment and set to
Select “VPS / PDC” in step 7 above. playback pause.
When you turn on this function, the recorder
starts scanning the channels before the timer
HDD DVD
6 Press z REC.
recording starts. This recorder starts recording.
b Note
INPUT
7 Press the pause (or play) button on the
The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO” connected equipment to cancel the
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.” playback pause status.
The connected equipment starts playback
and the playback image is recorded by
Cancelling timer settings
this recorder.
To stop recording, press x REC STOP
1 Press GUIDE. on this recorder.
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.
The SCHEDULE list appears.
z REC REC MODE If you connect a digital video camera with
3 Select the timer setting you want to x REC a DV IN jack
cancel using M/m, and press the red STOP See “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 84
button (“Delete”). for an explanation of how to record from the
DV IN jack.
To close the SCHEDULE list 1 Press HDD or DVD. z Hint
Press GUIDE. If you select DVD, insert a recordable You can adjust the settings for the recording picture
DVD (see “1. Inserting a Disc” on before recording. See “Adjusting the recording
When the timer settings overlap page 31). picture quality” on page 56.
• The programme that starts first has priority
and the entire programme is recorded.
2 Press INPUT to select an input source b Notes
according to the connection you • When recording a video game image, the screen
• After finishing the previous recording, the
made. may not be clear.
other recording starts with several tens-of-
second’s delay (when the end-time of one The front panel display changes as • You cannot select “Bilingual” in step 3 if “HDD
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in
recording and the start-time of another are follows:
the “Recording” setup (page 122), or if you select
the same). programme position PCM as recording mode.
• When the recordings start at the same time, • You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup
the timer setting for the programme that you (page 115).
are not going to record.
b Note
When “VPS / PDC” is set for one or more timer
recordings, the start times may change in the event
of a broadcast delay or early start.
59

3 Select a title using M/m, and press To display the registration code for this To lock the recorder (Child Lock)
ENTER. recorder You can lock all of the buttons on the
Playback Playback starts from the selected title. Select “Registration Code” of “DivX” in the recorder so that the settings are not cancelled
“Options” setup (page 128). by mistake.
Playing the Recorded To resume playback from the point where
When the recorder is turned off, hold down x
To use the DVD’s Menu on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in
Programme/DVD When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalised you stopped (Resume Play) the front panel display. The recorder does not
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), When you press H again after you stop work except for timer recordings while the
DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode), you can playback, the recorder resumes playback Child Lock is set.
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
display the disc’s menu by pressing TOP from the point where you pressed x.
MENU or MENU. To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the
DATA CD *
To start from the beginning, press x again, recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the
* DivX video file only b Note and press H. Playback starts from the front panel display.
The H button is not available in the disc’s menu. beginning of the title/track/scene.
One-Touch Play (for SCART/HDMI
Playback

HDD DVD To play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs with The point where you stopped playing is connections only)
PBC functions cleared when: Press H. With one touch of the H button,
Number
buttons PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play – you open the disc tray (except HDD). the recorder and your TV automatically turn
CLEAR VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs – you play another title (except HDD). on and the TV’s input is switched to the
AUDIO
ANGLE interactively using the menu on your TV recorder. Playback starts automatically.
SUBTITLE
PLAY MODE
– you switch the Title List to Original or
SYSTEM screen. Playlist (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode
MENU TITLE LIST/ When you start playing a VIDEO CD/Super only). z Hint
MENU TOP MENU You can also use the H button in step 3 (page 60)
VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the menu – you edit the title after stopping playback.
</M/m/,, appears. to start playback.
ENTER – you change the settings on the recorder.
Select an item using the number buttons, and – you make a recording (except HDD/DVD-
/
DISPLAY
press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions b Note
. >
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode). When using the HDMI connection, there may be a
in the menu (press H when “Press – you disconnect the mains lead. delay, before the playback picture appears on the
SELECT” appears). TV screen, and the beginning portion of the
H/X/x
b Notes playback picture may not be displayed.
b Note • You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.
Some playback options such as search, repeat play • Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO
or programme play cannot be played with PBC CDs.
function. To play with playback options, start
playback without PBC functions using the Title To play restricted DVDs (Parental Control)
List.
1 Press HDD or DVD. If you play a restricted DVD, the display for
• If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1. entering your password appears on your TV
To change the angles
Inserting a Disc” on page 31). screen.
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO Enter your four-digit password using the
are recorded on the disc, “ ” appears on
CD, DATA DVD or DATA CD, press number buttons, and press ENTER.
the screen. Press ANGLE during playback.
H. Playback starts. The recorder starts playback.
To switch the angle mark indicator to off, set
2 Press TITLE LIST. “Angle Indicator” to “Off” in the “Playback”
setup (page 124).
To register or change the password, see
For details about the Title List, see “3. “Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only)” on
Playing the Recorded Programme (Title page 123.
List)” on page 33.
To stop playback
Example: HDD Press x.

To playback quickly with sound (Scan

Audio)
When you press M during playback, you
can play quickly with dialogue or sound
(except for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO
CDs).
No sound is output when you press M two
or more times to change search speed.
60 ,continued 61

1-14
 Buttons Operations
Playback options
Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in
To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 60. (slow, freeze frame) pause mode.
Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode.
HDD +RW -RWVR
Buttons Operations To resume normal playback, press H.
-RWVideo +R -RVR
AUDIO Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed *1
-RVideo DVD VCD
-RWVR -RVR
repeatedly in normal playback mode.
HDD *1*2 *1*2
DVD VCD DATA DVD * DVD DATA DVD * DATA CD * : Selects the language. DATA DVD DATA CD
*1
-RVR : Selects the main or sub sound. Playback direction only
DATA CD * HDD -RWVR *2
DivX video file only
* DivX video file only VCD : Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.
X (pause) Pauses playback.
SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly. To resume normal playback, press H.
DVD DATA DVD * DATA CD *
b Notes

* DivX video file only
/ (instant replay/
instant advance)
. (previous)/
> (next)
(fast reverse/fast forward)
Playback
• Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles
Each time you press , replays the scene for the following recorded on this recorder.
duration. • JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder
5 seconds t 15 seconds t 30 seconds t 1 minute t can only be played as a slideshow. For video files
2 minutes t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t containing JPEG image files and movies, the
20 minutes t advances the time in 10-minute increments t recorder can play movie parts only.
2 hours
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound
Each time you press , briefly fast forwards the current scene track
for the following duration. DTS audio signals are output only through the
30 seconds t 1 minute t 1 minute 30 seconds t 2 minutes t DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.
3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t 20 minutes t When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set
advances the time in 10-minute increments t 2 hours “DTS Output” to “On” in the “Audio Out” setup
Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scene/track (page 117).
when pressed during playback.
Goes to the beginning of the first title/track when pressed in stop
mode.
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback.
Search speed changes as follows:
fast reverse fast forward
mFR1*1 T t MFF1*2
mFR2 T T t t MFF2
mFR3*3 T T T t t t MFF3*3
mFR4*3 T T T T t t t t MFF4*3
When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse
continues at the selected speed until you release the button.
*1
When you press m once during playback, you can play Reverse
play (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/DivX video
files).
*2
When you press M once during playback, you can play quickly
with sound (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs).
*3 Not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs.

To resume normal playback, press H.

62 ,continued 63

To cancel Programme play

Playing a specific portion
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press
ENTER.
“Set point A” is selected.
3 While monitoring the sound, press
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
You can play repeatedly all the titles/tracks/
files or a single title/chapter/track on the
HDD or a disc.
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
3 Select an item to be repeated using M/
m.
“Repeat Title” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1): repeats the
current title.
“Repeat Chapter” (for HDD/DVDs):
repeats the current chapter.
“Repeat Track” (for VIDEO CDs*2):
repeats the current track.
Creating your own programme
(Programme)
HDD -RWVideo * -RVideo * VCD
* finalised disc only
You can play the contents of the HDD or a
disc in the order you want by arranging the
order of the titles/chapters/albums/tracks on
the HDD or disc to create your own
programme. You can make a programme of
up to 24 steps.
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Programme,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and
Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set
“Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play”
in the “Play Mode” menu.
To erase the programme
Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set
“Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in
the “Play Mode” menu.
z Hints
• The program you made remains after Programme
play finishes. To play the same program again, set
“Programme” to “Start Programme Play” in the
“Play Mode” menu. However, the programme is
cleared after you remove the disc or press [/1.
Playback
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to
“Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu
(page 64).
• You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode”
in the System Menu.

ENTER at the starting point (point A) of “Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
programme (page 65). press ENTER. Adjusting the picture quality
the portion to be played repeatedly.
“Repeat Disc” (for VIDEO CDs*2/DVD- The “Input/Edit Programme” display
“Set point B” is selected.
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)): repeats all of differs depending upon the disc type. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo+R
4 Continue playing to locate the ending the tracks on a disc.
*1
Example: DVD -RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
point (point B), and press ENTER. DivX video file only
DATA CD *
*2 Available only when playing without PBC
A-B Repeat starts.
functions * DivX video file only
4 Press ENTER.
You can adjust the picture quality from
To cancel A-B Repeat Repeat play starts.
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off” connected equipment, such as a TV or
in the “Play Mode” menu. projector by selecting a preset setting. You
can also adjust the picture quality by
To cancel Repeat play
z Hint changing detailed settings, and store up to
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in
the System Menu.
Off” in the “Play Mode” menu. 4 Select a title or album (example: Title three settings in the memory.
001) using M/m, and press ENTER.
z Hint 1 Press SYSTEM MENU during playback
b Note 5 Select a chapter or track (example: or in pause mode.
You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the
When playing an HDD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD-R (Video mode), set the start
System Menu. Chapter 01) using M/m, and press The System Menu appears.
ENTER.
and stop points within the same title.
b Note The chapter or track is programmed.
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and
You cannot select “Repeat Programme” when no press ENTER.
If you make a mistake, select the step
programme remains.
number (example: 01.) using </M/m, 3 Select a preset setting using </,,
and press CLEAR. and press ENTER.
6 To programme other chapters or Dynamic: produces a bold dynamic
picture by increasing the picture contrast
tracks, press </M/m/, to select a
and the colour intensity.
step number, and repeat steps 4 and
Standard: displays a standard picture.
5. Professional: displays an original picture.
7 Press H. Memory1/Memory2/Memory3: Your
own settings. To create your own
Programme play starts.
settings, see “To create your own setting”
below.

64 ,continued 65

1-15
 To check the detailed settings for the
selected preset, press DISPLAY.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
To create your own setting
1 Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or
“Memory3” in step 3.
2 Select “Detailed Settings,” and press
ENTER.
The display for adjusting detailed
settings appears.
3 Select an item using M/m, and adjust
settings using </,.
For details about each setting, see the
explanation of the display.
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive
video signal when “Component Video
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 115).
Select “Motion” for a picture, including
subjects that move dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture with little
movement.
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive
video signal to match the type of DVD
software that you are watching when
“Component Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 115).
Select “Auto1” to automatically detect
the software type (Film-based or Video-
based) and select the appropriate
conversion mode. Normally select this
position.
If the picture appears unnatural, select
“Auto2,” “On,” or “Off.”
“YNR” (luminance noise reduction):
Reduces noise contained in the
luminance element of the video signal.
“BNR” (block noise reduction): Reduces
“block noise” or mosaic-like patterns in
the picture.
66
Playing from the
Beginning of the
Programme You Are
Recording (Chase Play)
HDD
“Chase Play” allows you to view the recorded
part of a programme on the HDD while the
recording is being made. You do not need to
wait until the recording finishes.
H
Press H while recording.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
programme you are recording.
When you fast forward to the point that you
are recording, “Chase Play” returns to normal
playback.
68
“MNR” (mosquito noise reduction):
Reduces the faint noise appearing around
the outlines of the images. The noise
reduction effects are automatically
adjusted within each setting range
according to the video bit rate and other
factors.
“Sharpness”: Sharpens the outlines of the
images.
“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of
images outlines.
“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of white.
“Black Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of black.
“Black Level”: Selects the black level
(setup level) for the video signals.
Select “ON” to raise the standard black
level. Select this when the picture
appears too dark.
Select “OFF” to set the black level of the
input signals to the standard level.
Normally, select this position.
“Gamma Correction”: Adjusts how dark
areas look.
“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance.
“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours
deeper or lighter.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
The setting is automatically stored as the
setting you selected in step 1.
b Notes
• If the outlines of the images on your screen
become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to
“Off.”
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to
discern. Also, these functions may not work with
some screen sizes.
• The following settings are not available for the
signals output from the HDMI jack.
– “Sharpness”
– “White Enhancer”
– “Black Enhancer”
– “Black Level”
– “Gamma Correction”
– “Hue”
– “Chroma Level”
Playing a Previous
Recording While Making
Another (Simultaneous
Rec and Play)
+RW +R
HDD -RWVR -RWVideo
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD
DATA CD
“Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to
view a previously recorded programme while
recording programmes. Playback continues
even if a timer recording starts. Use this
function as follows:
• While recording to the HDD:
Play another title on the HDD.
Play a previously recorded programme on a
DVD by pressing the DVD button.
• While recording to a DVD:
Play a previously recorded programme on
the HDD by pressing the HDD button.
You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO
CD, Super VIDEO CD, DATA DVD, or
DATA CD while recording on the HDD.
HDD DVD
TITLE LIST
M/m,
ENTER
Example: Play another title on the HDD
while recording to the HDD.
1 While recording, press TITLE LIST to
display the HDD Title List.
2 Select the title you want to play, and
press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected title.
1-16
Pausing a TV Broadcast
(TV Pause/Pause Live TV)
HDD
You can pause a current TV broadcast, and
record it on the HDD, then continue watching
the programme at a later time. This is useful
when you receive an unexpected phone call
or visitor while watching TV.
When connecting the recorder to your TV
using the SCART jack, do the followings.
– set “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder
Only” in the “Options” setup (page 128).
– set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 128).
– preset programme positions by
downloading from your TV using
“Download from TV” of “Auto Channel
Setting” in the “Tuner” setup (page 111).
If you do not make the SCART connection,
set “TV Pause” to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 128).
m M
TV PAUSE H/X/x
x REC
STOP
1 While viewing a TV broadcast, press
TV PAUSE.
The picture pauses, and the recorder
starts recording the current TV channel
to the HDD.
It may take up to 10 seconds to start
recording.
Example: Play a DVD while recording to
the HDD.
1 While recording, press DVD and insert
the DVD into the recorder.
2 Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD
Title List.
3 Select the title you want to play, and
press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected title.
b Note
You cannot play a DVD, DivX video or VIDEO
CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while
recording on the HDD in the PAL/SECAM colour
system.
2 Press H to resume watching the
programme.
You can fast forward/fast reverse, pause,
or stop the programme using m/M,
X and x without affecting the recording.
3 Press x REC STOP to stop recording.
b Notes
• The picture does not pause and the recorder starts
only recording in the following cases.
– when the programme positions are preset
differently between the recorder and the
connected TV.
– when watching the programme from the
Playback
external equipment connected to your TV.
• The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when
“TV Pause” is set to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 128).
• You may not be able to use the “TV Pause”
function depending on some TVs. For details,
refer to the operating instructions supplied with
your TV.
• The “TV Pause” function will not work correctly
when watching TV via the connected component
such as a VCR or digital tuner. The “TV Pause”
function works only with the channel selected on
the TV.
• You cannot use the “TV Pause” function as a
recording feature from the component (VCR,
etc.) connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack.
• The “TV Pause” function will not work if the
connected TV does not comply with
SMARTLINK. To check whether your TV
complies with SMARTLINK, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your TV.
67
Searching for a Time/
Title/Chapter/Track, etc.
+RW +R
HDD -RWVR -RWVideo
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
DATA CD *
* DivX video file only
You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene
or track. As titles and tracks are assigned
individual numbers, select the title or track by
entering its number. You can also search for
Playback
a scene using the time code.
Number
buttons
PLAY
MODE
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select a search method, and press
ENTER.
“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1/VIDEO CDs*2):
Searches for a starting point by entering
the time code.
“Title Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1)
“Chapter Search” (for HDD/DVDs)
“Track Search” (for VIDEO CDs*3)
*1 DivX video file only
*2 Except Super VIDEO CDs
*3
Available only when playing without PBC
functions
,continued 69
 The display for entering the number
appears.
Example: Chapter Search Erasing and Editing

Before Editing
This recorder offers various edit options for
various disc types.

b Notes
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove
the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.
4 Press the number buttons to select the • DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot
number of the title, chapter, time be edited on this recorder.
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s
code, etc., you want.
control information is full, erase or edit
For example: Time Search unnecessary titles.
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, • The remaining disc space displayed on the screen
and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”

Erasing and Editing

may differ from the actual remaining disc space.
If you make a mistake, select another • When editing a DVD+R or DVD-R, finish all
number. editing before finalising the disc. You cannot edit
a finalised disc.
5 Press ENTER.
The recorder starts playback from the HDD +RW -RWVR
selected number. -RWVideo -RVR
Edit features
+R Original Playlist
-RVideo title title
Title edit Erase (page 72) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Title Name (page 72) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Set Thumbnail (page 72) Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-B Erase (page 73) Yes No Yes Yes
Divide (page 74) Yes No No Yes
Set Genre (page 72) Yes No No No
Protect (page 72) Yes Yes Yes No
Move (page 77) No No No Yes
Combine (page 77) No No No Yes
Genre Name (page 72) Yes No No No
Editing multiple titles (Multi-Mode) Yes No No No
(page 73)
Creating a Playlist (page 76) No No No Yes
Undo (page 72) No Yes Yes Yes
Chapter Divide (page 75) Yes No Yes Yes
edit
Erase (page 76) Yes No Yes Yes
Move (page 77) No No No Yes
Combine (page 76) Yes No Yes Yes

70 ,continued 71

To open up disc space • “A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the 4 Select a title, and press ENTER.
To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or
DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with
Erasing and Editing a title (page 73).
• “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles
A check mark appears in the check box.
To clear the check mark, press ENTER
the largest number in the title list. Title (page 74). again.
• “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters in a title
Largest title number
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R (page 75). 5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles
• “Set Genre”: Assigns a genre to a title. you want to edit.
-RVR -RVideo

This section explains the basic edit functions.

• “Protect”: Protects the title. “ ”
appears next to the protected title.
6 When you finish selecting titles, press
,.
Note that editing is irreversible. To edit • “Move”: Changes the title’s playing
The sub-menu appears.
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) without order (page 77).
changing the original recordings, create a • “Combine”: Combines two titles into 7 Select an option, and press ENTER.
Playlist title (page 76). one (page 77). “Erase”: Erases the selected titles.
“Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a “Protect”: Protects the titles. “ ”
genre name (up to 12 characters) appears next to the protected title.
To open up disc space on the HDD or a DVD-
(page 37). “Unprotected”: Unprotects the titles.
RW (VR mode), you can erase any title.
“Multi-Mode”: Allows you to select and “Change Genre”: Changes the genre of
See “Erasing and Editing a Title” on page 72.
edit multiple titles at one time (page 73). the titles.
For DVD-Rs and DVD+Rs, the available disc
Erasing and Editing

“Create”: Creates a Playlist (page 76).

space does not increase even if you erase
“Undo”: Undoes the last edit you made.
titles. z Hint
TITLE LIST You can exit “Multi-Mode” by pressing , and
To switch between the Playlist and z Hint selecting “Single-Mode” while selecting titles.
Original Title List (DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR </M/m/,, You can label or re-label DVDs (page 38).
mode only) ENTER
O RETURN
You can display the Playlist titles in the Title Erasing a section of a title
List (Playlist), or the Original titles in the . Editing multiple titles (Multi-
m M
(A-B Erase)
Title List (Original). Mode)
1 Press < while the Title List is X
HDD -RWVR -RVR

displayed. HDD You can select a section (scene) in a title and

2 Select “Original” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Original” or “Play List” using M/
m, and press ENTER.
About editing accuracy
When editing the titles recorded on the HDD,
you can select the type of editing.
“Video Mode Compatible Editing”:
Recommended if you are going to dub the
titles to DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode)
or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs afterward by High-
speed dubbing. The editing points and
chapter marks may be slightly different from
those you selected.
“Frame Accurate Editing”:
Recommended when you want to edit titles
precisely. However, the editing points may
be slightly different from the point you
selected when you dub the titles by High-
speed dubbing.
You can select and edit up to 24 titles at one erase it. Note that erasing scenes in a title
time. cannot be undone.
1 Press TITLE LIST. 1 Press TITLE LIST. 1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a
Title,” select “Edit,” and press
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,
switch the Title List (Original or
2 Press ,.
ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
Playlist), if necessary.
3 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
2 Select “A-B Erase,” and press ENTER.
2 Select a title, and press ,. ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and
The sub-menu appears. press ENTER. For details, see page 72.
The display for selecting titles to be The display for setting point A appears.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER. edited appears. The title starts to play.
You can make the following edits to the
title.
“Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select
“Yes” when asked for confirmation.
“Edit”: Allows you to make the
following edits.
• “Title Name”: Allows you to enter or
re-enter a title name (page 37).
• “Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s
thumbnail picture that appears in the
Title List (page 34).

72 ,continued 73

1-17
 3 Select point A using m/M, and
press X.
• To return to the beginning of the title,
press X and then press ..
4 Select “From,” and press ENTER.
The position of point A is displayed, and
the title re-starts playing.
5 Select point B using m/M, and
press X.
6 Select “To,” and press ENTER.
The position of point B is displayed.
7 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The scene is erased.
To cancel “A-B Erase”
Press O RETURN. The Title List appears.
z Hint
A chapter mark is inserted after the scene is erased.
The chapter mark divides the title into separate
chapters on either side of the mark.
b Notes
• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted
at the point where you erase a section of a title.
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be
erased.
74
Erasing a chapter (Erase)
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Erase/Move.”
2 Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
3 4
Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
4 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The chapter is erased.
Combining multiple chapters
(Combine)
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Combine.”
2 Move the combining bar using </
,, and press ENTER.
The two adjacent chapters of the
combining bar are combined.
76
Dividing a title (Divide)
HDD -RWVR * -RVR *
If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do
not want to reduce the picture quality, divide
the title into two shorter titles. Note that
dividing a title cannot be undone.
* Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs in VR mode.
1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a
Title,” select “Edit,” and press
ENTER.
2 Select “Divide,” and press ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and
press ENTER. For details, see page 72.
The display for setting the dividing point
appears.
The title starts to play.
3 Select the dividing point using m/
M, and press X.
• To return to the beginning of the title,
press X and then press ..
4 Press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The title is divided into two.
Creating and Editing a
Playlist
-RWVR -RVR
Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit
without changing the actual recordings. You
can create up to 99 Playlist titles.
b Note
Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the
“Copy-Once” copy protection signal cannot be
dubbed or moved (page 79).
TITLE LIST
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 72).
2 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Create,” and press ENTER.
The original titles in the Title List appear.
4 Select an original title to add to the
Playlist, and press ENTER.
The selected title is added to the Playlist.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of
the titles you want to add to the
Playlist.
1-18
Erasing and Editing a
Chapter
HDD -RWVR -RVR
You can edit individual chapters within a
title. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)
without changing the original recordings,
create a Playlist (page 76).
TITLE LIST
</M/m/,,
ENTER
.
m M
X
1 Press TITLE LIST.
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,
switch the Title List (Original or
Playlist), if necessary.
2 Select a title containing the chapter
you want to edit, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Chapter Edit,” and press
ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and
press ENTER. For details, see page 72.
Moving a Playlist title (Move)
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 72).
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.
5 Select a new location for the title
using M/m, and press ENTER.
The title moves to the new location.
• To move more titles, repeat from step 2.
Combining multiple Playlist
titles (Combine)
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 72).
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Combine,” and press ENTER.
5 Select a title you want to combine.
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The titles are combined.
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
You can make the following edits to the
chapter.
“Divide”: Divides a chapter into two
(page 75).
“Erase/Move”
• “Erase”: Erases the selected chapter
(page 76).
• “Move” (for Playlist titles on DVD-
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode): Changes
the chapter’s playing order (page 77).
“Combine”: Combines two chapters into
one (page 76).
Dividing a chapter (Divide)
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Erasing and Editing
Chapter,” select “Divide.”
2 Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
The chapter starts to play.
3 Select the dividing point using m/
M, and press X.
• To return to the beginning of the
chapter, press X and then press ..
4 Press ENTER.
The chapter is divided into two.
,continued 75
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)
You can divide a Playlist title. For
instructions, see page 74.
Moving a chapter (Move)
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 72).
2 Select a Playlist title containing the
chapter you want to edit, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
Erasing and Editing
Select “Chapter Edit,” and press
ENTER.
5 Select “Erase/Move.”
6 Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
7 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.
8 Select a new location for the chapter
using </,, and press ENTER.
The chapter moves to the new location.
77
 • The chapter marks in the dubbing source Dubbing restriction

Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

are dubbed. The position of chapter marks
may be slightly changed from the original.
You cannot dub movies and other DVD
VIDEOs to the HDD. Also, when dubbing
HDD/DVD Dubbing
However, the chapter marks in the dubbing from a DVD to the HDD, scenes that contain +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
HDD
Before Dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title
when dubbing to a DVD-RW/DVD-R
a copy protection signal cannot be recorded.
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy
-RVR -RVideo

+RW +R
HDD -RWVR -RWVideo
-RVR -RVideo
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying
a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive
(HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.” You
can dub a playing title using the HDD/DVD
DUB button (see “HDD/DVD Dubbing” on
page 79) or you can select to dub multiple
titles all at once (see “Dubbing Using
Dubbing List” on page 80). You can also dub
an entire DVD disc to make a backup copy
(see “Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup)”
on page 83).
Before you start, read the following
(Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD+R at protection signals can be moved only from You can dub a single title by pressing the
normal speed. The chapter marks are the HDD to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR HDD/DVD DUB button during playback.
automatically inserted according to the mode)* (after the title is moved, the original
“Auto Chapter (Video)” and “Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)” settings in the
title in the HDD is erased). The “Move”
function is performed using Dubbing List.
1 Start playback of a title.
For playing a title, see “Playing the
“Recording” setup (page 122). Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy Recorded Programme/DVD” on page 60.
• The “Set Thumbnail” setting in the dubbing protection signals are indicated with .
source is dubbed as a thumbnail picture
Copy Dubbing
2 Press HDD/DVD DUB.
marker (except when dubbing from a protection The recorder starts dubbing the current
DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ signals playing title from the beginning.
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)). The The recorder turns off automatically
position of thumbnail picture markers may Copy-Free when you do not use the recorder for
be slightly changed from the original. (No copy
protection HDD
, -RW
,
+RW
Video
-RWVR
+R
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
signal) has finished.
z Hint -RVR -RVideo

Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

precautions, which are common to all
dubbing methods.
If you want to record from a digital video
camera connected to the DV IN jack, see
“DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 84.
To record from equipment connected to the
LINE IN jacks, see “Recording from
Connected Equipment” on page 59.
Before you start…
• You cannot record both the main and sub
sound on the HDD (when “HDD Recording
Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the
“Recording” setup), DVD+RWs, DVD-
RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs
(Video mode). For bilingual programmes,
set “Bilingual Recording” to either “A/L”
(default) or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup
(page 116). About HDD Recording format,
see page 122.
• A title name in the dubbing source is
dubbed. However, only up to 40 characters
of a title name are dubbed when dubbing
from the HDD to a DVD+RW/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
mode).
When you dub a Playlist title, it is recorded as an
Original title.
b Notes
• You cannot make a recording while dubbing.
• Before playing a dubbed disc on other DVD
equipment, finalise the disc (page 40, 80).
• You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs or finalised
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode) to the HDD.
• Titles containing mixed aspect ratios cannot be
dubbed to a DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/
DVD-R (Video mode) using the HDD/DVD
DUB button.
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be dubbed to single-
layer DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes) 16:9
size titles cannot be dubbed to a DVD+RW/
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
• When dubbing to a DVD+R DL, DVD-R DL
(Video mode) in Real-Time Dubbing mode, the
dubbing contents are divided into titles.
Copy-Once
HDD , -RW VR *
*
To cancel the dubbing
-RVR
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
than one second.
* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR
mode) only.
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable no part of the title will be moved to the
Media) is a coding technology that protects dubbing target. However, note that this will
copyrights for images. decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-
Rs.
b Notes
• Protected titles in the HDD cannot be moved. About dubbing mode
• The “Move” function is not available for HDD/ Titles on the HDD are dubbed to a disc at
DVD DUB dubbing.
high speed (High-speed dubbing).
• Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy
Titles on a disc are dubbed to the HDD at
protection signal, the recording restrictions on
that title are retained. normal speed (Real-Time dubbing).
To convert the recording mode (only when
dubbing from a disc to the HDD)
After step 1, press REC MODE to select the
recording mode.
b Note
You cannot use the HDD/DVD DUB button in the
following cases. Dub the title using Dubbing List
(page 80).
– When dubbing the title recorded in MN6 mode or
longer duration mode to a DVD+RW/DVD+R.
– When dubbing the title recorded in HQ+ mode to
a DVD.

78 79

D Total size of the selected titles and 10 Select “Start Dubbing,” and press Required times for High-speed Dubbing from
Dubbing Using Dubbing available space on the disc to be ENTER. HDD to DVD (for 60-minute programme)*1
dubbed (approximate) When you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step Speed*2 6x 2.4x 2x
List E Selected title’s thumbnail picture
9, select the title menu style, and press
ENTER. High-speed
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R 5 Select a title, and press ENTER. The recorder turns off automatically Rec.
DVD+RW/ DVD+R
DVD-RW/ (Double
DVD-R
(Dual
-RVR -RVideo The selected title changes colour. when you do not use the recorder for mode
DVD+R/ Layer) Layer)
When you select “HDD -> DVD” in step more than 20 minutes after the dubbing DVD-R
You can select the titles you want to dub 3, you can change the title order or search has finished.
using Dubbing List. You can also edit titles HQ Approx. Approx. Approx.
for a title by genre (see “3. Playing the
before dubbing without changing the original 10 min. 25 min. 30 min.
Recorded Programme (Title List)” on
titles. page 33). To cancel dubbing HSP Approx. Approx. Approx.
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more 6 min. 16 min. 20 min.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU. 6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles than one second. 40 sec. 40 sec.
The System Menu appears. in the order you want to dub. When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway, SP Approx. Approx. Approx.
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER. 7 Select “Next” using ,, and press no part of the title will be moved to the
dubbing target. However, note that this will
5 min. 12 min.
30 sec.
15 min.
ENTER.
3 Select a dubbing direction, and press
The “Title Edit” display appears.
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-
LSP Approx. Approx. Approx.
ENTER. Rs. 4 min. 10 min. 12 min.
For details about editing, see “To edit
To dub titles from the HDD to a disc, titles on the Dubbing List” on page 82. About dubbing mode ESP Approx. Approx. Approx.
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

select “HDD -> DVD.”

To dub titles from a disc to the HDD, 8 Select “Next” using ,, and press “ ” appears next to the title that can be 3 min.
20 sec.
8 min.
20 sec.
10 min.

select “DVD/CD -> HDD.” ENTER. dubbed at high speed (High-speed dubbing)
in the “Title Edit” display. The following LP Approx. Approx. Approx.
4 Select “Create New Dubbing List,”
The “Start Dubbing” display appears.
titles are dubbed at normal speed (Real-Time 2 min. 6 min. 7 min.
and press ENTER. dubbing). 30 sec. 15 sec. 30 sec.
The Dubbing List appears. – Titles containing both main and sub sounds EP Approx. Approx. Approx.
• If you have previously saved a Dubbing (except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)). 1 min. 60 min.*3 5 min.
List and want to resume editing it, – Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3 40 sec.*3
select “Use Previous Dubbing List,” and 16:9, etc.) (except for DVD-RWs/ SLP Approx. Approx. Approx.
and go to step 7. DVD-Rs (VR mode)). 1 min. 60 min.*3 3 min.
– Titles recorded on DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs 15 sec.*3 45 sec.
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
SEP Approx. Approx. Approx.
mode).
1 min.*3 60 min.*3 3 min.*3
9 Select an option using M/m, and press – 16:9 size titles recorded on DVD+RW/
DVD+R. *1
ENTER. The values in the above table are for reference
The options differ depending on the only. Actual times for dubbing also require time
The minimum required time is as follows for creating disc’s control information and other
dubbing direction or disc type.
(approximate). data.
“Recording Mode”: Changes the *2 This is the maximum recording speed of this
dubbing mode of all selected titles at a recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed the
time using M/m (page 51). value indicated in the above table even when
“Input Disc Name”: Changes the disc using discs that support higher recording speeds.
A Direction of dubbing name (page 37). In addition, depending on the disc condition, the
B Total number of titles to be dubbed “Finalise”: Select “Yes” to finalise a disc recorder may be unable to record at the
automatically after dubbing (DVD-RW/ maximum recording speed indicated in the table.
C Dubbing step number DVD-R (Video mode), or DVD+R).
*3 High-speed dubbing is not available when

Display 1: Select a title you want to dubbing titles recorded in SEP, SLP, or EP mode
dub (the “Select Titles” display). to DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.
Display 2: Edit a title (the “Title
Edit” display).
Display 3: Confirm the settings and
start dubbing (the “Start Dubbing”
display).

80 ,continued 81

1-19
 To edit titles on the Dubbing List
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Dubbing Using
Dubbing List” on page 80.
The “Title Edit” display appears.
2 Select a title you want to edit, and press
ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.
The options differ depending on the
dubbing direction or disc type.
“Erase”: Erases the selected title.
“Title Name”: Names or renames a title
(page 37).
“A-B Erase”: Erases the section of the
title (page 73).
“Move”: Changes the order of titles
(page 77).
“Preview”: Allows you to check the
content of a title.
“Divide”: Divides a title into two titles
(page 74).
“Combine”: Combines two titles
(page 77).
“Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters (page 75).
“Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s
thumbnail frame that appears in the Title
List (page 34).
“Recording Mode”: Sets the picture
quality of the dubbing.
“Bilingual”: Sets how a bilingual audio
programme is dubbed.
“Cancel”: Exits the sub-menu.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit all of the
titles.
5 Go to step 8 of “Dubbing Using Dubbing
List” on page 80 to dub edited titles.
82
DV Camcorder Dubbing
Before DV Camcorder
Dubbing
This section explains dubbing with a DV
camcorder and playing the contents of a DV
camcorder via the DV IN jack on the front
panel. If you want to dub by way of the LINE
IN jacks, see “Recording from Connected
Equipment” on page 59.
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to
the i.LINK standard.
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for DV
camcorder dubbing,” and then move on to the
section on dubbing. For more information
about i.LINK, see “About i.LINK” on
page 140.
How chapters are created
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD
become a single title. This title is divided into
chapters. When dubbing to the HDD or a
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) and when
“Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” in
the “Recording” setup (page 121), each
shooting session on the tape becomes a
chapter on the disc. For other discs, the
recorder divides the title into chapters
according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” or
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” setting in
the “Recording” setup (page 122).
Preparing for DV camcorder
dubbing
You can connect a digital video camera to the
DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit
from a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is
straightforward because the recorder will fast
forward and rewind the tape for you – you do
not need to operate your digital video camera.
Do the following to start using the “Manual
Dubbing” functions of this recorder.
See the instruction manual supplied with the
digital video camera as well before
connecting.
84
b Notes
• The Dubbing List you created remains after
dubbing. To edit the existing Dubbing List, select
“Use Previous Dubbing List” in step 4. The
Dubbing List is cleared when:
– you change “Input Line System” setting in the
“Basic” setup (page 110).
– you reset the recorder (page 136).
– you open the disc tray (except when dubbing
from the HDD).
– you edit the titles on a disc (except when
dubbing from the HDD).
– you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist
(when dubbing from DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in
VR mode only).
– you finalise the disc.
• The “seams” that are left over from editing may
remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD+RWs/
DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs
(Video mode).
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording
starts, even if you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step
9.
z Hint
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after
the initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) or HDD.
b Notes
• You cannot make a recording while DV
camcorder dubbing.
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not
output signals.
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:
– signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel
or recorder operation cannot be performed
correctly when using a digital video camera
(see “About i.LINK” on page 140). Connect the
camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the
instructions of “Recording from Connected
Equipment” on page 59.
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do
not connect a MICRO MV format digital video
camera even if it has an i.LINK jack.
– the images on the tape contain copy protection
signals, which limit recording.
• If you want to play DVDs dubbed from a DV
camcorder on other DVD equipment, finalise the
disc (page 40).
• Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same
colour system (page 110).
Hookups
DVD recorder
to DV IN
i.LINK cable
(not supplied)
DV output
DV camcorder
: Signal flow
1-20
Making a Backup Disc
(DVD Backup)
+RW -RWVideo +R -RVideo
You can dub all of the contents on a finalised
DVD+RW/DVD+R or finalised DVD-RW/
DVD-R (Video mode) to another recordable
DVD+RW/DVD-RW or unused DVD+R/
DVD-R via the HDD as a backup copy.
b Note
Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
3 Select “DVD Backup,” and press
ENTER.
4 Select “Start new DVD Backup,” and
press ENTER.
• If you have previously dubbed backup
data to the HDD, select “Resume
writing data,” and go to step 7.
5 Insert the DVD you are going to make
a backup of.
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts dubbing all of the
contents on a DVD to the HDD.
7 Press Z (open/close), and replace the
DVD with a recordable DVD+RW/DVD-
RW or an unused DVD+R/DVD-R.
To make a backup disc of DVD+RWs/
DVD+Rs, insert a recordable DVD+RW
or unused DVD+R.
To make a backup disc of DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs, insert a recordable DVD-RW
or unused DVD-R.
8 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts High-speed dubbing
the contents that were dubbed to the
HDD in step 6.
9 Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.
The disc is automatically finalised.
• To make another backup disc, replace
discs, select “Start,” and press ENTER.
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the
recording destination.
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.
Inserting a Disc” on page 31).
2 Insert the source DV/Digital8 format
tape into your digital video camera.
For the recorder to record or edit, your
digital video camera must be set to video
playback mode.
3 Press REC MODE on the remote
repeatedly to select the recording
mode.
The recording mode changes as follows:
For details about the recording mode, see
page 51. Note that you cannot select
manual recording mode.
4 Set the “External Audio” setting in the
“Audio In” setup (page 116).
5
Set the “DV Input” setting in the
“Audio In” setup (page 116).
You are ready to start dubbing. Select
one of the dubbing methods on the
following pages.
To playback DV/Digital8 format tape
You can check the contents of DV/Digital8
format tape before dubbing. For details, see
“Playing from a DV Camcorder” on page 87.
z Hint
The recorder completes dubbing even after being
turned off.
10 Select “Yes” or “No,” and press
ENTER.
To erase the backup data on the HDD,
select “Yes.”
To make another backup disc later, select
“No.”
The recorder turns off automatically
when you do not use the recorder for
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
has finished.
To display the dubbing information
Press DISPLAY while dubbing.
To cancel DVD backup during dubbing
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
than one second.
To erase backup data on the HDD
1
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
Select “Erase back-up data” in step 4, and
press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
2 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
b Notes
• When dubbing to a DVD+R/DVD-R is stopped
partway in step 8, you cannot play or record on
the disc.
• You cannot make a backup disc of DVD+R DLs/
DVD-R DLs.
• You may not use the “DVD Backup” function
depending on the recording quality or physical
condition of the disc, or characteristics of the
recording device and authoring software.
83
b Notes
• You cannot connect more than one piece of
digital video equipment to the recorder.
• You cannot control the recorder using another
device or another recorder of the same model.
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of
the cassette memory onto the disc.
• If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape that
is recorded in multiple sound tracks, such as a
tape with multiple sampling frequencies (48 kHz,
44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or an unnatural
sound will be output when playing back the
sampling frequency switch point on the disc.
• In order to use this recorder’s “Auto Chapter”
setting (page 84), be sure to correctly set the clock
on your digital video camera before shooting.
• The recorded picture may be momentarily
affected or the start and end points of a title may
be different from what you have set if the source
DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the following
conditions. In this case, see “Recording from
Connected Equipment” (page 59).
– There is a blank space in the recorded portion of
the tape.
– The tape’s time code is not sequential.
– If the picture size or the recording mode on the
DV Camcorder Dubbing
tape being dubbed changes.
• A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed
when the recorder is set to a different colour
system from the DV tape contents’ system. Set
“Input Line System” in the “Basic” setup to the
same colour system as the DV tape contents’
system (page 110).
85
 z Hint
Dubbing an Entire DV Dubbing Selected You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the
DISPLAY button during dubbing. Press the Playing from a DV
Format Tape (DV One Scenes (Manual DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing
menu.
Camcorder
Touch Dubbing) Dubbing) b Note 1 Connect your DV camcorder to the DV
You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one IN jack on the front panel.
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R second.
-RVR -RVideo -RVR -RVideo 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
You can record the entire contents of a DV/ You can select and dub scenes while playing
Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single a DV/Digital8 format tape. 3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.
press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on
the recorder. The recorder controls the digital 1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for 4 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER.
video camera for the whole process, and DV camcorder dubbing” on page 84. 5 Start playback on the DV camcorder.
completes the recording.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
Images from the DV camcorder appear
on your TV screen.
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for DV The System Menu appears.
camcorder dubbing” on page 84, and
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder. 3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.
To cancel playback
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts 4 Select “Manual Dubbing,” and press Press SYSTEM MENU.
recording the tape contents. ENTER.
After the recording is finished, the recorder z Hint
rewinds the tape in the digital video camera, 5 Select the recording destination, You can dub the playing tape contents. During

and finalises the recorded disc (except DVD-
RW/DVD-R (VR mode)) automatically.
To stop during recording
Press x REC STOP more than 3 seconds.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
z Hint
You can also start DV One Touch Dubbing by
selecting “One-Touch Dubbing” of “DV” in the
System Menu.
DV Camcorder Dubbing
“Record to Hard Disk Drive” or playback, press HDD or DVD to select the dubbing
“Record to DVD,” and press ENTER. destination, and press z REC. To stop dubbing,
press x REC STOP.
6 Press H.
The scene starts to play.
7 Find the point on the DV/Digital8
format tape that you want to start
dubbing from using m/M or c/
C, and press X.
8 Select “Start Rec.,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts dubbing.

b Notes
9 Select “Pause Rec,” and press
• When a blank space between the recordings on
ENTER.
the tape continues for more than two minutes, DV The recorder pauses dubbing.
One Touch Dubbing ends automatically.
• The recorder will pause recording when there is a
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more
blank space or an image containing copy scenes.
protection signals on the tape. The recorder will
resume recording automatically when receiving a
11 Select “Stop Rec,” and press ENTER.
recordable signal. The selected scenes are dubbed as a
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts single title.
(except for DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)).
• DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically
when there are images containing copy protection To cancel during “Manual Dubbing”
signals at the beginning of the tape. Press SYSTEM MENU.

86 87

To lock the recorder (Child Lock) Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a b Note
You can lock all of the buttons on the CD “A-B Repeat” is not available for MP3 audio tracks.
Audio Tracks recorder so that the settings are not cancelled • When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive
by mistake. noise will be heard from the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
Playing Audio Tracks When the recorder is turned off, hold down x
on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in
DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks.
To avoid possible damage to the audio system,
from CD/DVD the front panel display. The recorder does not the user should take proper precautions when the
LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT
CD DATA DVD DATA CD
work except for timer recordings while the You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are connected
CD DATA DVD DATA CD Child Lock is set. single track on an album or disc.
to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital
Surround™ playback, an external DTS decoder
You can play audio tracks on CDs, DATA
DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/
To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the the recorder. The “Play Mode” menu appears.
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs), or front panel display. • Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO
DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs). button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD 2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
(page 88).
Playback options
3 Select an item to be repeated using M/
[/1 m.
CD DATA DVD DATA CD Playing a specific portion “Repeat Disc”: repeats all of the tracks
on a disc.
repeatedly (A-B Repeat) “Repeat Album” (except for CD): repeats
AUDIO Buttons Operations the current album.
CLEAR CD
PLAY AUDIO Selects stereo or monaural “Repeat Track”: repeats the current
MODE audio tracks recorded on the 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. track.
disc when pressed repeatedly The “Play Mode” menu appears. “Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
</M/m/,, in normal playback mode. programme (page 90).
ENTER 2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press
./>
(previous/
Goes to the next or previous
track when pressed during ENTER. 4 Press ENTER.
Audio Tracks

. > next) playback. “Set point A” is selected. Repeat play starts.

m M For MP3 discs, goes to the next
H x or previous album when
X pressed repeatedly. To cancel Repeat play
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
m/M Fast reverses/fast forwards the
(fast disc when pressed during Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.
reverse/fast playback.
forward) Search speed changes as z Hint
You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the
1 Insert a disc.
follows:
fast reverse fast forward
System Menu.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 31. mFR1 T t MFF1
3 While monitoring the sound, press b Note
2 Press H. mFR2 T T t t MFF2
When you press and hold the
ENTER at the starting point (point A) of You can select “Repeat Programme” only during
Playback starts. the portion to be played repeatedly. Programme play.
button, fast forward/fast
reverse continues at the “Set point B” is selected.
selected speed until you release
To stop playback
the button. 4 Continue playing to locate the ending
Press x (stop). To resume normal playback, point (point B), and press ENTER.
press H. A-B Repeat starts.
z Hint
You can play audio tracks using the Title List. Press X (pause) Pauses playback.
TITLE LIST. Then select a track, and press To resume normal playback,
ENTER. press H. To cancel A-B Repeat
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off”
b Note in the “Play Mode” menu.
When any video titles are recorded on a DATA
DVD, the MP3 audio tracks on that DATA DVD z Hint
cannot be played. You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in
the System Menu.

88 ,continued 89

1-21
 To cancel Programme play 4 Press the number buttons to select the
Creating your own programme Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set Searching for an Audio number of the album or track you
(Programme) “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play” want.
in the “Play Mode” menu. Track If you make a mistake, select another
CD DATA DVD DATA CD number.
To erase the programme CD DATA DVD DATA CD
You can play the contents of an album or disc Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set 5 Press ENTER.
in the order you want by arranging the order “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in You can search a disc by album or track. As The recorder starts playback from the
of the albums/tracks on a disc to create your the “Play Mode” menu. albums and tracks are assigned individual selected number.
own programme. You can make a numbers, select the album or track by
programme of up to 24 steps. z Hints entering its number.
• The programme you made remains after z Hint
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. Programme play finishes. To play the same You can select an album or track using M/m in step
4.
The “Play Mode” menu appears. programme again, set “Programme” to “Start
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.
2 Select “Programme,” and press However, the programme is cleared after you Number
buttons
ENTER. remove the disc or press ?/1.
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and “Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu PLAY
MODE
press ENTER. (page 89).
The “Input/Edit Programme” display • You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode”
in the System Menu.
differs depending upon the disc type. </M/m/,,
Example: DATA DVD ENTER

Audio Tracks
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press
4 Select an album (example: ENTER.
01.BRAHMS) using M/m, and press 3 Select a search method, and press
,. ENTER.
5 Select a track (example: “Album Search” (except for CD)
001.SYMPHONY01) using M/m, and “Track Search”
press ENTER. The display for entering the number
The track is programmed. appears.
If you make a mistake, select the step Example: Album Search
number (example: 01-001) using </M/
m, and press CLEAR.
6 To programme other tracks, press </
M/m/, to select a step number, and
repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 Press H.
Programme play starts.

90 91

7 Select “Copy Album,” and press

About Jukebox
There are two methods to use Jukebox:
connecting the USB device or copying audio
tracks to the HDD.
When using Jukebox, you can do followings:
• Store audio tracks on the HDD.
Preparing for Using
Jukebox
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the
recorder, or copy audio tracks from CDs/
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected
Copying audio tracks ENTER.
(DISC t HDD) The display asks for confirmation.
8 Select “Yes” using </,, and press
1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy ENTER.
to the HDD. The selected album is copied to the HDD.
2 Press H to start playback. • To copy more albums, go to step 5.

• Play audio tracks using various play modes. USB device to the HDD. 3 Press HDD/DVD DUB.
• Label tracks or albums. For CDs, all the tracks on the disc are To cancel copying
• Assign albums a genre. copied to the HDD. Press ENTER.
• Change the track order. For DATA CDs/ DATA DVDs, the
Notes on copying current album is copied to the HDD.
• You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to
discs or USB devices.
• Some audio tracks may not be copied depending To cancel copying
on the file size. SYSTEM
Press ENTER.
• You cannot copy audio tracks if the HDD is full MENU
or almost full. z Hint
</M/m/,,
• An album name and MP3 audio track name are You can copy all the contents on the disc by
ENTER
also copied. However, there may be some names selecting “DVD/CD -> HDD” in “Dubbing” in the
that cannot be copied. System Menu.
• When copying is stopped partway, tracks finished
copying before you stop will remain copied onto
H
the HDD as an album. See the Album List to
check which albums have been copied (page 94).
Copying an album
• When copying audio tracks from a CD, the album
HDD/DVD
DUB (USB t HDD)
Audio Tracks

name is labelled as “F_***” and the audio track

names are labelled as “T_***” automatically.
• During copying, other operations cannot be
performed.
• While copying, timer recordings are unavailable.
If the timer is set during copying, the recorder
starts the timer recording after copying is
finished.
• Copy-protected CDs cannot be copied to the
HDD.
You can copy up to 99 albums or 999 tracks
on the USB device to the HDD.
Connecting the USB device
1 Connect the USB device to the USB
jack on the recorder (page 92).
You can connect a USB device to the USB 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
jack on the recorder to listen to the MP3 The System Menu appears.
audio tracks or copy to the HDD. Refer to the
operating instructions supplied with the USB 3 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
device before connecting. ENTER.
DVD recorder 4 Select “Listen to Music from USB
Device,” and press ENTER.
The Album List appears.
to USB jack 5 Select an album, and press ,.
6 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press
USB device ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.

92 93

1-22

Playing Audio Tracks
Using Jukebox/USB
Device
SUBTITLE
CLEAR
ANGLE
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
. >
m M
H x
X next)
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit” or
“Listen to Music from USB Device,”
and press ENTER.
To listen to the audio tracks on the HDD,
select “Listen to Music / Edit.”
To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from
the connected USB device, select “Listen
to Music from USB Device.”
The Album List appears.
94
Creating your own programme
(Programme)
You can play the contents of the HDD or
connected USB device in the order you want
by arranging the order of the tracks on the
HDD or connected USB device to create your
own programme. You can make a
programme of up to 24 steps.
1 Press , while the Album List is
displayed.
2 Select “Play Mode,” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
3 Select “Programme,” and press
ENTER.
4 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and
press ENTER.
5 Select an album (example: Album
001) using M/m, and press ,.
6 Select a track (example: Track 001)
using M/m, and press ENTER.
The track is programmed.
If you make a mistake, select the step
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,
and press CLEAR.
7 To programme other tracks, press </
M/m/, to select a step number, and
repeat steps 5 and 6.
8 Press H.
Programme play starts.
96
4 Select an album or track, and press To skip a track (Set Skip)
ENTER. If you want a track not to play, set the track to Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
Playback starts from the selected album be skipped.
or track. 1 Select a track you want to skip.
You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a
single track in the album.
2 Press , while the Album List is
To stop playback displayed. 1 Press , during playback.
Press x (stop). 3 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press 2 Select “Play Mode,” using M/m, and
ENTER. press ENTER.
To scroll the list display by page (Page
4 Select “Set Skip” using M/m, and press The “Play Mode” menu appears.
mode)
Press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next)
ENTER.
“ ” appears next to the selected track.
3 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
while the Album List is displayed. Each time
you press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE
To cancel, select “Set Skip,” and press 4 Select an item to be repeated using M/
(next), the entire Album List changes to the
ENTER again. m.
next/previous page of the album. “Repeat Album”: repeats the current
album.
To change the album order (Sort Titles)
Playback options “Repeat Track”: repeats the current
track.
(HDD only)
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
1 Press < while the Album List is Buttons Operations
programme (page 96).
displayed. ./>
2 Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press (previous/
Goes to the next or previous
track when pressed during 5 Press ENTER.
playback. Repeat play starts.
ENTER.
m/M Fast reverses/fast forwards the
3 Select the item using M/m, and press (fast disc when pressed during
ENTER. reverse/fast playback.
To cancel Repeat play
Audio Tracks
forward) Search speed changes as Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in the “Play
Order Sorted
By number In order of album
follows:
fast reverse fast forward
Mode” menu.
number. mT tM b Notes
By favourite In order of playback mTT ttM • You can select “Repeat Programme” only during
Programme play.
times. The album that is When you press and hold the
button, fast forward/fast • “A-B Repeat” is not available when using “Music
most often played is listed
at the top. reverse continues at the Jukebox.”
selected speed until you release
By album In alphabetical order. the button.
To resume normal playback,
To search for the album by genre (Genre) press H.
(HDD only)
X (pause) Pauses playback.
1 Press < while the Album List is To resume normal playback,
press H.
displayed.
2 Select “Genre” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3 Select the genre using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The albums in the selected genre appear.
To display all albums, select “All
Genres.”
,continued 95
To cancel Programme play 5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
Set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Managing Audio Tracks “Erase”: Erases the selected album/track.
Play” in the “Play Mode” menu during Select “Yes” when asked for
playback. on the Music Jukebox confirmation.
“Edit”: Allows you to make the
To erase the programme You can erase or label albums/tracks on the following edits.
Set “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” HDD. You can also assign an album a genre. • “Album Name”: Allows you to enter or
in the “Play Mode” menu. re-enter an album name (page 37).
• “Track Name”: Allows you to enter or
z Hints re-enter a track name (page 37).
• You can select and play a track that is set to “Set • “Set Genre”: Assigns an album a genre.
Skip.”
• The programme you made remains after
• “Set Skip”: Sets a track to be skipped
(page 95).
Programme play finishes. To play the same
“Play Mode”: Selects play modes
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu. SYSTEM (page 95).
However, the programme is cleared after you MENU “Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a
press ?/1. genre name (up to 12 characters)
</M/m/,,
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to
“Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu ENTER
(page 37).
(page 95).
b Note
You cannot edit audio tracks on the connected USB
device.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
Audio Tracks
Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit,” and
press ENTER.
The Album List appears.
4 Select an album or track, and press
,.
97
1-23

JPEG Image Files
About the “Photo
Album” Function
The “Photo Album” function enables you to
do following.
• Store JPEG image files on the HDD.
• View JPEG image files on the HDD, DATA
DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs)/DATA CDs,
or connected USB device.
• Edit JPEG image files.
• Print JPEG image files.
• Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs.
Preparing for Using the
“Photo Album” Function
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the
recorder, or copy JPEG image files from
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected
USB device to the HDD.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
98
5 Press ENTER, and select a JPEG
image file using M/m.
6 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
7 Select an item, and press ENTER.
To copy two or more albums or files,
select “Multi-Mode.”
To copy the selected album, select “Copy
Album Contents” in “Album Options,”
and go to step 12.
To copy the selected files, select “Copy”
in “File Options,” and go to step 12.
8 Select an album or JPEG image file,
and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the
albums or JPEG image files you want
to copy.
10 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
11 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER.
12 Select the destination album using M/
m, and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
b Note
Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the
HDD in the following cases.
– when the HDD disc space is insufficient for
copying.
– when there are already the maximum number of
files and/or albums on the HDD.
100
Connecting the USB device
You can connect a USB device (digital still
camera, Memory card reader, and USB
memory) to the USB jack on the recorder to
view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD.
Refer to the operating instructions supplied
with the USB device before connecting.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
USB cable (not supplied)
USB output
Digital still camera
: Signal flow
Copying JPEG image files to the
HDD (DISC/USB t HDD)
1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy
to the HDD or connect the USB device
to the USB jack on the recorder.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
Copying JPEG image albums to
a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
You can copy the edited JPEG image albums
to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a
video file. You can play the slideshow on
other DVD equipment that may not be
compatible with the playback of JPEG image
files.
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video
mode).
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
5 Select an album using M/m, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
6 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
ENTER.
To copy the album selected in step 5
only, go to step 10.
7 Select an album, and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the
albums you want to copy.
9 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
10 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
1-24
4 Select the item, and press ENTER.
To copy from DATA CDs/DATA DVDs
(DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs), select “View
Photos on a CD/DVD.”
To copy from the connected USB device,
select “View Photos on a USB Device.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Example: CD/DVD
5 Select an album or JPEG image file
using M/m, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
6 Select an item, and press ENTER.
To copy two or more albums or JPEG
image files, select “Multi-Mode.”
To copy all the albums and JPEG image
files, select “Copy all to HDD,” and go to
step 11.
To copy the album or file selected in step
5 only, select “Copy to HDD,” and go to
step 11.
7 Select an album or JPEG image file,
and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, press , to
select “Single-Mode” from the sub-
menu.
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the
albums or JPEG image files you want
to copy.
9 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
10 Select “Copy to HDD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image albums are
copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the
disc.
The JPEG image album names are
automatically labelled as “***ALBUM.”
If you want to play the disc on other
DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 40).
• To cancel, select “No.”
z Hints
• See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 42) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which
albums have been copied (page 102).
b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow
depending on DVD equipment.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a
recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not
be able to play on other equipment (page 40).
• No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a
disc.
• When copying an album containing more than 99
JPEG image files to a disc, slideshows will be
created with every 99 JPEG image files and
recorded to a disc.
• For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not
increase even if you erase slideshows.
Copying JPEG image files to a
disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
You can copy the edited JPEG image files to
a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a
video file. You can play the slideshow on
other DVD equipment that may not be
compatible with the playback of JPEG image
files.
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video
mode).
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
Copying all JPEG image files
from the connected USB device
(USB t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
1 Connect the USB device to the USB
jack on the recorder.
2 Insert a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video
mode).
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
5 Select “Copy Photos from a Digital
Camera,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
z Hint
See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 42) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
b Notes
JPEG Image Files
• During copying, other operations cannot be
performed.
• While copying JPEG image files, timer
recordings are unavailable. If the timer is set
during copying, the recorder starts the timer
recording after copying is finished.
Copying JPEG image files or
albums on the HDD
(HDD y HDD)
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
4 Select an album using M/m.
To copy the selected album, go to step 6.
To copy a JPEG image file, go to step 5.
,continued 99
4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
5 Select an album using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The photo list appears.
6 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,
and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
7 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
ENTER.
To copy the JPEG image file selected in
step 6 only, go to step 11.
8 Select a JPEG image file, and press
ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the JPEG
image files you want to copy.
10 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
JPEG Image Files
11 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
12 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image files are copied
in the “PICTURE” folder on the disc.
The JPEG image file names are
automatically labelled as “PHOT****.”
If you want to play the disc on other
DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 40).
• To cancel, select “No.”
To select a JPEG image file from a
different album
1 Switch to the album list in step 8.
For instructions, see “To switch between
the album list and JPEG image file list”
on page 103.
2 Select an album using M/m, and press
<.
,continued 101
 3 Switch to the JPEG image file list.
For instructions, see “To switch between
the album list and JPEG image file list”
on page 103.
4 Select a JPEG image file using M/m, and
press ENTER.
z Hints
• See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 42) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which
albums have been copied (page 102).
b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow
depending on DVD equipment.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a
recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not
be able to play on other equipment (page 40).
• No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a
disc.
• For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not
increase even if you erase slideshows.
102
To reload the files or folders
When a disc or the connected USB device
contains 1,000 or more files and/or 100 or
more folders, select “Read next” in the
“Photo Album” list, and press ENTER to
view unloaded files or folders.
It may take a few minutes to load files or
folders.
b Note
The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on
the recorder is displayed as “ .”
Viewing a JPEG image file
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the
“Photo Album” List.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch to the album list, if necessary.
2 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,
and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image file is
displayed on the entire screen.
To display the detailed information
1 Select a JPEG image file, and press ,.
2 Select “Detailed Information,” and press
ENTER.
The detailed information for the selected
JPEG image file appears.
Playing a slideshow
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the
“Photo Album” List.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch between the album list and JPEG
image file list, if necessary.
2 Select an album or JPEG image file
using M/m, and press H.
The slideshow starts.
If you press H while selecting a JPEG
image file, the slideshow starts from the
selected JPEG image file.
104
12-Photo List (Example: HDD) C Sub-menu:
Using the “Photo Album” Press , to display the sub-menu.
The sub-menu displays options
List applicable only to the selected item. The
displayed options differ depending upon
You can play JPEG image files on the HDD, the model, situation, and disc type.
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected
USB device using the “Photo Album” list.
m
4-Photo List
ANGLE Sub-menu
SYSTEM
MENU D Scroll bar:
</M/m/,, Appears when all of the JPEG image files
ENTER do not fit on the list. To view the hidden
O RETURN JPEG image files, press M/m.
. > E Album and JPEG image file
H information:
x
X Displays the image, JPEG image file
number, recording date and time, JPEG
image file name, and JPEG image file
size.
F Disc type and remaining space of
1 m current disc
JPEG Image Files
Press SYSTEM MENU. 1-Photo List
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press To scroll the list display by page (Page
ENTER. mode)
The “Photo Album” menu appears. Press ./> while the “Photo Album”
list is displayed. Each time you press ./
3 Select the item, and press ENTER.
>, the entire “Photo Album” list changes
To play JPEG image files on the HDD,
to the next/previous page of albums/JPEG
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.”
image files.
To play JPEG image files on DATA
CDs/DATA DVDs, select “View Photos To switch between the album list and
on a CD/DVD.”
JPEG image file list
To play JPEG image files from the
connected USB device, select “View A Album name 1 Press < while the “Photo Album” list is
Photos on a USB Device.” displayed.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
B Album size
2 Select “Display Mode” using M/m, and
4 Select an album using M/m, and press press ENTER.
ENTER. 3 Select “File” or “Album” using M/m, and
To show the 4-Photo List or 1-Photo List, press ENTER.
press < to select “Title View,” and
press ENTER, then select “4 Photos” or To turn off the “Photo Album” list
“1 Photo” using M/m, and press ENTER. Press SYSTEM MENU.
,continued 103
To play a slideshow with the sound (HDD To rotate an image
only) Press ANGLE repeatedly during a slideshow.
Each time you press ANGLE, the image turns
Managing JPEG Image
You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to
the sound stored in the HDD. clockwise by 90°. Files on the HDD
1 Select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD” z Hint
in step 3 of “Using the “Photo Album” You can start a slideshow by selecting “Start
List” on page 102. Slideshow” from the sub-menu.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch between the album list and JPEG
image file list, if necessary.
2 Select an album or JPEG image file using
M/m, and press ,.
SYSTEM
3 Select “Start Audio Slideshow,” and MENU
press ENTER.
</M/m/,,
4 Select a genre using </,. ENTER
For details about assigning a genre, see
“Managing Audio Tracks on the Music
Jukebox” on page 97.
5 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The slideshow and the playback from the
first track of the selected genre start. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
b Notes
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may 2 Select “Photo Album,” and press
be displayed with black bands at top and bottom, ENTER.
or left and right. The “Photo Album” menu appears.
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to
display. This is not a malfunction. 3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
JPEG Image Files
• All albums or tracks in the selected genre will be HDD,” and press ENTER.
played during Slideshow even if some albums or
The “Photo Album” list appears.
tracks are set to skip.
4 Select an album or JPEG image file,
To stop a slideshow and press ,.
Press x (stop) or O RETURN. The sub-menu appears.
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
To pause a slideshow
Press X (pause). You can make the following edits to the
Note that only slideshow pauses and the album/JPEG image file.
sound continues to play.
“Start Slideshow”: Starts a slideshow
To view the next/previous image during a (page 104).
“Start Audio Slideshow” (HDD only):
slideshow
Press ./>. Starts a slideshow with the sound
(page 104).
To zoom an image “New Album”: Creates a new album.
Press ENTER repeatedly during a slideshow.
Each time you press ENTER, the “Album Options”
magnification changes as shown below. • “Erase Album”: Erases the selected
2× t 4× t normal magnification album.
You can move the area you want to zoom • “Copy Album Contents”: Copies all
using </M/m/,. JPEG image files in the selected album
to the HDD (page 99).
,continued 105
1-25
 • “Rename Album”: Changes the
selected album name (page 37).
• “Protect Album Contents”: Protects all
JPEG image files in the selected album.
• “Cancel Protection”: Cancels
protection of all JPEG image files in the
selected album.
“Copy to DVD”: Copies the selected
album or JPEG image file to a DVD
(page 100).
“Multi-Mode”: Selects multiple albums
or JPEG image files to edit.
“Copy all to HDD”: Copies all the
albums and JPEG image files to the HDD
(page 98).
“Copy to HDD”: Copies the selected
album or JPEG image file to the HDD
(page 98).
“File Options”
• “Erase”: Erases the selected JPEG
image file.
• “Copy”: Copies the selected JPEG
image file (page 99).
• “Rename File”: Changes the selected
JPEG image file name (page 37).
• “Protect”: Protects the selected JPEG
image file. Select again to cancel the
protection.
“Print”: Prints the selected JPEG image
file (page 106).
“Detailed Information”: Displays the
detailed information for the selected
JPEG image file (page 104).
“Single-Mode”: Cancels “Multi-Mode.”
106
Settings and Adjustments
Disc Settings (Disc
Setup)
The “Disc Setup” setup allows you to adjust
DVD related settings.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
The “Disc Setup” setup appears with the
following options. The default settings
are underlined.
Basic
Input Disc Name
You can label a disc.
For details, see page 38.
Protect Disc
You can protect a disc against erasure.
For details, see page 39.
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)
The recorder automatically starts formatting
in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is
selected below, when a new, unformatted
DVD-RW is inserted.
VR Mode Automatically formats the disc
in VR mode.
Video Automatically formats the disc
Mode in Video mode.
Format
You can manually re-format a DVD+RW,
DVD-RW, or DVD-R disc to make a blank
disc.
For details, see page 42.
108
Printing JPEG Image
Files
You can print JPEG image files on the HDD
or connected USB device by connecting a
PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB
jack on the recorder.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
printer.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Connect a PictBridge-compatible
printer to the USB jack on the
recorder.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
PictBridge-compatible
printer
Finalise
Finalises a disc to play it on other DVD
equipment.
For details, see page 40.
Optimise HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings
repeatedly, the HDD file system gradually
becomes fragmented. To ‘clean up’ all the
fragmented files, optimise the HDD
periodically. When the HDD needs
optimising, a message recommending
optimisation will appear automatically.
1 Set the clock manually.
Select “Optimise HDD” in “Disc Setup,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
A progress bar appears and the
optimisation starts.
To cancel optimisation, press ENTER.
The HDD will be partly optimised.
b Notes
• It will take about eight hours to optimise the
HDD. During optimisation, other operations,
such as recording or playback, cannot be
performed.
• You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD
disc space is insufficient for optimising. Erase
titles to open up disc space (page 72).
Format HDD.
You can format the HDD and resolve the
problem when the hard disk error occurred.
“Format HDD.” can be selected only when
the hard disk needs formatting. Note that all
of the recorded content on the HDD will be
erased.
1 Select “Format HDD.” in “Disc Setup,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
1-26
2 Connect the USB device to the USB 13 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
jack on the recorder. You can set the paper size and layout.
Refer to the operating instructions
When printing JPEG image files on the
HDD, skip this step. supplied with the printer.
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears. To cancel printing
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press Press ENTER.
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
To display the connected printer
Select “Confirm Printer” of “USB” in the
5 Select the item, and press ENTER. “Options 2” setup (page 128).
To print JPEG image files on the HDD,
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.” To restart the connected USB device
To print JPEG image files from the Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in the
connected USB device, select “View “Options 2” setup (page 128).
Photos on a USB Device.”
The “Photo Album” list appears. z Hint
Printing options, such as paper size or layout, differ
6 Select an album, and press ENTER. depending on the printer. For details, refer to the
instructions supplied with the printer.
JPEG Image Files
7 Select a file using M/m, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
8 Select the item, and press ENTER.
To print two or more files, select “Multi-
Mode.”
To print the file selected in step 7 only,
go to step 12.
9 Select a file, and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
10 Repeat step 9 to select all files you
want to print.
11 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
12 Select “Print,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
107
4 Press m to select “Start,” and press
Recorder Settings ENTER.
• If the recorder does not receive a time
(Basic) signal from any station, press
O RETURN and set the clock
The “Basic” setup helps you to make clock manually.
and other recorder related settings. • If the Auto Clock Set function did not
set the clock correctly for your local
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the area, try another station for the Auto
Clock Set function or set the clock
recorder is in stop mode.
manually.
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
ENTER. Manual (Manual Clock Set)
3 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
The “Basic” setup appears with the 1 Select “Clock Setting” in “Basic,” and
press ENTER.
following options. The default settings
are underlined. 2 Select “Manual,” and press ENTER.
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM
MENU repeatedly.
3 Press </, to select the time zone for
your area, and press m.
4 Select “On” if you are now on summer
Clock Setting time, and press ENTER.
Auto (Auto Clock Set)
Settings and Adjustments
Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a
programme position in your local area
broadcasts a time signal.
1 Select “Clock Setting” in “Basic,” and
press ENTER.
2 Select “Auto,” and press ENTER.
3 Press </, repeatedly until the
programme position of the station that
carries a time signal appears.
,continued 109
 5 Press M/m to set the day, and press ,. HELP Setting
Set the month, year, hour, and minutes in
sequence. Press </, to select the item On Displays Help information for
to be set, then press M/m to set the GUI displays.
numbers. The day of the week is set
Off Does not set to HELP setting
automatically. mode.
Download from TV
Aerial Reception If you connect a TV to this recorder with
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme
Settings (Tuner) positions by downloading from your TV.
For details, refer to the operating instructions
The “Tuner” setup helps you to make tuner supplied with your TV.

To change the numbers, press < to

return to the item to be changed, and
press M/m.
6 Press ENTER to start the clock.
Input Line System
Selects the colour system when recording
from the connected equipment.
NTSC Records in NTSC or PAL-60
colour system.
PAL/ Records in PAL or SECAM
SECAM colour system.
b Notes
• When picture noise appears after you change the
“Input Line System” setting, change the “Input
Colour System” setting (page 114). If picture
noise still appears, hold down x (stop) on the
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder.
• When you change the “Input Line System”
setting, the Dubbing List is erased.
Power Save
Selects whether this recorder is in power save
Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder)
Select this to run the “Easy Setup”
programme.
1 Select “Easy Setup” in “Basic,” and press
ENTER.
2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
3 Follow the instructions for “Easy Setup”
(page 23) from step 2.
and programme position settings for the
recorder.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Tuner,” and press ENTER.
The “Tuner” setup appears with the
following options. The default settings
are underlined.
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM
MENU repeatedly.
Auto Channel Setting
1 Select “Download from TV” in “Tuner,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
The tuner preset data will be downloaded
from your TV to this recorder.
If any programme positions are unused
or contain unwanted channels, you can
disable them (page 112).
Manual CH Setting
Presets programme positions manually.
If some programme positions could not be set
using the “Easy Setup” function, you can set
them manually.
If there is no sound or if the picture is
distorted, the wrong tuner system may have
been preset during “Easy Setup.” Set the
correct tuner system manually in the steps
below.
1 Select “Manual CH Setting” in “Tuner,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.

Settings and Adjustments

mode when the power is turned off (standby).
3 Select your country/region using </,,
Mode 1 Only antenna input signals are Auto Scan and press ENTER.
output to the connected TV If you connect a TV to this recorder not using
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme Programme position
when the recorder is in standby.
positions automatically using “Auto Scan.”
Mode 2 No input signals are output
when the recorder is in standby. 1 Select “Auto Channel Setting” in
“Tuner,” and press ENTER.
Off Does not set to power save 2 Select “Auto Scan,” and press ENTER.
mode. Normally, select this
setting. 3 Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
b Note The programme position order will be set
Power Save mode does not function in the according to the country/region you set.
following cases, even when “Power Save” is set to If any programme positions are unused
“Mode 1” or “Mode 2.” or contain unwanted channels, you can 4 Press ./> to select the programme
– There is a timer setting with “VPS / PDC” in the disable them (page 112). position.
SCHEDULE list. 5 Select the item you want to change using
– The SMARTLINK features are not available
M/m, and change the settings using </
when “Power Save” is set to “Mode 1” or “Mode
2.”
,, then press ENTER.
• To preset another programme position,
repeat from step 4.

110 ,continued 111

Skip Sound System TV system Channel coverage Corre- Channel Receivable

Select an available TV system (page 112). sponding Set Frequency
On Select this when the DK (East European R1 – R12 VHF
channel number range (MHz)
programme position is unused B/G Select this when in West Countries)
R21 – R69 UHF
or contains unwanted channels. European countries, except H CC9 180.75–188.75
The selected position will be those listed in “Receivable S1 – S20 CATV H CC10 188.75–196.75
skipped when you press PROG channels” on page 112.
+/–. S21 – S41 HYPER I CC11 196.75–204.75
D/K Select this when in East S01 – S05 CATV
Off Does not skip the selected J CC12 204.75–212.75
European countries.
programme position. I (Great Britain/ Ireland A – J VHF J CC13 212.75–220.75
I Select this when in Great Ireland)
South Africa 4 – 11, 13 K CC14 220.75–228.75
Britain/Ireland. VHF
CH System
Select the region to get the best broadcast L CC15 228.75–236.75
L Select this when in France. B21 – B69 UHF
reception. L CC16 236.75–244.75
S1 – S20 CATV
FR Select this when in France. Name M CC17 244.75–252.75
S21 – S41 HYPER
Changes or enters a new station name (up to N CC18 252.75–260.75
Western Select this when in West S01 – S05 CATV
5 characters). The recorder must receive
Euro European countries. N CC19 260.75–268.75
programme position information (e.g., L* (France) F2 – F10 VHF
SMARTLINK information) for station O CC20 268.75–276.75
UK & IE Select this when in Great F21 – F69 UHF
Britain/Ireland. names to appear automatically. P CC21 276.75–284.75
Press ,, then press </, repeatedly to B – Q CATV
select a character. P CC22 284.75–292.75
Eastern Select this when in East S21 – S41 HYPER
Euro European countries. To change the characters, press M/m to move Q CC23 292.75–300.75
* To receive broadcasts in France, select “L.”
the cursor, and press </,.
S21 CC24 299.25–307.25
AFT
Decoder Tuning the French CATV channels S22 CC25 307.25–315.25
On Turns on the Auto Fine Tuning Sets the external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal This recorder can scan the CATV channels B
S23 CC26 315.25–323.25
function. Plus analogue decoder) channels. to Q and the HYPER frequency channels S21
Normally select this position. For details, see page 29. to S41. On the Channel Set menu, the S24 CC27 323.25–331.25
channels are indicated as CC1 to CC44. For S25 CC28 331.25–339.25
Off Allows you to adjust the Channel example, channel B is indicated by Channel
picture manually. S26 CC29 339.25–347.25
Settings and Adjustments

Press </, repeatedly until the programme Set number CC1, and channel Q is indicated
position you want is displayed. by Channel Set number CC23 (see the table S27 CC30 347.25–355.25
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not below). If the CATV channel you want to
• To select a cable or satellite programme
work effectively, select “Off” and press m. S28 CC31 355.25–363.25
position, press </, until the programme preset is indicated by its frequency (for
Press </, to obtain a clearer picture, and example, 152.75 MHz), refer to the table S29 CC32 363.25–371.25
position you want is displayed.
press ENTER. below to find the corresponding channel S30 CC33 371.25–379.25
Receivable channels number.
S31 CC34 379.25–387.25
TV system Channel coverage Corre- Channel Receivable
S32 CC35 387.25–395.25
sponding Set Frequency
BG (West European E2 – E12 VHF channel number range (MHz) S33 CC36 395.25–403.25
Countries, except
Italia A – H VHF B CC1 116.75–124.75 S34 CC37 403.25–411.25
those listed below)
E21 – E69 UHF C CC2 124.75–132.75 S35 CC38 411.25–419.25
S1 – S20 CATV D CC3 132.75–140.75 S36 CC39 419.25–427.25
S21 – S41 HYPER D CC4 140.75–148.75 S37 CC40 427.25–435.25
S01 – S05 CATV E CC5 148.75–156.75 S38 CC41 435.25–443.25
F CC6 156.75–164.75 S39 CC42 443.25–451.25
F CC7 164.75–172.75 S40 CC43 451.25–459.25
G CC8 172.75–180.75 S41 CC44 459.25–467.25

112 ,continued 113

1-27

Channel Swapping
After the programme positions have been set,
you can change the order of each programme
position in the display list.
1 Select “Channel Swapping” in “Tuner,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
3 Press M/m to select the programme
position number you want to swap, and
press ,.
• To display other pages, press ./
> repeatedly.
4 Press M/m to select the programme
position number to swap for the one
selected in step 3, and press ENTER.
The programme position numbers are
swapped.
• To swap the programme position
number of another station, repeat from
step 3.
z Hint LINE 1 In
Video Settings (Video In/ When “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC,” you Selects a method of inputting video signals
can select “Auto,” “3.58NTSC,” or “PAL-60.” for the LINE 1/DECODER jack. The picture
Out) Component Video Out
will not be clear if this setting does not match
the type of video input signal.
Selects the signal format in which the
The “Video In/Out” settings will adjust items recorder outputs video signals: interlace or Video Inputs video signals.
related to the image, such as size and colour. progressive, from the COMPONENT
Select the settings according to the type of S-Video Inputs S-video signals.
VIDEO OUT jacks.
TV, tuner, or decoder connected to the DVD
recorder. Normal(Inter- Outputs signals in the RGB Inputs RGB signals.
lace) interlace format.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
Progressive Outputs signals in the
Decoder Select this when connecting
to an external decoder
recorder is in stop mode.
progressive format. Select (PAY-TV/Canal Plus
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press this when you want to view
progressive signals.
analogue decoder). If you
connect to a cable box/
ENTER.
satellite receiver such as
3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press b Notes CanalSat, do not select this
option.
ENTER. • When you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” you
The “Video In/Out” setup appears with cannot set “Component Video Out.”
the following options. The default • When you connect the recorder to a monitor or NTSC on PAL TV
settings are underlined. projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO Sets the recorder to convert signals of the
OUT jacks, do not set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB.” If NTSC colour system to the PAL colour
you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” in this case, the
system to play NTSC discs on PAL-only
picture may not appear.
• When picture noise appears after you set the TVs. Refer to the operating instructions
recorder to progressive format, hold down supplied with your TV.
x (stop) on the recorder, and press Z (open/
close) on the recorder. On Plays NTSC discs on PAL-
only TVs.
• No video signals are output when using the
HDMI connection.
Off Select this if the connected
TV is a multi-system
LINE 3 Out
(NTSC-compatible) TV.
Selects a method of outputting video signals

Settings and Adjustments

Input Colour System
Selects the colour system when picture noise
appears after you change the “Input Line
System” setting (page 110).
Auto Recorder automatically
detects signals of colour
systems and selects the
appropriate colour system.
PAL Selects the PAL colour
system when “Input Line
System” is set to “PAL/
SECAM.”
SECAM Selects the SECAM colour
system when “Input Line
System” is set to “PAL/
SECAM.”
for the LINE 3 – TV jack.
Video Outputs video signals.
S-Video Outputs S-video signals.
RGB Outputs RGB signals.
b Notes
• If your TV does not accept S-video or RGB
signals, the image will not be displayed in the
selected method on the TV screen even if you
select “S-Video” or “RGB.” See the instructions
supplied with your TV.
• SMARTLINK is available only when “Video” is
selected.
• RGB signals are not output when using the HDMI
connection.

114 115

External Audio DTS Output (DVD VIDEOs only)

Audio Input Settings Stereo Select this when receiving Audio Output Settings Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.

(Audio In) stereo programmes from

connected equipment.
(Audio Out) On Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component with a
The “Audio In” setup allows you to adjust the Bilingual Select this when receiving The “Audio Out” setup allows you to switch built-in DTS decoder.
sound according to the playback and bilingual programmes the method of outputting audio signals when
connection conditions. from connected you connect a component such as an Off Select this when the
equipment. amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack. recorder is connected to an
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the If you connect a component that does not audio component without a
built-in DTS decoder.
recorder is in stop mode. b Note accept the selected audio signal, a loud noise
When receiving audio input signals from the DV (or no sound) will come from the speakers,
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press input jack, the recorder automatically selects and may affect your ears or cause speaker b Note
ENTER. “Stereo” or “Bilingual” regardless of the “External damage. When HDMI output is performed to equipment not
Audio” setting. compatible with DTS signals, the signals will not be
3 Select “Audio In,” and press ENTER.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
output regardless of the “DTS Output” setting.
The “Audio In” setup appears with the Bilingual Recording
following options. The default settings Selects the sound to be recorded. recorder is in stop mode. 96 kHz PCM Output (DVD VIDEOs only)
are underlined.
A/L Records the main sound
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press Selects the sampling frequency of the audio
ENTER. signal.
for the bilingual
programme.
3 Select “Audio Out,” and press ENTER. 96 kHz ->
48 kHz
The audio signals of DVD
VIDEOs are converted to
B/R Records the sub sound for The “Audio Out” setup appears with the
48 kHz and output.
the bilingual programme. following options. The default settings
are underlined. 96 kHz All signals containing
b Note 96 kHz are output without
When recording a bilingual audio signal to the conversion. However, the
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to signals are output at 48 kHz
“Video Mode Off” (except in PCM mode)) or a if copyright-protected
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode (except in PCM signals are contained.
NICAM Select (page 52)
mode), both audio channels are recorded and you
NICAM Normally select this can select the sound when playing. b Notes
Settings and Adjustments

position. • “96 kHz PCM Output” setting has no effect when

DV Input audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT
Standard Select this if the sound from Select the setting for the audio input when (R-AUDIO-L) jacks or LINE 3 – TV/LINE 1/
NICAM broadcasts is not DV camcorder dubbing. DECODER jack. If the sampling frequency is
clear. Select “Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)”/“Mix (Stereo Dolby Digital Output (HDD/DVDs only) 96 kHz, signals are simply converted to analogue
1: 50 %)”/“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” or “Stereo Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal. signals and output.
• If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
Tuner Level 2” only if you have added a second audio
Dolby Digital Select this when the not compatible with 96 kHz signals, 48 kHz PCM
If the playback sound is distorted, set this when recording with your digital video recorder is connected to an will be automatically output even when you select
item to “Compression.” The recorder reduces camera. audio component with a “96 kHz.”
the audio output level. built-in Dolby Digital
Stereo 1 Records original decoder.
This function affects the output of the sound only.
following jacks: Normally select this Dolby Digital Select this when the
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks when dubbing a DV -> PCM recorder is connected to an
– LINE 3 – TV jack format tape. audio component lacking a
– LINE 1/DECODER jack built-in Dolby Digital
Stereo 2 Records additional decoder.
Normal Normally select this audio only.
position.
Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %) b Note
Compression Select this when the If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
Records both stereo not compatible with Dolby Digital signals, the
playback sound from the Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)
1 and 2. PCM signals will be automatically output even
speakers is distorted.
Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %) when you select “Dolby Digital.”

116 ,continued 117

1-28
 MPEG Output (DVD VIDEOs only)
Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.
MPEG Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component with a
built-in MPEG decoder.
MPEG -> Select this when the
PCM recorder is connected to an
audio component without a
built-in MPEG decoder. If
you play MPEG audio
sound tracks, the recorder
outputs stereo signals via
the DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
b Note
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the PCM
signals will be automatically output even when you
select “MPEG.”
Auto Language
Language Settings The “Auto Language” function is available
when “Audio Language” and “Subtitle
Recording Settings
(Language) Language” are set to the same language, and (Recording)
“Subtitle Display” is set to “On.”
The “Language” setup allows you to adjust On For DVD VIDEOs whose
The “Recording” setup allows you to adjust
language settings. main audio track is the recording settings.
language you set in “Audio
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the Language” and “Subtitle 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
recorder is in stop mode. Language,” the recorder recorder is in stop mode.
plays the main audio track
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press without subtitles. 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
ENTER. For DVD VIDEOs whose ENTER.
main audio track is not the
3 Select “Language,” and press ENTER. language you set in “Audio 3 Select “Recording,” and press
The “Language” setup appears with the Language” and “Subtitle ENTER.
following options. The default settings Language,” the recorder The “Recording” setup appears with the
are underlined. plays the main audio track following options. The default settings
with subtitles in the
language you set.
are underlined.
Off Turns off the function.

Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) DVD Menu Language (DVD VIDEO only)
(DVDs only) Switches the language for the DVD menu.
Selects the dynamic range (difference Select “w/Subtitle Language” to set the same
between soft and loud sounds) setting when language as the language you set in “Subtitle
playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio Language.”
DRC.” This affects the output from the
following jacks: OSD Language Subtitle Display
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks Switches the display language on the screen. Manual Rec. Mode
– LINE 3 – TV jack On Displays subtitles.
– LINE 1/DECODER jack Audio Language (DVD VIDEO only) On (go to Allows you to select all

Settings and Adjustments

– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT Switches the language of the sound track. Off Does not display subtitles. setup) recording modes.
jack only when “Dolby Digital Output” is Select this, and press
Assist Subtitle Displays special assistive ENTER.
set to “Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 117). Subtitle Language (DVD VIDEO only) subtitles, where available. Then, select a recording
Switches the language of the subtitles
On Makes low sounds clear mode using </,, and
recorded on the disc. press ENTER.
even if you turn the volume z Hint
down. If you select “Others” in “Audio Language,”
“Subtitle Language,” or “DVD Menu Language,” Off Allows you to select
Off Normally select this press m, and enter a language code from “Language standard recording modes
position. Code List” on page 146. only.

b Note
If you select a language in “DVD Menu Language,”
“Subtitle Language,” or “Audio Language” that is
not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of the
recorded languages will be automatically selected.

118 ,continued 119

Manual recording mode Approx. recording time Approx. recording time For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set
The table below shows the approximate (hours) (hours) to “Video Mode On”)/DVD+RW/DVD-RW
Recording
recording times for the HDD and the different mode Recording (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)
RDR- RDR- DVD+RW/
DVD types in each manual recording mode, mode HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN9: 720 × 480 / 720
HX750 HX950 DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/
as well as the standard recording mode DVD+R/ DVD-R DL × 576
equivalents. MN5 235 370 DVD-R MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576
MN4 (SLP) 270 425 MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288
MN9 (LP) 4 7 hr. 11 min.
The recording time for the HDD MN3 (SEP) 340 530
MN8 4 hr. 30 min. 8 hr. 4 min. Rec. Mode Adjust
Approx. recording time
MN2 405 635 MN7 5 8 hr. 58 min.
Recording (hours) On Automatically adjusts the
mode MN1 455 710 MN6*3 (EP) 6 10 hr. 46 min. recording mode to enable
RDR- RDR-
HX750 HX950 the entire programme to be
*3
MN5 7 12 hr. 34 min. recorded (page 54).
HQ+*1 23 36 The recording time for DVDs
MN4*3 (SLP) 8 14 hr. 21 min.
Off Turns off the function.
PCM*2 34 53 Approx. recording time *3*4 *4
(hours) MN3 (SEP ) 10 17 hr. 57 min.
MN32 (HQ) 34 53
Recording DVD+RW/ MN2*3*4 12 21 hr. 32 min. Set Thumbnail
MN31 36 57 mode Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture
DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/ MN1*3*4 13 hr. 24
MN30 39 61 DVD+R/ DVD-R DL 22 min. shown in the Title List.
DVD-R
MN29 42 66 *1
Records in higher quality (15 Mbps). 0 seconds The first frame of the title is
PCM*2 1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min. HQ+ mode is not available for DVDs. When set for the thumbnail
MN28 45 70
MN32 (HQ) 1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min. recording to DVDs, the recording mode picture.
MN27 48 75 automatically switches to HQ mode even if you
MN31 1 hr. 5 min. 1 hr. 57 min. set to HQ+ mode. 30 seconds The frame at 30 seconds
MN26 (HSP) 50 79 *2 Audio signals are recorded in 48kHz PCM
MN30 1 hr. 10 min. 2 hr. 6 min. from the first frame is set for
MN25 53 84 format, and video signals are recorded in HQ the thumbnail picture.
MN29 1 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 15 min. mode. When recording a bilingual programme,
MN24 56 88 select the sound to be recorded (page 116). 3 minutes The frame at 3 minutes from
MN28 1 hr. 20 min. 2 hr. 24 min. *3 Titles recorded in MN6 or lower mode cannot be
MN23 59 92 the first frame is set for the
MN27 1 hr. 25 min. 2 hr. 33 min. dubbed to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs at high speed. thumbnail picture.
MN22 62 97 *4 SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode is not available
MN26 (HSP) 1 hr. 30 min. 2 hr. 41 min. for DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R DLs. When
MN21 (SP) 68 105 Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) (HDD/DVD-RW/
Settings and Adjustments

MN25 1 hr. 35 min. 2 hr. 50 min. recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the

MN20 73 115 recording mode automatically switches to SLP DVD-R in VR mode only)
MN24 1 hr. 40 min. 2 hr. 59 min. mode even if you set to SEP, MN1, MN2, or
MN19 79 120 On The recorder detects
MN23 1 hr. 45 min. 3 hr. 8 min. MN3 mode.
MN18 (LSP) 84 130 changes in the picture and
MN22 1 hr. 50 min. 3 hr. 17 min. z Hint sound and automatically
MN17 90 140 Audio signals are recorded in Dolby Digital 2 ch inserts chapter marks (up to
MN21 (SP) 2 3 hr. 35 min. 99 chapters for one title
MN16 96 150 format (except for PCM mode).
MN20 2 hr. 10 min. 3 hr. 53 min. recorded on the HDD).
MN15 (ESP) 100 155
MN19 2 hr. 20 min. 4 hr. 11 min. Resolution
Off No chapter mark is inserted.
MN14 105 165 The first figure refers to when “Input Line
MN18 (LSP) 2 hr. 30 min. 4 hr. 29 min. System” is set to “NTSC”; the second when
MN13 110 175
MN17 2 hr. 40 min. 4 hr. 47 min. set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup b Notes
MN12 115 185 (page 110). • The actual chapter mark interval may vary
MN16 2 hr. 50 min. 5 hr. 5 min. depending on the amount of information
MN11 120 190 For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set contained in the video to be recorded.
MN15 (ESP) 3 5 hr. 23 min.
MN10 125 200 to “Video Mode Off”)/DVD-RW (VR mode)/ • Chapter marks are automatically inserted, where
MN14 3 hr. 10 min. 5 hr. 41 min. DVD-R (VR mode) the date or time information changes on the tape,
MN9 (LP) 135 210 HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN16: 720 × 480 / 720 when “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On”
MN13 3 hr. 20 min. 5 hr. 59 min.
MN8 150 235 × 576 during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD-RW/
MN12 3 hr. 30 min. 6 hr. 17 min. MN15 to MN12: 544 × 480 / 544 × 576 DVD-R (VR mode).
MN7 165 265
MN11 3 hr. 40 min. 6 hr. 35 min. MN11 to MN9: 480 × 480 / 544 × 576
MN6 (EP) 200 315 MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576
MN10 3 hr. 50 min. 6 hr. 53 min.
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288
120 ,continued 121

1-29
 Auto Chapter (Video) (DVD-RW/DVD-R in
Video mode only)
No
Separation
No chapter mark is inserted.
10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 10-minute
intervals.
15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 15-minute
intervals.
Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) (DVD+RW/
DVD+R only)
No No chapter mark is inserted.
Separation
10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 10-minute
intervals.
15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 15-minute
intervals.
HDD Recording Format
Selects the HDD recording format.
Video Mode Records to the HDD in VR
Off mode.
When recording stereo and
bilingual programmes, both
main and sub sounds can be
recorded.
Video Mode Records to the HDD in
On Video mode.
When recording stereo and
bilingual programmes, only
one sound track (main or
sub) can be recorded.
Set “Bilingual Recording”
to “A/L” (default) or “B/R”
in the “Audio In” setup
(page 116).
z Hint
The HDD contents recorded in Video mode can be
dubbed to a disc at high speed (page 78).
122
6 Select “Code” (geographic area) as the
playback limitation level, and press
ENTER.
The area is selected.
• When you select “Number,” press the
number buttons to select and enter a
country/area code in the table
(page 147), and press ENTER.
7 Select “Change Level,” and press
ENTER.
The “Parental Control : Change Level”
display appears.
8 Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
9 Select the level.
The lower the value, the stricter the
limitation.
Discs rated higher than the selected level
will be restricted.
10 Press ENTER.
The Parental Control setting is complete.
To cancel the Parental Control setting for
the disc, select “Off” in step 9.
Change Password
1 Select “Parental Control” in “Playback,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select “Change Password,” and press
ENTER.
3 Enter your four-digit password in the
“Current Password” row using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
4 Enter a new password in the “New
Password” row using the number
buttons, and press ENTER.
124
4:3 Letter Box Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only)
Playback Settings Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be
limited according to a predetermined level,
(Playback) such as the age of the users. Scenes may be
blocked or replaced with different scenes.
4:3 Pan Scan
The “Playback” setup allows you to adjust 1 Select “Parental Control” in “Playback,”
the playback settings. and press ENTER.
When you have already registered a
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the password, go to step 3.
recorder is in stop mode. 16:9 2 Select “Set Password,” and press
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press ENTER.
ENTER. The display for registering a new
password appears.
3 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER.
The “Playback” setup appears with the b Note
following options. The default settings Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be
are underlined. selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or
vice-versa.
Pause Mode
Selects the picture quality in pause mode.
Field Outputs a stable, generally
shake-free image. 3 Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
Frame Outputs a sharp image, but
may be prone to shake.
Auto Outputs a generally less
TV Type sharp but more stable still
Select the playback picture size according to image.
the type of connected TV (wide-screen/wide
mode TV or conventional 4:3 screen TV). Seamless Playback (HDD/DVD-RW/DVD-
Settings and Adjustments
4:3 Letter Box Select this when connecting R in VR mode only)
to a 4:3 screen TV. Displays
On Playback is smooth, but
4 Select “Standard,” and press ENTER.
a wide picture with bands The “Parental Control : Standard”
on the upper and lower with a trade-off against the
accuracy of the edit points. display appears.
portions of the screen.
4:3 Pan Scan Select this when connecting Off You may notice momentary
to a 4:3 screen TV. interruption at edited points
Automatically displays a during playback of a VR
wide picture on the entire mode Playlist.
screen and cuts off the
portions that do not fit.
16:9 Select this when connecting
to a wide-screen TV or TV 5 Enter your four-digit password using the
with a wide mode function.
number buttons, and press ENTER.
,continued 123
b Notes
720 x 576p*1 Sends 720×576p video
• If you forget your password, reset the recorder
(page 136). HDMI Settings (HDMI signals.
• When you play discs which do not have the
Parental Control function, playback cannot be
Output) 720 x 480p*2 Sends 720×480p video
signals.
limited on this recorder.
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to The “HDMI Output” setup allows you to
change the Parental Control level while playing 720 x 576i*1 Sends 720×576i video
adjust items related to the HDMI connection.
the disc. In this case, enter your password, then signals.
You can select “HDMI Output” only when
change the level. connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT 720 x 480i*2 Sends 720×480i video
jack. signals.
Angle Indicator (DVD VIDEOs only)
On Displays “ ” on the TV 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the *1
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”
screen if various angles recorder is in stop mode. is set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup
(multi-angles) for a scene (page 110).
are recorded on the disc. 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press *2
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”
ENTER. is set to “NTSC” in the “Basic” setup (page 110).
Off Does not display “ ” on
the TV screen. 3 Select “HDMI Output,” and press b Notes
ENTER. • When picture noise appears after you change the
“Screen Resolution” setting, hold down x (stop)
The “HDMI Output” setup appears with
on the recorder, and press Z (open/close) on the
the following options. The default recorder.
settings are underlined.
After connecting equipment to the HDMI
• When “Colour” is set to “YCbCr 4:2:2” in the
“HDMI Output” setup, you cannot select “720 x
OUT jack, “Screen Resolution,” “4:3 576i” (or “720 x 480i”).
Video Output,” and “Colour” are
automatically set to the appropriate 4:3 Video Output
settings. This setting is effective only when you set
“TV Type” to “16:9” in the “Playback” setup.
Adjust this setting to watch 4:3 aspect ratio
signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on
your TV, change the setting on your TV, not
this recorder.
Settings and Adjustments
Note that this setting is effective only for
HDMI connection.
Full Select this when you can
change the aspect ratio on
your TV.
Screen Resolution
Selects the type of video signals output from Normal Select this when you cannot
change the aspect ratio on
the HDMI OUT jack. If the picture is not your TV. Shows a 4:3 size
clear, natural or to your satisfaction, try video with the aspect ratio
another option that suits the disc and your as it is.
TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to the
instruction manual supplied with the TV/
projector, etc.
1920 x 1080p Sends 1920×1080p video
signals.
16:9 aspect ratio TV
1920 x 1080i Sends 1920×1080i video
signals.
1280 x 720p Sends 1280×720p video
signals.
,continued 125
1-30
 Colour HDMI Control Command Mode
Selects the method of outputting video
signals for the HDMI jack. On Allows you to use the Other Settings (Options) Changes the Command Mode of the recorder
to avoid interference with your other Sony
HDMI control features
DVD recorder or player.
RGB (0-255) Outputs RGB (0-255) (page 18). The “Options” and “Options 2” setups allow
signals. Select this when you to set up other operational settings. 1 Select “Command Mode” in “Options,”
connecting to an RGB (0- Off Turns off the function. and press ENTER.
255) device. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the 2 Select a Command Mode (DVD1,
recorder is in stop mode. DVD2, or DVD3), and press ENTER.
RGB (16-235) Outputs RGB (16-235)
signals. Select this if
colours appear overly rich
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press b Note
ENTER. The default command mode setting for this
and the black appears too recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.
deep. 3 Select “Options” or “Options 2,” and The remote does not function if different
press ENTER. command modes are set for the recorder and
YCbCr 4:2:2 Outputs 10-bit YCbCr remote. Set the same command mode.
4:2:2 component signals. The “Options” or “Options 2” setup
appears with the following options. The 3 Set the Command Mode for the remote
YCbCr 4:4:4 Outputs 8-bit YCbCr default settings are underlined. so it matches the Command Mode for the
4:4:4 component signals. Example: “Options” setup recorder you set above.
Follow the steps below to set the
b Notes Command Mode on the remote.
• Some settings may not be available depending on 1 Hold down ENTER.
the connected device. 2 While holding down ENTER, enter
• When a DVI device is connected, you cannot the Command Mode code number
select “YCbCr 4:2:2” or “YCbCr 4:4:4.”
using the number buttons.
• When “Screen Resolution” is set to “720 x 576i”
(or “720 x 480i”) in the “HDMI Output” setup, Command Mode Code number
you cannot select “YCbCr 4:2:2.”
DVD1 number button 1
Audio Output DVD2 number button 2
Selects the type of audio signal output from Options DVD3 number button 3
the HDMI OUT jack.
On Screen Display 3 Hold down both the number and
Auto Outputs Dolby Digital,

Settings and Adjustments

ENTER buttons at the same time for
MPEG and DTS audio On Automatically displays
signals as a bitstream more than three seconds.
information on the screen
signal. Normally select when the recorder is turned
this position. z Hint
on, etc.
You can check the Command Mode for the recorder
PCM Converts all audio signals in the front panel display.
Off Displays information only
except for DTS signals to when DISPLAY is pressed. Command In the front panel
PCM. Mode display
Bitstream Select this if the Front Panel Display DVD1 “1” appears.
Priority connected device is Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.
DVD2 “2” appears.
compatible with bitstream
audio. On Bright lighting. DVD3 Either “1” or “2” does not
appear.
Off Turns off the lighting when
b Notes the power is off.
• The PCM signals may not be output even when
you select “Auto” depending on the “Audio Out”
settings, number of audio channels, and the
HDMI-connected device.
• The “Audio Output” function is not available
when a DVI device is connected.

126 ,continued 127

SMARTLINK TV Pause Picture noise appears.

Selects the tuner for the TV Pause (page 67). , If the picture output signal from your
This Recorder Allows you to use the Additional Information
Only SMARTLINK function TV’s Tuner Selects this when recorder passes through your VCR to get to
with the recorder when the connecting the recorder to your TV, or if you are connected to a
recorder is in standby mode. your TV using the SCART Troubleshooting combination TV/VIDEO player, the copy-
jack. protection signal applied to some DVD
Pass Through Allows you to use the programmes could affect picture quality. If
If you experience any of the following
SMARTLINK function Recorder’s Selects this when you still experience this problem even when
with the connected
difficulties while using the recorder, use this
Tuner connecting the recorder to you connect your recorder directly to your
equipment when the troubleshooting guide to help remedy the
your TV not using the TV, try connecting your recorder to your
recorder is in standby mode. SCART jack. problem before requesting repairs. Should
any problem persist, consult your nearest TV’s S VIDEO input.
Sony dealer. , You have set the recorder to progressive
b Note format even though your TV cannot accept
Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the “Basic” setup
the progressive signal. In this case, hold
(page 110) to set “SMARTLINK” to “Pass
Through.” Power down x (stop) on the recorder, and press
Z (open/close) on the recorder.
DivX The power does not turn on. , Even if your TV is compatible with
, Check that the mains lead is connected progressive format (525p/625p) signals, the
Registration Code image may be affected when you set the
securely.
Displays the registration code of DivX video recorder to progressive format. In this case,
files for this recorder. hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and
For more information, go to http:// press Z (open/close) on the unit and the
www.divx.com/vod on the Internet. Picture
recorder is set to normal (interlace) format.
There is no picture. , You are playing a title recorded in a colour
Set Preview (HDD only)
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely. system that is different from your TV.
Selects the thumbnail type shown in the Title , Noise may appear in the pictures recorded
List. , The connecting cords are damaged.
, Check the connection to your TV (page 13). on the HDD, which is due to the
Quick Plays short excerpts from , Switch the input selector on your TV (such characteristics of HDD, and is not a
Preview throughout the selected as to “VCR” and “AV 1”) so that the signal malfunction.
title. from the recorder appears on the TV screen. , When playing a double-layer DVD, the
, Check that the “Video In/Out” setup is set video and audio may be momentarily
Normal Plays the selected title from to the appropriate item that conforms to interrupted at the point where the layers
the beginning. switch.
your system (page 114).
, If you connect the recorder to your TV via
Additional Information

only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT There is no picture or picture noise

Options 2 jacks, set “Component Video Out” in the appears when connected to the DV IN
“Video In/Out” setup to “Progressive” jack.
USB (page 115). , Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
Restart USB Device , When playing a double-layer DVD, the and on again. 2Turn the connected
video and audio may be momentarily equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
Restarts the connected USB device if it does
interrupted at the point where the layers
not respond to the recorder. If the connected and then connect the i.LINK cable again.
switch.
USB device still does not work properly, try
following:
– Turn the connected USB device off and on
again.
– Disconnect and then connect the USB
cable.
Confirm Printer
Displays the manufacturer and model name
of the printer connected to the recorder. Note
that this function may not work depending on
the printer.

128 ,continued 129

1-31
 There is no picture or picture noise appears
when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
and then connect the HDMI cord again.
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video
output, changing the “Screen Resolution”
setting in the “HDMI Output” setup may
solve the problem (page 125). Connect the
TV and the recorder using a video jack
other than HDMI OUT, and switch the
TV’s input to the connected video input so
that you can see the on-screen displays.
Change the “Screen Resolution” setting in
the “HDMI Output” setup, and switch the
TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture still
does not appear, repeat the steps and try
other options.
, The recorder is connected to an input device
that is not HDCP compliant (page 16).
, When picture noise appears after you
change the “Screen Resolution” setting,
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and
press Z (open/close) on the recorder.
TV programme reception does not fill the
screen.
, Set the channel manually in “Manual CH
Setting” in the “Tuner” setup (page 111).
, Select the correct source using the INPUT
button, or select a channel of any TV
programme using the PROG +/– buttons.
TV programme pictures are distorted.
, Reorient the TV aerial.
, Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction
manual).
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart.
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables
farther apart.
, The aerial cable is connected to the
AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder.
Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack.
, The recorder’s colour system is different
from your TV. Hold down x (stop) on the
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder
to change the recorder’s colour system.
130
Sound distortion occurs.
, Set “Tuner Level” in the “Audio In” setup
to “Compression” (page 116).
Sound is noisy.
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,
noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R-
AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 3 – TV jack, or
LINE 1/DECODER jack (page 89).
The sound volume is low.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.
The sound volume may improve if you set
“Audio DRC” in the “Audio Out” setup to
“On” (page 118).
, Set “Tuner Level” in the “Audio In” setup
to “Normal” (page 116).
An alternate audio track cannot be
recorded or played.
, When recording from connected
equipment, set “External Audio” to
“Bilingual” in the “Audio In” setup
(page 116).
, Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot
be recorded on the HDD (when Video
Mode On) DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video
mode). To record the language, set
“Bilingual Recording” in the “Audio In”
setup to “A/L” or “B/R” before recording
(page 116). To record both the main and sub
sounds on a disc, record on DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs (VR mode). To record on the
HDD, set “HDD Recording Format” to
“Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” setup
(page 122).
, If you have connected an audio component
to the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack
and want to change the audio track for the
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”
setup (page 122))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs
(VR mode) during playback, set “Dolby
Digital Output” in the “Audio Out” setup to
“Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 117).
132
TV channels cannot be changed.
, The channel is skipped (page 112).
, A timer recording started, which changed
the channels.
The picture from equipment connected to
the recorder’s input jack does not appear
on the screen.
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE
1/DECODER jack, select “L1” in the front
panel display by pressing INPUT.
If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2
IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel
display by pressing INPUT.
The playback picture or TV programme
from the equipment connected through the
recorder is distorted.
, If the playback picture output from a DVD
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your
recorder before reaching your TV, the copy-
protection signal applied to some
programmes could affect picture quality.
Disconnect the playback equipment in
question and connect it directly to your TV.
The picture does not fill the screen.
, Set “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup in
accordance with the screen size of your TV
(page 122).
The picture does not fill the screen, even
though the picture size is set in “TV Type”
in the “Playback” setup.
, The picture size of the title is fixed.
The picture is black and white.
, Check that “LINE 3 Out” in the “Video In/
Out” setup is set to the appropriate item that
conforms to your system (page 115).
, If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to
use one that is fully wired (21 pins).
Playback
The recorder does not play any type of disc
(except HDD).
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with
the labelled side facing up.
, The disc is not correctly inserted.
, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.
In this case, if the recorder is on, leave it on
(if it is off, leave it off) for about an hour
until the moisture evaporates.
, If the disc was recorded on another recorder
and was not finalised (page 40), the
recorder cannot play the disc.
The recorder does not start playback from
the beginning.
, Resume play was activated (page 61).
, You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu
or DVD menu automatically appears on the
TV screen when it is first inserted. Use the
menu to start playback.
The recorder starts playing automatically.
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto
playback function.
Playback stops automatically.
, If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the
recorder stops playback at the auto pause
signal.
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.
, Depending on the DVD, you may not be
able to do some of the operations above. See
the instruction manual supplied with the
disc.
The language for the sound track cannot
be changed.
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the
DVD being played.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of
the language for the sound track.
, Try changing the language using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
1-32
GUIDE Plus+ system
GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.
, 1Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV
programme listings do not appear until the
recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.
2Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug
it. 3Wait for 24 hours. It may take several
days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE
Plus+ data for all programme positions. If
the recorder does not receive the GUIDE
Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host
channel manually (page 49).
, The country/region or postal code is
incorrect. Correctly set your country/region
and postal code (page 23).
, When the recorder is connected to a set top
box receiver, the set top box receiver must
be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus+
data.
, Area numbers that cannot be received using
GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy Setup”
in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in
the System Menu, and follow the on-screen
instructions to make the settings again
(page 23).
, The “Time Lock” function on your cable
box is activated. Set this function to off.
, If the host channel has changed or moved,
the programme guide data cannot be
received. In this case, follow the steps in
“Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel” (page 48) to update the host
channel setting. If the problem persists after
waiting for one day, search for the host
channel at the following website and set the
host channel manually (page 49).
www.europe.guideplus.com
The programme position number in the
programme listing does not match the
broadcast station.
, There may be more than one channel lineup
for your area. To change the channel lineup,
select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the
GUIDE Plus+ system (page 49).
The subtitle language cannot be changed
or turned off.
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on
the DVD VIDEO.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the
subtitles.
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the
titles recorded on this recorder.
The angles cannot be changed.
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD
VIDEO being played.
, You are trying to change the angles when
“ ” does not appear on the TV screen
(page 60). To display “ ” if various
angles (multi-angles) for a scene are
recorded on the disc, set “Angle Indicator”
to “On” in the “Playback” setup (page 124).
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing
angles.
, Try changing the angle using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles
recorded on this recorder.
, The angles cannot be changed during slow
motion playback or when playback is
paused.
The DivX video files do not play.
, The file is not created in DivX format.
, The file has an extension other than “.avi”
or “.divx.”
, The DATA CD (DivX video)/DATA DVD
(DivX video) is not created in a DivX
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/
Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or UDF (Universal
Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, 2.00, or 2.01.
, The DivX video file format is larger than
720 (width) × 576 (height).
The MP3 audio tracks do not play.
, The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a
format that the recorder can play
(page 139).
Programme listings for some programme
positions are missing.
, The programme guide data may not be
updated. Turn off the recorder and let the
recorder receive the programme guide data.
, Some broadcast stations support only two
days of data. For details, see the following
website:
www.europe.guideplus.com
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
The programme listing is not up to date.
, The recorder was in use during the time that
the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled to be
downloaded.
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
Sound
There is no sound.
, Re-connect all connections securely.
, The connecting cord is damaged.
, The input source setting on the audio
component or the connection to the audio
component is incorrect.
, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-
forward, slow motion, or pause mode.
, If the audio signal does not come through
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI
OUT jacks, check the “Audio Out” setup
(page 117).
Additional Information
, The recorder supports only MP3 audio,
Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX
video files. Press AUDIO and select MP3
audio or MPEG audio.
No sound is output from the HDMI OUT
jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
and then connect the HDMI cord again.
, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI
device (DVI jacks do not accept audio
signals).
, The equipment connected to the HDMI
OUT jack does not conform to the audio
signal format. In this case, set “Audio
Output” to “PCM” in the “HDMI Output”
setup (page 126).
,continued 131
The JPEG image files do not play.
, The JPEG image files are not recorded in a
format that the recorder can play
(page 139).
, Progressive JPEG images cannot be played.
TV Pause does not work.
, You are recording to the HDD or the HDD
is full.
Recording/Timer recording/
Editing
The programme position cannot be
changed from the programme position you
are recording.
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”
Recording does not start immediately
after you press z REC.
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”
“FORMAT,” or “INFO WRITE”
disappears from the front panel display.
Nothing was recorded even though you set
the timer setting correctly.
, There was a power failure during recording.
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to
a power failure that lasted for more than 1
hour. Reset the clock (page 109).
, The channel was disabled after the timer
recording was set. See “Manual CH
Additional Information
Setting” on page 111.
, The programme position was hidden after
the timer recording was set. (See “Disabling
programme positions” on page 50.)
, Disconnect the mains lead from the mains,
and connect it again.
, The programme contains copy protection
signals that restrict copying.
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer
setting (page 58).
, There is no DVD inside the recorder.
, There is not enough disc space for the
recording.
, The set top box receiver was turned off.
, The set top box controller was incorrectly
connected (page 13).
, The settings in “Setup” in the Menu bar
have been changed (page 48).
, The recorder was in the process of dubbing.
,continued 133
 Recording does not stop immediately
after you press x REC STOP.
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to
input disc data before recording can stop.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
Recording does not stop after you press
x.
, Press x REC STOP.
Timer recording is not complete or did not
start from the beginning.
, There was a power failure during recording.
If the power recovers when there is a timer
recording, the recorder resumes recording.
Should the power failure continue for more
than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 109).
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer
setting (page 58).
, Disc space was not sufficient.
, The VPS/PDC function is working.
Contents previously recorded were
erased.
, Data that is not playable on this recorder but
was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be
erased from the disc when the disc is
inserted.
The VPS/PDC function does not operate.
, Check that the clock and date are set
correctly.
, Check that the VPS/PDC time you set is
correct (there might be a mistake in the TV
programme guide). If the broadcast you
wanted to record did not send the correct
VPS/PDC information, the recorder will not
start recording.
, If the reception is poor, the VPS/PDC signal
might be altered and the recorder might not
start recording.
, The VPS/PDC function may not work if the
GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not
complete.
, The VPS/PDC function does not work
when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being
downloaded.
134
“HDCP_ERR” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder is connected to an input device
that is not HDCP compliant. Connect the
equipment that is HDCP compliant
(page 16).
Disregard this error message if the output
picture is displayed correctly.
Mechanical sounds are heard when the
recorder is off.
, While the recorder is adjusting the clock for
the Auto Clock Set function or updating the
EPG information, operational noises may
be heard, even when the power is off. This
is not a malfunction.
136
Dubbing
You dubbed a title, but the title did not
appear in the HDD Title List.
, The title contained a copy protection signal,
so it was moved (page 79).
High-speed dubbing is not possible.
, The title cannot be dubbed at high speed
(page 80). Even if A-B erasure is performed
so that a title does not contain mixed picture
sizes, it is still treated as a title with mixed
picture sizes.
HDD/DVD Dubbing is not possible.
, The title cannot be dubbed (page 79).
Display
The clock has stopped.
, Set the clock again (page 109).
, The clock stopped due to a power failure
that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the
clock (page 109).
The timer indicator is flashing.
, The disc does not have enough space.
, Insert a recordable disc into the recorder.
, The inserted DVD is protected (page 39).
The clock does not appear in the front
panel display when the recorder is turned
off.
, “Front Panel Display” is set to “Off” in the
“Options” setup (page 127).
Resetting the Recorder
You can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
1 Make sure that the recorder is turned
on and remove the disc.
2 Hold down x (stop) on the recorder
and press [/1 on the recorder.
All settings are reset and the recorder
turns off.
1-33
Remote control
The remote does not function.
, Different command modes are set for the
recorder and remote. Set the same
command mode (page 127). The default
command mode setting for this recorder and
the supplied remote is DVD3. You can
check the current command mode in the
front panel display (page 127).
, The batteries are weak.
, The remote is too far from the recorder.
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to
the default setting when you replaced the
batteries. Reset the code (page 21).
, The remote is not pointed at the remote
sensor on the recorder.
Others
The recorder does not detect a USB device
connected to the recorder.
, Make sure that the USB device is securely
connected to the recorder (page 106).
, Check if the USB device or a cable is
damaged.
, Check if the USB device is on.
Display language on the screen switches
automatically.
, When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the
“HDMI Output” setup (page 126), the
display language on the screen
automatically switches, according to the
language setting of the connected TV, if
you change the language settings on your
TV, etc.
The recorder does not operate properly.
, Press down [/1 on the recorder for more
than five seconds until the recorder turns
off. Then, press [/1 again to turn on the
recorder.
, When static electricity, etc., causes the
recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the
recorder and wait until the clock appears in
the front panel display. Then, unplug the
recorder and after leaving it off for a while,
plug it in again.
Notes About This
Recorder
On operation
• If the recorder is brought directly from a
cold to a warm location, or is placed in a
very damp room, moisture may condense
on the lenses inside the recorder. Should
this occur, the recorder may not operate
properly. In this case, if the recorder is on,
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about
an hour until the moisture evaporates.
• When you move the recorder, take out any
discs and do not apply shock or vibration to
the hard disk drive to avoid damaging the
disc or hard disk drive (page 3).
On adjusting volume
Do not turn up the volume while listening to
a section with very low level inputs or no
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be
damaged when a peak level section is played.
On cleaning
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild
detergent solution. Do not use any type of
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent
such as alcohol or benzine.
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens
cleaners (including wet or spray types).
These may cause the recorder to
malfunction.
The disc tray does not open after you press
Z (open/close).
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray
to open after you have recorded or edited a
DVD. This is because the recorder is adding
disc data to the disc.
Any buttons do not function and “LOCKED”
appears in the front panel display.
, The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child
Lock (page 61, 88).
The disc tray does not open and
“TRAYLOCKED” appears in the front panel
display.
, Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
“REPAIR” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder’s repair function is activated
to repair the hard disk drive or disc when the
recorder is turned on after a power failure
has occurred during recorder operation,
such as while recording, or when some
errors have occurred. Leave the recorder on
until “REPAIR” disappears from the front
panel display.
“E01” appears in the front panel display.
, There is a problem in the HDD. Contact
your nearest Sony dealer. Note that contents
Additional Information
on the HDD may be erased when servicing
this unit.
“E02” appears in the front panel display.
, A hard disk error has occurred and you
cannot make a new recording to the HDD.
Press and hold [/1 on the recorder for more
than five seconds to turn the recorder off,
then turn it on again. If “E02” still appears,
format the HDD following the instructions
of “Format HDD.” (page 108). Note that all
of the recorded contents on the HDD will be
erased. If this does not fix the problem,
contact your nearest Sony dealer.
,continued 135
Notes about the discs
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its
edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may
cause it to malfunction.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave
it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the
temperature may rise considerably inside
the car.
• After playing, store the disc in its case.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe
the disc from the centre out.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,
thinner, commercially available cleaners, or
anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
• Do not use the following discs.
– A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,
card, heart).
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker
adhesive on it.
On replacement of parts
In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired
Additional Information
parts may be collected for reuse or recycling
purposes.
137

Specifications
System
Laser: Semiconductor laser
Channel coverage:
PAL/SECAM (B/G, D/K, I, L)
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10,
Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South
Africa 4 to 11, 13
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to
B69, F21 to F69
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France
B to Q
HYPER: S21 to S41
The above channel coverage merely ensures
the channel reception within these ranges. It
does not guarantee the ability to receive
signals in all circumstances. For details, see
“Receivable channels” (page 112).
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer
system
Audio reception: Split carrier system
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial
socket
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/
Power back-up duration: 1 hour
Video recording format: MPEG-2,
MPEG-1
Audio recording format/applicable
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and
SEP mode), PCM
Inputs and outputs
LINE 2 OUT
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
LINE 2 IN
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than
22 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
138
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in
mp3PRO format.
• The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of a
size larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/4 GB.
• The recorder may not play a DivX video file
when the file has been combined from two or
more DivX video files.
Notes on copying JPEG image files/MP3
audio tracks
• You cannot copy JPEG image files/MP3 audio
tracks to the HDD if:
– The total number of JPEG image albums on the
HDD exceeds 999.
– The total number of JPEG image files/MP3
audio tracks under an album exceeds 999.
– The MP3 audio tracks are 1 GB or larger.
• Note that the size of JPEG image files copied to
the HDD may be automatically increased to fit the
TV screen.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files onto a DATA
DVD finalised on other recorders or devices.
• If a warning message indicating that the HDD is
full appears, erase several albums or files to make
space. For details on erasing tracks or files, see
page 97 or 105.
140
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin
CVBS OUT
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)
LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin
CVBS IN/OUT
S-Video/RGB IN
Decoder
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p
G-LINK: mini jack
HDMI OUT: HDMI 19-pin-Standard
Connector
USB:
USB jack Type A (For connecting
digital still camera, Memory card
reader and USB memory)
USB jack Type B (For connecting
PictBridge-compatible printers)
General
Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 44 W
Dimensions (approx.):
430 × 66.5 × 286 mm (width/height/
depth) incl. projecting parts
Hard disk drive capacity:
RDR-HX750: 160 GB
RDR-HX950: 250 GB
Mass (approx.): 4.4 kg
Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC
Operating humidity: 25% to 80%
Supplied accessories:
Mains lead (1)
Aerial cable (1)
Remote commander (remote) (1)
Set top box controller (1)
R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
Specifications and design are subject to
change without notice.
About i.LINK
The DV IN jack on this recorder is i.LINK-
compliant for digital video cameras. This
section describes the i.LINK standard and its
features.
What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for
handling digital video, digital audio and other
data in two directions between equipment
having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling
other equipment.
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be
connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible
applications are operations and data
transactions with various digital AV
equipment. When two or more i.LINK-
compatible equipment are connected to this
recorder in a daisy chain, operations and data
transactions are possible with not only the
equipment that this recorder is connected to
but also with other devices via the directly
connected equipment.
Note, however, that the method of operation
sometimes varies according to the
characteristics and specifications of the
equipment to be connected, and that
operations and data transactions are
sometimes not possible on some connected
equipment.
b Note
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be
connected to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable). When connecting this recorder
to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or
more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), see the instruction
manual of the equipment to be connected.
About the name “i.LINK”
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394
data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is
a trademark approved by many corporations.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard
standardized by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers.
1-34
Notes on MP3 Audio MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image
files, or DivX video files that
Tracks, JPEG Image the recorder can play
Files, and DivX Video The recorder can play the following tracks
Files and files:
– MP3 audio tracks with the extension
“.mp3.”
About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG – JPEG image files with the extension “.jpeg”
or “.jpg.”
image files, and DivX video – Baseline JPEG image files that conform to
files the Exif 2.2* image files format, and
Y:CB:CR is 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0.
MP3 is an audio compression technology that – DivX video files with the extension “.avi”
satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations. or “.divx.”
JPEG is an image compression technology. * “Exchangeable Image File Format”: The file
You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) format used by digital still cameras.
format audio tracks and JPEG image files on
z Hint
the HDD or DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/
Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
CD-RWs) or JPEG image files on the HDD
or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/ playback, it is recommended that you create albums
with no more than two trees.
DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs).
DivX® is a video file compression
b Notes
technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This • The recorder will play any data with the extension
product is an official DivX® Certified “.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or “.divx” even if
product. You can play DATA CDs (CD- they are not in MP3, JPEG, or DivX format.
ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) and DATA DVDs Playing these data may generate a loud noise
(DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD- which could damage your speaker system.
RWs/DVD-Rs) that contain DivX video files. • Depending on the disc, normal playback may not
be possible. For example, the picture may be
DATA DVDs must be recorded according to
unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or
sound may skip, and so on.
UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, • Depending on the disc, playback may take some
2.00*, or 2.01 format for the recorder to time to start.
recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files, • Some files cannot be played.
Additional Information
and DivX video files. • For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files, the
DATA CDs must be recorded according to recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to 99 tracks and
format for the recorder to recognise the MP3 files under an album can be played.
tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video • For JPEG image files, the recorder can load up to
99 albums and/or up to 999 files under an album
files.
on a DATA CD/DATA DVD or the connected
You can also play discs recorded in USB device at a time. To view unloaded albums,
MultiSession/Border. reload them.
See the instructions supplied with the disc • Proceeding to the next or another album may take
drives and the recording software (not some time.
supplied) for details on the recording format. • The image size that can be displayed is limited.
The following image sizes can be displayed:
* Not available for MP3 audio tracks. width 160–5,120 pixels by height 120–3,840
pixels.
Note on MultiSession/Border discs • This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks
recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz,
If audio tracks and images in Music CD
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
format or Video CD format are recorded in • No more than a 1 GB MP3 audio track can be
the first session/border, only the first session/ played.
border will be played back.
,continued 139
i.LINK baud rate
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies
according to the equipment. Three maximum
baud rates are defined:
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications”
in the instruction manual of each equipment.
It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on
some equipment.
The maximum baud rate of equipment on
which it is not indicated such as this unit is
“S100.”
When units are connected to equipment
having a different maximum baud rate, the
baud rate sometimes differs from the
indicated baud rate.
* What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the
amount of data that can be sent or received in one
second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps
means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in
one second.
i.LINK functions on this
recorder
For details on how to dub when this recorder
is connected to other video equipment having
DV jacks, see page 84.
The DV jack on this recorder can only input
Additional Information
DVC-SD signals. It cannot output signals.
The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV
signals from equipment such as a MICRO
MV digital video camera with an i.LINK
jack.
For further precautions, see the notes on
page 84.
For details on precautions when connecting
this recorder, also see the instruction manuals
for the equipment to be connected.
Required i.LINK cable
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable.
i.LINK and are trademarks.
141
 S mc / CM (search/slow/
Guide to Parts and Controls freeze frame) buttons (62, 88, 95)
DAY +/– buttons (45)
For more information, see the pages in parentheses. T TV PAUSE button (67)
U H (play) button (60, 88, 104)
Remote
X (pause) button (62, 88, 95, 104)
A HDD button (31) x (stop) button (60, 88, 94, 104)
DVD button (31) The H button has a tactile dot*.

B [/1 (on/standby) button (23) V z REC button (31)

x REC STOP button (31)
1 2 3

4 5 6 C Z (open/close) button (31) HDD/DVD DUB button (79)

7 8 9
D PROG (programme) +/– buttons (31) REC MODE button (31)
W TV 2 (volume) +/– buttons (21)
0
The + button has a tactile dot*.
E Number buttons (37, 69)
X TV [/1 (on/standby) button (21)
The number 5 button has a tactile dot*.
Y TV PROG (programme) +/– buttons
F INPUT (input select) button (59)
(21)
G AUDIO button (62, 88) The + button has a tactile dot*.
The AUDIO button has a tactile dot*.
Z TV t (input select) button (21)
H CLEAR button (37, 64, 89, 96)
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
I TV/DVD button (21)
the recorder.
J Red button (45)
SUBTITLE/green button (45, 62)
ANGLE/yellow button (45, 60, 105)
PLAY MODE/blue button (45, 64, 69,
89, 91)
K SYSTEM MENU button (56, 65, 80,
86, 92, 98, 108)
TITLE LIST button (33, 60, 72)
TOP MENU button (60)

Additional Information
GUIDE button (43)
L MENU button (60)
M INFO (information) button (43)
N O RETURN button (23)
O </M/m/,/ENTER button (23)
P / (instant replay/instant
advance) buttons (62)
Q DISPLAY button (35)
R ./> (previous/next) buttons (62,
88, 95)
PAGE +/– buttons (45)

142 ,continued 143

Front panel Front panel display

A Displays the following: 4 Timer indicator (53)

A [/1 (on/standby) button (23)
B (remote sensor) (21)
C Disc tray (31)
D Front panel display (145)
E Z (open/close) button (31)
F N (play) button (60, 88, 104)
The N button has a tactile dot*.
G x (stop) button (60, 88, 94, 104)
H z REC button (31)
I x REC STOP button (31)
J HDD button/indicator (31)
DVD button/indicator (31)
• Playing time
K PROGRAM +/– buttons (31) 5 Disc type
• Current title/chapter/track/index
The + button has a tactile dot*. Lights when a recordable DVD-R or
number
DVD-RW disc is loaded.
L INPUT (input select) button (59) • Recording time/recording mode
• Clock 6 Command Mode indicator (127)
M LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/
• Programme position Displays the Command Mode of the
L(MONO) AUDIO R) jacks (27) • EPG indication (43) remote.
N ONE-TOUCH DUB button (86) “EPG” appears when receiving the When the Command Mode for the
GUIDE Plus+ data. recorder is set to DVD3 (default), either
O DV IN jack (84)
• TV Direct Rec. indication (31): “1” or “2” does not appear.
P USB jack (type A) (92, 98) “TV” appears in the right most two
7 Recording status
digits.
Q PictBridge USB jack (type B) (106) 8 Dubbing direction indicator
B NTSC indicator (110, 115)
9 Playing status
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating 3 VPS/PDC indicator (58)
the recorder.
Rear panel
Additional Information

A AERIAL IN/OUT jacks (13) F DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (19)

B LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO) G AC IN terminal (20)
jacks (16, 19) H LINE 3 – TV jack (16)
C LINE 1/DECODER jack (26) I LINE 2 OUT (S VIDEO) jack (16)
D G-LINK jack (14) J COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
E HDMI OUT (high-definition (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) jacks (16)
multimedia interface out) jack (16, 19)

144 145

1-35
 Language Code List Country/Area Code
For details, see page 118. For details, see page 123.
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Number Area (Code) Number Area (Code)
Number Language Number Language Number Language 0118 Argentina (ar) 1325 Malaysia (my)
(code) (code) (code) 0121 Australia (au) 1324 Mexico (mx)
0120 Austria (at) 1412 Netherlands (nl)
0205 Belgium (be) 1426 New Zealand (nz)
0218 Brazil (br) 1415 Norway (no)
0301 Canada (ca) 1611 Pakistan (pk)
0312 Chile (cl) 1608 Philippines (ph)
0314 China (cn) 1620 Portugal (pt)
0411 Denmark (dk) 1821 Russia (ru)
0609 Finland (fi) 1907 Singapore (sg)
0618 France (fr) 0519 Spain (es)
0405 Germany (de) 1905 Sweden (se)
0811 Hong Kong (hk) 0308 Switzerland (ch)
0914 India (in) 2023 Taiwan (tw)
0904 Indonesia (id) 2008 Thailand (th)
0920 Italy (it) 0702 United Kingdom (gb)
1016 Japan (jp) 2119 USA (us)
1118 Korea (kr)

Additional Information
146 147

1-36E
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”.
(See page 12)

Set

Upper case
(Page 2-2)

Tray cover assembly Hard disk

(Page 2-2) (Page 2-5)

Front panel section

(Page 2-3)

FR-274 board,
DVD drive
FL-178 board
(Page 2-4)
(Page 2-3)

Power supply block DC fan AV-114/118 board VDC-001 board

(Page 2-6) (Page 2-4) (Page 2-5) (Page 2-6)

Type AS, BS only

2-1
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. UPPER CASE

4 Upper case

2 Tapping screw

3 Three screws
(special front point screw)

1 Tapping screw

2-2. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY

Hole

3 Two claws

1 The stiff wire

2 Open the tray

4 Tray cover assembly

2-2
2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION

1 Three claws

2 Four claws

3 Front panel section

2-4 FR-274 BOARD, FL-178 BOARD

3 Connector (10p) 4 Connector (6p)

(CN102) (CN101)
2 The wire pin that holds (except GX350)
the harness is set up.

6 FL-178 board

5 Two screws
(+BV3)

1 Flexible flat cable 7 Three screws

(FLR-010) (5core) 9 Flexible flat cable
(+BV3)
(17core)(CN203)

8 Flexible flat cable

(11core)(CN202)
q; FR-274 board

2-3
2-5. DVD DRIVE

qh Four screws 6 Harness (7p)

5 Connector (13p) (+BV3) (CN5604)
(CN201) qg Two screws
4 Connector (4p) (+BV3)
(CN203)
ql

ws Two screws
(+PSW3 × 6)

wd Clamp (L35)

wf Connector (13p) qf Remove the harness.

(CN4501)
wa Connector (6p)
(CN5101)
wg DVD drive
8 Screw (+P3)
9 Screw (+BV3)
w; Connector (10p)
(CN5201) q; Screw (+P3 × 4)
3 Connector (6p)
(CN101) qa Six screws (+BV3)

2 Connector (10p)
(CN102) qs Screw (+P3 × 4)
(except GX350)

1 The wire pin that holds

the harness is set up.

qk Rear panel

qd Flexible flat cable (40core)

7 Flexible flat cable (28core) (CN2301)
(CN4701)
(Type AS, BS only) qj Connector (2p)
(CN103)

2-6. DC FAN

1 Two screws
(+BV3)

2 DC fan

Air flow

2-4
2-7. HARD DISK (Except GX350)

3 Screw (+BV3)
and wire clamp

2 Screw (+BV3)
1 Two screws (+BV3)

8 Hard disk

7 Two screws
6-32UNCX4(SG)
5 Harness (7pin) 6 Two screws
(power) 6-32UNCX4(SG)

4 Harness (4pin)
(data)

2-8. AV-114/118 BOARD

4 Flexible flat cable (FRA-006)

8 Two screws (40core)(CN101)
(+BV3)
7 Two screws
(+BV3)

5 Earth plate

9 AV-114/118 board

6 Connector (5core) CN301

(Type CS, DS only)

3 Flexible flat cable

(24core) (CN302)

1 Flexible flat cable 2 Flexible flat cable

(11core) (CN106) (17core) (CN105)

2-5
2-9. VDC-001 BOARD (Type AS, BS only)

3 Two screws (+BV3)

4 Two screws (+BV3)

5 Flexible flat cable (FVR-001) 6 VDC-001 board

(28core)(CN104)

2 Connector (12p)
(CN202)
1 Flexible flat cable (24core)
(CN106)

2-10.POWER SUPPLY BLOCK

2 Three screws (+BV3) 1 Connector (12p)

(CN202)

5 Power supply block

3 Two board holders

4 Spacer

2-6
2-11. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
NOTE: When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”.
(See page 12)

RD-65 board
Power supply block
VDC-001 board (Type AS, BS only)

RL-178 board

AV-114/118 board
FR-274 board

2-7
MEMO

2-8E
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM NOTE: When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”. (See page 12)
P-CONT

AV-114/118 BOARD JA401

RD-065 BOARD
Y AS,BS Type only
C S VIDEO

U601
TU_V
SWITCHING
VDC-001 BOARD JA5701 REGULATOR
TUNER
SIF XRST1
V VIDEO EXCEPT
LINE2 OUT
AERIAL L
DIGITAL
OUT RDR-GX350 (SRV-2058EK)
IN X1601 IC1601 AUDIO L
18.432MHz TU_L IC5701 SPDIF SO, SI, SCLK IC200 EV+12V D101-104
OUT EURO MSP TU_R DVD
R X101 EEPROM RECT
AUDIO R SPDIF SEL OPTICAL EV+5.8V
SDA 27.576MHz PICK-UP
SCL SI, SCLK BLOCK SW+12V
SWITCHING AC IN
PY Y W2EN+,W2EN-, SW+5V REGULATOR FU101
W3EN+,W3EN-,
COMPONENT RDR-GX350 W1EN+,W1EN-,
SW+3.3V
MSPSTAT PB
AGC CB VIDEO D0-15 OSCEN+,OSCEN- SW+1.5V
OUT IC105 LD
PR DRIVER
IC104 A0-10
SDRAM EXCEPT CS
JA402 CR IC4701 5
B,G B,G VIDEO
DECODER 7 BUFFER
R LASER
STREAM_0-7 VIOD0-VIOD7 FMO+, FMO-
41
R/C R/C FRONT
R,G,B R,G,B C MONITOR

JA501(2/2) V/Y,C
VCLK IC1001
LINE 3/DECODER SDA AV ENC/DEC RF+,RF-
L,R Y Y SCL
L,R Y PHOTO
XRESET IC4702 A, B, C, D, S1, S2, S3, S4 DETECTOR

R/C
B,G

Y
FANCTION
AV-118
IC403 BUFFER
N-LINK SDA
FAN-
22 IC401 SELECTER FAN SCL 4
Y,C DRIVE
SDA VIDEO AUDIO
IC406 SCL SELECTER
V
FAN XRESET
PY,PB,PR
AVLTH SW
20 YP,CR,,CB YP,CR,,CB
R,G,B
Y,C Y,C TDRV T+,T- TRACKING
V/Y,C COIL
JA501(1/2)
LINE 1-TV
V/Y,C IC402 FDRV F+,F- FOCUS
L,R COIL
BUFFER 4
L,R IC3101
FANCTION L,R L,R AIBD0 MDRV
AUDIO ADC XDMUTE1
N-LINK XDMUTE2 U,V,W
1 Y,C
IC501 HU+,HU-
M
V L,R L,R L,R AOD0 SPINDLE
L,R IC3201 FG TRACKING COIL DRIVE
HV+,HV-
HW+,HW-
MOTOR
5
AUDIO DAC FOCUS COIL DRIVE
SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE
H
IC104 IC3203 SLED MOTOR DRIVE
LOADING MOTOR DRIVE ST1+,ST1-,
AGC, MSPSTAT DDC SW AUDIO LPF SL1,SL2 SLED
ST2+,ST2-
M MOTOR
X101
SDA 16.9344MHz
FANCTION SCL LD LDO+,LDO- LOADING
SW 2 M MOTOR
P-CONT
FANCTL X1001 OPEN
N-LINK IC3702 24.576MHz OPEN
CLOSE
JA751 CLOSE
XRST1 XRESET
G LINK
X101
15MHz IC101
RDR-HX750 : AEP1, UK IT
6 4
RDR-HX950 : AEP1 CONTROLLER
2
IC103 MRST IC3707
IC101 VDD V+1R5_IN
IC101 VDD DET RESET IC3701 AT0DAT10-15 AT0DAT10-15
CN3801

IDE I/F
CEC, HPD
13 13
IC102
V+5V X102 IC5202 X1002
DDATA0-31
IC1201
XRESET EXCEPT
POWER FAIL 32.768KHz
DET 5V SW
27MHz
IC1221 RDR-GX350
DADRS0-12 X5502
KEY1-3
IC5204 25MHz
EV+5.8V 512Mbit x2
5V REG DDR SDRAM IC5602
MD0-15 17 TXP,TXN
IC201 AT1DAT10-15 SATA RXP,RXN HDD
MA0-11 BRIDGE
64Mbit
XRESET
UNIT
SDRAM HDATA0-15 13
J201 IC1102
8
X5101 HADRS1-22
Y 24.576MHz 64Mbit
S VIDEO C
FL-178 BOARD FLASH ROM
3 2
LINE2 IN S201,203,204,
KEY1-3 S101 IC5103 PHY D0-7 CN3802
V S207-213 POWER AT1DAT10-15 AT1DAT10-15
KEY1,2
VIDEO FUNCTION DV PHY IDE HDD
L
SWITCH S102 IC101 7 13 TXD,RXD
AUDIO L ONE TOUCH DUB 13
(MONO) EXCEPT RDR-GX350 IR REMOTE
CONTORL X5201 XRESET
R RECEIVE
AUDIO R CN104 48MHz
D212,214 USBDM2 XTAL OSC
HDD,DVD USB USBDP2 IC5801
IC201 FLDATA ATYPE
V+5USB
SEG1-16 FLCLK
GRD1-12 FL DRIVE FLSTB
CN105 USBDM1
USBDP1 JA5801
ND201 USB
VEE
BTYPE USBVFB
FLUORESCENT
DISPLAY IC5203
Q201,202
F1,F2
T201 V+12V
DC/AC CN103
TPAP,TPAN
CONVERTER DV TPBP,TPBN IC5802
FR-274 BOARD IN DDC SW
RDR-HX750/HX950

Note: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.

3-1 3-2
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

3-2. AV-114/118 BLOCK DIAGRAM

AV-114
Q509

AV-114/118 BOARD BUFFER

Q510
BTOMAIN
6
B_IN

GTOMAIN G_IN TO
BUFFER 4 VDC-001 BOARD
(CN106)

U601 Q511
RTOMAIN
Q408
2
C/R_IN
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
TUNER BUFFER BUFFER
Q411

IC401 (3/5)
Q601 D420
TU_VIN RCSEL1 Y_IN
AERIAL
VIDEO OUT BUFFER 8
IN

C/R_IN
VIDEO/AUDIO SELECTOR

G_IN
B_IN
IC601 (5/5) Q410
CN302

EURO MSP
DVD C OUT 59 BUFFER
Q606 Q604 Q413 AV-118
TU_LIN RCSEL2
SIF OUT AMP 2 AIN1+ DACML 27 BUFFER
AERIAL 18 BS IN JA401
OUT Q605 87 A TUNER IN(L)
X601 5 XIN
TU_LIN
18.432MHz DACMR 26 BUFFER 86 A TUNER IN(R) Y2 OUT 36
S VIDEO
6 XOUT SDA C2 OUT 34
13
SCL 12
22 RESETQ MSPSTAT
DC01 8
V2 OUT 32 VIDEO
XRST1
Q602 LINE2 OUT
AGC AUDIO L
AGC OUT BUFFER
Q406

SDA
RDR-HX750 : AEP1, UK
SCL IC101 (1/5)
RDR-HX950 : AEP1
AUDIO R IT CONTROLLER

2Y
4
Y2 IN
7 SEP Y2 IN
AMUTE1
Q404
IC103 (1/5) Q751,752
JA751
XMUTE2 MUTE
2C C2 IN IC101 VDD IC101 VDD DET BLAIR 45 SW
1 9 SEP C2 IN G LINK
Q407

SDET2 2 SDET2 PY(Y) OUT 40 Y 2 IN OUT 1 43 CAPACITOR

TO/FROM 2V 2VIN COMPONENT RFTHRU

FR-274 BOARD 6 14 VIDEO L2 IN RFTHRU 52
Pb(Cb) OUT 38 CB VIDEO FANCTL
(CN202) OUT FANCTL 54
(SEE PAGE 3-7) TUON
X101 TUON 60
15MHz SWVION9V
2L L2_LIN Pr(Cr) OUT 39 CR SWVION9V 61
8 92 A L2 IN(L) IC102 (1/5) 12 CF1
P_CONT 62
P_CONT
SWVION5V
V+5V POWER FAIL DET SWVION5V 64
JA402 13 CF2 TU_DCCON
2R L2_RIN TU_DCCON 74
10 91 A L2 IN(R)
2 IN OUT 1 5 ACDET
CN106 51 2 YP_OUT
F DVD PY (G)
F DVD PR (R) 52 4 CR_OUT (SEE
CB_OUT X102 "POWER BLOCK
41 41 V/Y IN AV2_V/Y_IN F DVD PB (B) 53 6
32.768kHz DIAGRAM")
12 VIDEO L3 IN Y_OUT
36 R/C IN R/CIN F DVD Y 55 8 9 TX1
49 RorC IN C_OUT
32 G IN GIN F DVD C 57 10
48 G IN Y_IN
28 B IN/C OUT BIN DVD VorY OUT 61 12 10 TX2
50 B IN C/R_IN
40 V/Y OUT AV2_V/YOUT 14
JA501 (2/2) 22 AV2 OUT CN105
4 16 G_IN
37 BLANKING_IN BLANK FLPON
LINE3-DECODER 60 PAL SCART IN 2 B_IN SDET2 63 1
N-LINK BLANK 18 24 SDET2 FLON
31 6 FLDATA
XAMUTE2 FLDATA 49 6
29 FUNCTION SW IN FUNC_IN 1 33 XAMUTE2 FLCLK
RCSEL1 FLCLK 51 7
27
23
L IN
R IN
AV2_L_IN
AV2_R_IN
90 A L3 IN(L) RCSEL2
IC403 (3/5) TO/FROM
RD-065 BOARD RCSEL2
34
35
RCSEL1
RCSEL2 FLSTB 50
FLSTB
LED_HDD2
8
89 A L3 IN(R) (CN2301(1/2)) P_SAVE 10
SELECTOR LED_HDD2 97
24 L OUT AV2_L_OUT L_OUT 46 P_SAVE LED_A_TV
72 A AV2/OUT(L) F A DVD (L) 77 20 (SEE PAGE 3-5) CSYNCIN Q108 96 11
R OUT AV2_R_OUT CSYNCIN LED_A_TV
22 R_OUT 67 LED_D_TV TO/FROM
22 71 A AV2/OUT(R) F A DVD (R) 76 22 BLANK LED_D_TV 95 12
BLANK FR-274 BOARD
72 LED_DIVX
Q507 IC406 (4/5) TO DVD (L) 80
3
+ 1 L_IN
FUNC_ON
41 FUNC_ON LED_DIVX 94
LED_PLTV
13 (CN203)
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
2 AVLTH SW 2 26 SQU LED_PLTV 93 14
_ 42 SQUEEZE KEY1
AVLTH FUNC_IN Q102 KEY1 17 15
4 22 FUNC KEY2
AVLOUT KEY2 18 16
BUFFER 26 AVLOUT KEY3
5
TO DVD (R) 79 + AVLTH KEY3 19 17
1 7 R_IN 48 AVLTH IR
6 _ 24
20 V/Y_IN AV1_V/Y_IN AVLIN IR 7 2
20 AVLIN
16 VIDEO L1 IN 70
19 V/Y_OUT AV1_V/Y_OUT CN101 (1/2) MSPSTAT
30 Y1 OUT 71 MSPSTAT
15 R/C_OUT R/COUT Q401 AGC CN101 (2/2)
45 Pr(Cr)/RorC OUT AGC
11 G_OUT GOUT
46 PY(Y)G OUT V C&S C3 IN 1 SW
P_SAVE
IC402 (3/5) 20
P_CONT2 57 28
P_CONT2

7 BOUT MRST
B_OUT BUFFER 65 29
JA501 (1/2) 44 Pb(Cb)/B OUT CSYNCIN
MRST
16 BLANKING_OUT RGBOUT Q402 XRST1
SYNC 41 XRST 29 30
LINE1-TV DAM_TO_T
10 N-LINK 54 RGB M OUT Q403 Q110-112 31
BUFFER TEXTVIN DAM_TO_T 99
8 HSM_TO_T
FUNCTION_SW_OUT 81 CVBSIN 6 32
BUFFER EQ HSM_TO_T
6 AV1_L_IN DAT_TO_M
L_IN 98 33
94 A L1 IN(L) DAT_TO_M
2 AV1_R_IN ASCK
IC104 (1/5)
R_IN 34 TO/FROM
93 A L1 IN(R) 59 EPGEQ ASCK 100 RD-065 BOARD
3 AV1_L_OUT HST_TO_M
L_OUT SDA 42 79 35 (CN2301(2/2))
74 A AV1/OUT(L) DDC SW HST_TO_M
1 AV1_R_OUT DDC_SW1
R_OUT SCL 43 DDC_SW1 37 39 (SEE PAGE 3-5)
1 73 A AV1/OUT(R) HPD
14 40
12 SDA HOTPLUG 73
Q506 Q508 27 DSDA
13 36
SAMUTE 28 SCL DSCL
SAMUTE 38
11 69 CEC0 CEC
9 37
38 DDC_SW2 AMUTE1
10 23
Q505
X525P
AVLOUT 5 Q103-105 1
SW 47 XSCMUTE
7
6 SAMUTE SAMUTE 58 MUTECTL
Q503,504 1 AMUTE1 TXD1
CONTROL
AVLIN TXD1 75 3
SW RXD1
RXD1 76 4
RESET CN103
V+5R8E 6
DBGP0 FOR CHECK
Q501,502 Q101 DBGP0
FUNC_ON 92 7
DBGP1
FUNCTION RESET 8 RESET DBGP1 91 8
SW SQU DBGP2
DBGP2 90 9

3-3 3-4
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

3-3. RD-065 BLOCK DIAGRAM

RD-065 BOARD
CN3801 24,26,28,30, V14,U11,U12,W15,
EXCEPT RDR-GX350
DVD AT0D00
EXCEPT CS IC1001 (2/7,4/7 to 7/7 ) OPTICAL
IDE I/F
32,34,36,38,
37,35,33,31,
AT0DATA0-15
V11,T12,P13,R15,
R13,V10,P15,U13,
|
17,15,13,11,
PICK-UP AT0D015
AV ENC/DEC BLOCK 29,27,25,23 R14,U15,W13,T14 9,7,5,3,
AT1DATA0-15 DD0-15
4,6,8,10,
AT0DA0
CN4701 IC4701 (2/7) PKPULSEP1P,
PKPULSEP1M
AH2, AH1
W2EN+. W2EN-
2 27, 28
6,
8,
AT0ADR0-2
W14
U10 |
12,14,16,18
AF24,AE24, W3EN+, W3EN- AT0CS0 3 U14 AT0DA2
5 35,
8 9 12 AE21,AD24, VIOD0 PKPULSEP2P, AJ4, AJ3 29, 30 AT1ADR0-2 DA0-2
CN3802
STREAM0-7 | PKPULSEP2M 2 AT0CS1 33,
| | | VIOD0-7 AF23,AD23, W1EN+, W1EN- LD AT0CS0B 3
8 8 4 AT0DMARQ W12 AT1CS0 CS0# 36
15 2 18 AC24,AC22 VIOD7 WRPULSEP, AH4, AH3 31, 32 DRIVER AT0CS1B IDE HDD
WRPULSEM 2 3 AT0DIOW W11 AT1CS1 CS1#
OSCEN+, OSCEN- 20 AT0DIOR T15 AT0DMARQ AT1DMARQ DMRQ 37
HFONP,HFONM AH5, AJ5 33, 34 AT0DIOWB
2 18 AT0RESET P14 AT1DIOW DIOW# 38
VCLKI 1 IC4702 (2/7) PB4 AE6
LDDEN
35 16 6 R12 AT0DIORB AT1DIOR DIOR# 21
4 W3SET 40 AT0IORDY V13 AT0RESETB AT1RESET RESET# 23
17 AB20 VIOCLK PLED AE11 36
2 AT0DMACK 6 25
W2SET
P2LD AF11 37 14 AT0INTRQ T13 AT0IORDY AT1IORDY IORDY 1
W1SET 12 V15 AT0DMACKB AT1DMACK DMACK#
WLD AE9 38 3
10 V12 AT0INTRQ AT1INTRQ INTRQ 27
IC4703 (2/7) APCV RSET
RLD AF8 39 3 29
FMO+, FMO- LASER 31
FPDVI, PDIN AGP, AG8 17, 18 FRONT B3, A3, DBA0, DBA1,
DVD/CD 2 PDIAG#
ADATA 20 MONITOR C1, B1, DCLKO, DCLKNO,
5 5 6 AB22 AIOBD PA3 AG6 DASPn 34 34
TO/FROM HFGAIN C2, B2, DWEB, DCASB, DASP#
ABCKI 21
VDC-001 BOARD 4 9 8 AA20 AIOBCK PB3 AG1 A2, C3, DRASB, DCS0B, PDIAGn 46 39
(CN104) ALRCKI OSCNT 17 D5, DCKE,
6 2 3 AE20 AIOLRCK PB5 AF6 24
DDQM0, DDQM2,
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
RFP, RFN AH12, AJ12
RF+, RF-
2
9, 7 DBA0, DBA1 IC1201,1221 (4/7) F3, J1,
F2, J2, DDQS0, DDQS2, AT1D00
M4,R1,R4,R2, 62,64,2,5
DD0
TXP 32 2
TXI DCLKO, DCLKNO
23
RXI
AF21 TXD0B AJ11,AJ10,
A, B, C, D
14, 11,
M3,M4,M1,M2
PHOTO DWE 512Mbit X 2 DDR SDRAM A5, B9, DDQM1, DDQM3,
DDQS1, DDQS3
| N5,R3,P4,T1,
T2,P5,T3,R5,
AT1DATA0-15
7,11,13,15
14,12,10,6 | TXN 31 3 HDD
A1,B1,C1,D1 4 12, 13
C6, C9 AT1D015 DD5
AJ9,AJ8 DCAS
22
SDA_VDEC
AF22 RXD0B
S1, S2, S3, S4
DETECTOR
DRAS
U1,N4,U2,W1 3,1,63,61 RXN 28 5 UNIT
26 L19 SDA0 AH9,AH8, 3, 4, (IC1201) AT1DA0 U3 50 RXP 27 6
SCL_VDEC G1,H1,F1,E1 DCS0B F5,F4,G5,G4,J4,J5,H4,H5, DQ00 AT1ADR0-2 DA0
25 AH10,AH11 4 5, 2 DCKE 2,4,5,7,8,10, | W2 51 |
AT/XDT
M19 SCL0
AG4
SW1 DDM0, DDM2
26, 27
45, 46
BA0, BA1
CK, /CK
DQ0
|
11,13,54,56, DDATA0-7,16-23 A8,B8,C8,A7,B6,A6,C7,B7, |
G1,G2,G3,F1,H3,H2,H1,J3, DQ31
AT1DA2 T5 3 AT1CS0 3 49 DA2 IC5602 CN5604
28 T19 GPIO6 PB0 1 (IC1201) 57,59,60,62, DDATA8-15,24-31
SPDIF_LL SW2 DDQS0, DDQS2 21 /WE DQ15 D9,E9,D8,E8,D7,E7,D6,E6 AT1CS1 SATA BRIDGE
2 SDA1 PB1 AE7 15 DDM1, DDM3 22 63,65 (IC1221) AT1CS0B T4 AT1DMARQ 48 CS0n
C18 /CAS X5502
XRESET TEMP
20 D17 SCL1 RFP3 AJ23
LCDS
40
SEN
(IC1221) DDQS1, DDQS3 23
24
/RAS
CS
AT1CS1B
AT1DMARQ
V3
V5
AT1DIOW
AT1DIOR
47
60
CS1n
DMARQ
(5/7) 25MHz
PA2 AH7 44 44 CKE AT1DIOWB U5 AT1RESET 59 DIOWn
CN2301 Q3301, 3302 SI SDIO 29-32, B4,A4,C5,B5, DADD00 XTALI 22
20, 47 LDM, HDM A0 AT1DIORB V1 58 DIORn
45 35-40, DADRS0-12 E1,E2,D1,D2, | 6 6
29 Y EQ E24 SCLK SCLK 16, 51 LDQS, UDQS | AT1RESETB V4 AT1IORDY 16 RESETn
46 A12 28,41,42 D3,E4,C4,D4,E5 DADD12 AT1DMACK XTALO 23
Q3303, 3304 VPPD VREFPD U4 AT1INTRQ 55 IORDY
VREFIO AF10 10 AT1IORDY
C/R_IN XRESET RESET AT1DMACKB V2 54 DMACKn XRESET
27 ACI D101 3 3 PORn 17
C/R EQ G24 42 AT1INTRQ M5 53 INTRQ
Q3305, 3306 PA1 AJ6 VA5V
G_IN V+5L 6, 16 AA2 LDQM TXD2_BRIDGE
25 ABI VD3V TXD2B AJ24 43 UAI
G EQ
CS, DS Q3307, 3308
D23 V+3A
T+
41
TR
AB2
AD5
UDQM
MBA RXD2B AH23
RXD2_BRIDGE
45 UAO
B_IN TRACKING ACO1+ 54 48 TRACKING AF2 WEB L5201
23 B EQ F23 ARI TDRV AH20 4 ACTIN1 T- TD 8 USB_DN0 USBDM2
COIL DRIVE AE2 CASB 10
ACO1- 53
F+
47
FR
COIL
IC201 (4/7) AF4 RASB
USB_DN0 M1
USB_DP0 USBDP2 8
Q2501 FOCUS ACO2+ 52 50 FOCUS AB4 MCLKOUT USB_DP0 M2
AH21 5 ACTIN2 F- FD 64Mbit SDRAM USB_D_CONEECT
39
YP_OUT
BUFFER A20 VAB
FDRV COIL DRIVE
ACO2- 51 49 COIL
LDQM
AC4 MCKE USB_D_CONEECT P3
USB_D_DN0
IC5203 (6/7) L5202
USBDM1
TO/FROM
FL-178 BOARD
USB_D_DN0 P1 3
CN101 UDQM (CN102)
USB_D_DP0 USBDP1
Y_OUT Q2501 IC501 MBA
2,4,5,7,8,10, Y3,AA4,AB1,AA5, MD0
USB_D_DP0 P2 1 (SEE PAGE 3-7)
33 BUFFER A20 VAY WEZ 15 LDQM DQ0 AB3,AA3,W4,Y4,
11,13,42,44, |
Q2502 REF16 AF9 42 VC (7/7) SPINDLE
MOTOR
CASZ
RASZ
39 UDQM | 45,47,48,50,
MD0-15 W5,W3,Y5,Y2, MD15 USB_D_VBUS N3
USB_D_VBUS 4
1
USBVFB 5
C_OUT U 20 BA0 DQ15 AC2,AB5,AA1,Y1 2
31 BUFFER B21 VAC 51,53 X5201 V+5USB
U 11 4 MCLK 16 /WE 6
V MCKE USB_CLKI
TO/FROM
15
LCHIN
2 AINL SDTO 9
AIBD0
AIBD0
V 13 3
W M 17
18
/CAS
/RAS
4 USB_CLKI N1
48MHz
XTAL OSC IC5202 (6/7) CN5201
AV-114/118 BOARD
(CN1101(1/2)) 17
RCHIN
1 AINR
IC3101 LRCK 10
AILRCK0
E20
AILRCK0 MDRV
W 16 2
VCC
38
37
CLK
CKE
A0 23-26, AE3,AD3,AF3,AE5, MA0
USB_H_PPON0
5V SW
F19 AJ22 26 SPIN V+5M 12 10 V+3D | 29-34, MA0-11 AE4,AD2,AD1,AC5, | USB_H_PPON0 N2 5V
(SEE PAGE 3-4) AUDIO ADC ADCCLKO XDMUTE1 HU+ EV+5.8V 4 5 5
MCLK 11 AIOMCK0 RFP1 PW A11 22,35 AD4,AC1,AC3 MA11 USB_H_OCI0 REG 4
C20 AG21 34 CTL1 HU+ 20 11 MD2
(3/7) SCLK 12
AIBCK0
E19 AIBCK0 RFP2 AH22
XDMUTE2
35 CTL2 SPINDLE HU- 21 10
HU-
1
3
D5(AG) MD5
USB_H_OCI0 M3
FLG 3
ADPOW MOTOR D1(SL) MD1
HV+ 4 1
PON 13 GPIO37 D0(MA)
U19 FG AG20 43 FG DRIVE HV+ 22 9
HV- H CN201
5
4
MD0 IC5204 (6/7)
HV- 23 8 TX_FE REMO
FOR CHECK 8 AF7 PB7
HW+
IC3203 (3/7) IC3201 (3/7) HW+ 24 7
HW- 9
RX_FE REMI
AG5 PB6
AUDIO LPF AUDIO DAC HW- 25 6 XRESET
5 HB 7 V24 FCSB0
2 AOD0 HB 19 A9(ATA)
L_OUT _ 7 VOUTL DATA 2 E18 AOD0 2 3 W22 FOEB
21 AOBCK CN501 AA24 FWEB PHY_D0 E13,D13,E12, 8,9,11, D0 TPAP
1
+ 3
BCKIN 1
AOLRCK
C19 AOBCK IC1102 (4/7) | D12,E11,D11, PHY_D0-7 12,14,15, | TPA0p 39
TPAN
1
TO/FROM
6 ST1+ PHY_D7 E10,D10 17,18 D7 2 FL-178 BOARD
R_OUT _ 8 VOUTR LRCKIN 3 D20 AOLRCK SLO1+ 40 1 TPA0n 38
19 DACCLKO SL1 64Mbit FLASH ROM PHYCTL0 TPBP (CN101)
+ 5 SLED ST1- TPB0p 37 5
7 MCLK 16 E21 AIOMCK1 SDRV1 AJ21 29 SL1IN SLO1- 39 2 CTL0 E14 5 CTL0

18
AMUTE1
11 ZEROR
MD 13
SMDOUT
SMCKOUT
L4 SMDOUT SDRV2 AJ20
SL2
30 SL2IN
MOTOR
DRIVE SLO2+ 38
ST2+
ST2-
4 M SLED
MOTOR HCS0 CTL1 D14
PHYCTL1
PHYSCLK
6 CTL1 IC5103 TPB0n 36
TPBN
6
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
HDOE 29,31,33,35, W21,Y21,AA21,U23, RDATA00 SCLK D15 2 SCLK
MC 14 K5 SMCKOUT SLO2- 37 3 26 CE DV PHY CN5101
NSCS HWS0 DQ0 38,40,42,44, V22,T24,U24,N23,R23, | PHYLREQ
CN502 28 OE HDATA0-15 LREQ E15 63 LREQ X0 22
ML 15 L3 GPIO62 | 30,32,34,36, M22,T22,T21,P21,N22, RDATA015
11 WE PHYLPS
D3201
AMUTE LD
LOADING
LDO+
LDO+ RED DQ15 39,41,43,45 N20,R21 LPS D16
PHYLINKON
59 LPS (6/7) X5101
2 1 24.576MHz

10
DAM_TO_T SMDOUT
F17 GPIO54 DAOUT AJ19 46 LDIN MOTOR
DRIVE LDO- 1
LDO-
2
BLACK M LOADING
MOTOR
Y20,Y24,AA22,W23,
LINKON
GPIO52
E16
F20
PHY_XRST
58
55
LKON
RESETB
X1 23

HSM_TO_T HSMTOT A0 25-18, V23,Y23,V21,AA23, RADD01

9 P19 GPIO04 CLOSE LPS1
DAT_TO_M 1 7 SMDIN PA7 AH6 4 CLOSE XRESET | 8-1,48,17, HADRS1-22 Y22,P22,U22,P23,U21, |
8 L5 SMDIN OPEN LPS2 12 RESET A21 16,9,10,13 U20,AB24,R24,M21, RADD22
ASCK SMCKOUT PA6 AJ7 5 OPEN
7 N21,T23,R22,W20,P24 XRESET
HST_TO_M 3 5 HSTTOM CN601
6 N19 GPIO03 4
SO HADRS13 HADRS5-7,13
X525P X525P SFSO AD8 5 SI L5001
TO/FROM
40 AB19 GPIO41 SI
SO
IC200
AV-114/118 BOARD
(CN1101(2/2)) 5
DSDA TU_DSDA IC3701 (3/7) X101
SFSI AD10
AD9
SCLK
2
SCK
EEPROM JTSEL HADRS5
16.9344MHz
SFSCK 6 DINTEN HADRS6
DSCL CSOZ
(SEE PAGE 3-4) 3
DDC_SW1
TU_DSCL
AE1 XA1 SFCS0B AD11 1 CE (4/7) 3
9
EJSNGEN HADRS7
IC5801
L5002
DDC_SW1
2 13 3
HDP TU_HPD TXD TDI JTDI
1 TXD1B AG23 1 12 F21 JTDI
AF1 XA2 RXD
CEC TU_CEC 2 6 TCK JTCL
4 RXD1B AG22 JTCL L5003
X1001
24.576MHz Q1811 V+5D
2
5
CN1402
FOR CHECK
6
TDO JTDO
J19
JTDO
(6/7)
P_CONT2 CN1401 10 G19
XRESET
13 M24 CLK24IN FSCO K23 FSC BPF IC3701 7 FOR CHECK
8
TMS JTMS
G20 JTMS
JA5801
TRST JTMRST L5004
JTRST
12
MRST
IC3702 (3/7) L24 CLK24OUT FSCI J24
(3/7) D3712 14
DINT EDINT
H20
EDINT
2 H19 Q5809
1 Q1801 RST D3711
XRST1 XRESET 4 Q102
11 4 SW
2 L21 RSTSWB HLCO K20 HCL BPF 1 V+3D SW AJ2 OFPULSE Q5802,5804
EXCEPT RDR-GX350 X1002
27MHz V+5VHD
+5V
L1 CLK27AIN
HLCI H21 Q5810
Q5701 AJ14 FCEFM1
JA5701 IC5701 5 LEVEL
IC5802 (6/7)
BUFFER 1 K2 CLK27AOUT
DIGITAL SPDIF SELECT SHIFT
SPDIFO
OUT 13 D19 ATX
(3/7)
5
SPDIFSEL
V19 GPIO36
Q5801,5805
TU_DSDA
TU_DSCL DET
DDC_SW1 V+3HD
RDR-GX350 TU_HPD Q5808
IC3707 V+1R5_IN
TU_CEC
1 2
RESET

(3/7)

Note: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.

3-5 3-6
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

3-4. FR-274, FL-178, VDC-001 BLOCK DIAGRAM

FR-274 BOARD
EXCEPT RDR-GX350
Q206

LED2 2 LED DRIVE D214 DVD

Q205

LED3 3 LED DRIVE D212 HDD

IC201
FL DRIVER SEG1
|
SG1 14 SEG16
| |
SG16 29 16

FLDATA
GRD1 AS,BS Tape only
12 |
7 DIN GR1 42
FLCLK GRD12
11 8 CLK | |
10
FLSTB
9 STB
GR12

VEE
31

30
12
VDC-001 BOARD
ND201
T201 FLUORESCENT
Q203,204 DC/AC CONVERTER DISPLAY
Q105,109
TRASFORMER B_IN ROY2 97-94, 8
V+12RIE
D208-211 19 LPF 164 ABI | 91,90, STREAM_0-7 |
ROY9 87,86 15
2 10 Q104,108
G_IN
FLPON FROM 21 160 AGI
17 LPF
1 AV-114 BOARD
3
F2 (CN302) VCLK
7 Q102,106 ROCK 101 17
Q201,202 (SEE PAGE 3-4) C/R_IN
23 172 ARI TO/FROM
LPF
DC/AC 4 RD-065 BOARD
CONVERTER (CN4701)
8 Q103,107
5 Y_IN (SEE PAGE 3-5)
17 148 AVI
LPF
F1
TO/FROM 9 CN106
AV-114/118 BOARD 6 XRESET
RSTB 74 20
(CN105) 158 ASCI SDA_VDEC
SDA 72 26
(SEE PAGE 3-4) SCL_VDEC
SCL 71 25

CN104

54 XO

FL-178 BOARD X101

24.576MHz
55 XI
IC104
VIDEO
DECODER
KEY1 KEY1 S101 POWER
3 4 2

KEY2 KEY2
2 5 1 S102 ONE TOCH DUB

KEY3 2,3,5,6,8,9, 51,49,46,42,

1 DQ0 11,12,39,40, 40,36,34,30, SDRDQ0
| SDRDQ0-15 |
42,43,45,46, 31,35,37,41,
DQ15 43,47,50,52 SDRDQ15
48,49

16
IR
3 3
IR IC101
CN203 CN201 CN106 REMOTE CONTROL IC105 A0 21-24, 19,18, SDRA0
RECEIVER | 27-32, SDRA0-10 15-12, |
S201,213,212 SDRAM A9 19 10-6,4 SDRA10
OPEN/CLOSE, RDR-HX750 / HX950
HDD, 1
DVD
USBDM2 2 CN104 A10/AP 20 4 SDRABP
7 XWE SDRWE
3 15 29
S203,204,207 USBDP2 USB XCAS SDRCAS
9 16 28
4 ATYPE XRAS SDRRAS
USBDM1 17 22
REC STOP, TO/FROM 3 XCS SDRCS
18 7 20
INPUT SELECT, RD-065 BOARD USBDP1 CLK SDRCLK
1 35 25
REC (CN5201) CKE
USBVFB 34 21 SDRCKE
(SEE PAGE 3-6) 6
5 V+5USB
S208-211
CN102 CN105
CH+, CH-,
PLAY, 2 1
USB
STOP BTYPE
3 4

FL102
TPAP TPA+ 4
2
TO/FROM TPAN TPA- 3 CN103
1
RD-065 BOARD FL101 2
(CN5101) TPBP TPB+ DV
5
1 IN
(SEE PAGE 3-6) TPBN TPB-
6

CN101

J201

3 2Y
S VIDEO 4
4 2C
1

5 SDET2 2
LINE2 IN TO/FROM
2V AV-114/118 BOARD
7 (CN106)
VIDEO 6
(SEE PAGE 3-3)

AUDIO L 9 2L
(MONO) 8

11 2R
AUDIO R 10

CN202

3-7 3-8
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

SWITCHING REGULATOR T101

SWITCHING
(SRV-2058EK) TRANSFORMER
D401 P401
EV+12V
SW+1.5V(T)
EV+12V(T)
11,12
SPINDLE
MOTOR
DVD
OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK
9
FU101 D101-104 P201 EV+5.8V(T)
T3.15A/250V Q401,402 6,7 VA5V VD3V
L SW+12V SW+3.3V(T)
2,4 12 6,16 41
AC IN D402 P_ON/OFF
N 1 CN501 CN101
L101,102
CN202 IC1301 (2/7)
CN101 LPF
D109
D201 L201
EV+5.8V
IC501 8
VREF_V
3
Q201
SW+5V
SW+12V(H)
SW+5V(H)
1
HDD RD-065 BOARD (7/7) +
2 _
1 VREF_V

5V REG 4 UNIT TRACKING COIL DRIVE IC3703

CN203 FOCUS COIL DRIVE (2/7)
8 5
Q101 SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE
(3/7)
SWITCHING SLED MOTOR DRIVE
LOADING MOTOR DRIVE RESET IC1302
IC101 VREF_D

SWITCHING
3
IC202 EXCEPT RDR-GX350 3
+
8
1 VREF_D
P204 2
REGULATOR SHUNT REG EV+5.8V(M) EV+5.8V EV+5.8V _
1 1
Q501 SW+1.5V(M) SW+1.53V V+1R5_IN
D501 L501 P501 3,4 3,4
2 6 SW+3.3V SW+3.3V(M) SW+3.33V V+3D CN103
D105 3.3V REG 6,7 6,7 14
FOR CHECK
4 P402 SW+12V V+12V V+12V
9 9 IC4502
SW+5V(W) V+5M V+5M
D502 11 11 1 CN1401
SW+12V(W) V12M V12M FOR CHECK
13 13
CN4501 IC4501 V+2R5
IC501 CN201

SHUNT REG IC4511 (1/7) VREF_V

3V REG V+1R5_IN VREF_D

Q601
D601 L601 SW+1.5V EV5.8V V+3V V+3V
4 VIN VOUT 5
1.5V REG IC1001
ON/OFF V+3D
1 AV ENC/DEC
IC1201
D603 V+2R5
PC101
VR601
P_CONT2 IC1221
PHOTO VR201
1.5V ADJ V+1R0
(2/7, 4/7 to 7/7)
COUPLER
5.8V ADJ
D604
IC601 IC4521 (1/7) V+3A
USB_H_PPON0
(4/7)
2.5V REG N2 512Mbit X 2
SHUNT REG USB_H_OCI0 DDR SDRAM
V+2R5 M3
V+3D
IC201 4 VIN VOUT 5
ON/OFF R223
SHUNT REG V+3D CN201
1 10
FOR CHECK
P_CONT2

IC4531 (1/7) IC201 IC200 IC1102

1V REG
V+1R5_IN V+1R0
(4/7) (4/7) (4/7)
8 VIN VOUT 1 64Mbit SDRAM EEPROM 64Mbit FLASH ROM
FOR CHECK
AS,BS Tape only CONT
V+3D
1 5
CN103

VDC-001 BOARD AV-114/118 BOARD CN101

28 13
P_CONT2

CN2301
P_CONT2

IC4541 (1/7)
CN105 CN302 CN301 3V REG
IC4701-4703 IC3701 IC3702
SW+1.5V CN106 (AV-114) (AV-118) D103
EV+12V
11,12
EV+12.1V EV+12.1V V+12R1
V+5V
EV5.8V
7 VIN VO 1
V+3A (2/7) (3/7) (3/7)
9 9 16 2
EV+5.8V EV+5.8V V+5R8E D104 BUFFER BUFFER AND GATE
CONT
SW+3.3V
6,7 5,7 20,18 4
V+12R1E C118
(1/5) 5
2,4
P-CONT P-CONT P-CONT BACK-UP P_CONT P_CONT2
1 4 21 1 62 IC101 RDR-HX750 / HX950
P-CONT2 P-CONT2 P_CONT2 IC3201 IC3202 IC3101
FAN
12 13
FANCTL
57 IT CONTROLLER IC4552 (1/7)
1
EV+12V CN201
(AV-118)
RFTHRU
54
CN104
5V REG (3/7) (3/7) (3/7)
FAN- 52 EV5.8V V+5L AUDIO DAC AUDIO LPF AUDIO ADC
FAN- FAN- Q201 FANCTL TUON 4 VIN VOUT 5
2 2 2 USB
23 FAN DRIVE 60
SWVION9V ATYPE ON/OFF V+3D
CN103 Q301,302
(3/5) SWVION5V
61
1 L4551 V+5AO
IC105 V+5BB TU_DCCON
64 1
P_CONT2
V+3.3D
IC403 74 V+5A IN
SDRAM
RFTHRU RCSEL
FLPON
63 FL-178 IC4561 (1/7)
5V REG
V+5D
V+12VA
5
CN1402
FOR CHECK
Q305,306
IC101
3.3V REG
V+3.3D
R307

R308
V+5VD
(3/5) BOARD EV5.8V
1 VIN VOUT 5
V+5HD
18 JA5801

SWVION5V V+5VI (1/5) CONT

7 VIN VO 1
V+3.3A
IC104 Q303,304
IC401 3

CONT V+5TU VIDEO/AUDIO IC102 IC5801

5
VIDEO
SELECTOR POWER FAIL DET
IC101 V+3D

P_CONT2
DECODER
TUON REMOTE
V+5USB
IC4562 (1/7) (6/7)
V+5F COMMANDER 3V REG
RECEIVER 5
IC102 Q307,308 V+9V EV5.8V V+3HD IC5802
1.5V REG 9V REG U601 (1/5) CN102 1 VIN VOUT 5

V+1.5V
CONT (6/7)
7 VIN VO 1
SWVION9V TUNER IC103 CN106 3
CONT IC317 Q309-311 V+32V IC101 VDD DET
5 IC5701
5 DC/DC CONV.
P_CONT2 TU_DDCON
1 IC4571 (1/7) EXCEPT L5601 V+3DS (3/7)
IC103 (5/5) (1/5)
CN201
FR-274 BOARD V+3D
1.8V REG
V+1R8
RDR-GX350 EMI
IC5602 SPDIF SELECT

5 VIN VOUT 1
(5/7) EXCEPT RDR-GX350
5V REG 14 IC601 IC104 ON/OFF
5V SATA BRIDGE
1 VIN VOUT 5 Q102-1109 EURO MSP 4
DDC SW
CONT
LPF
V+5F IC201 VEE IC5203
3 4 14 L5101
FL DRIVE Q4581 V+3V_A
P_CONT2
(3/5) V+12V RIPPLE V+12VA
IC5103 (6/7)
(4/5) D208-211
FILTER L5122 V+3V_D (6/7) AND GATE
IC402 RECT EMI
DV PHY
BUFFER IC406 IC5204 (6/7) IC5202 (6/7)
AVLTH SW 5V REG 5V SW
Q203,204 V+5USB
Q201,202 EV5.8V 5V
V+12RIE T201 4 VIN VOUT 5 4 5 6
3 15 F1,F2
DC/AC USB_H_OCI0 CN5201
IC150 NC FLG 3
CONVERTER
FLPON 3
1 17 1
V+3D
CN105 CN203 USB_H_PPON0
ND201 RDR-HX750 / HX950
FLUORESCENT
DISPLAY

Note: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.

3-9 3-10
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

MEMO

3-12E
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
SECTION 4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM NOTE: When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE 5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL Revised-2”. (See page 12)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

EXCEPT RDR-GX350

A
CN201 13P 4P

EV+5.8V(M ) 1 5V
4
GND
GND 2 3

SW+1.5V(M ) 3 PH-080 2
GND

12V
SW+1.5V(M ) 4
HARNESS 1

GND D 5 DVD-UNIT
SW+3.3V(M ) 6

SW+3.3V(M ) 7

GND

SW+12V
8

9 1
7P

GND
HDD UNIT
CN101 50P 50P
GND(J) 10 2 HT+
FR 50 50 FR
SW+5V(W ) 11 3 HT-
FD 49 49 FD
GND(W) 12 4 GND
TR 48 48 TR
SW+12V(W) 13 5 HA-
TD 47 47 TD
6 HA+
SCLK 46 46 SCLK
7 GND
SDIO 45 45 SDI O

B CN202 12P
COMPONENT
SEN

VPP
44

43
44

43
SEN

VPP
LINE 2 OUT G-LINK
POWER P_ON/OF F

SW+3.3V(T )
1

2
VIDEO OUT RESET

VD3V
42

41
42

41
RESET

VD3V

BLOCK
GND

SW+3.3V(T )
3

4
RH-059 TEM P 40 40 TEM P

HARNESS RSET 39 39 RSET

TUNER
GND 5
SWITCHING W1SET 38 38 W1SET

( REGULATOR ) EV+5.8V(T )

EV+5.8V(T )

GND
6

8
W2SET

W3SET
37

36
37

36
W2SET

W3SET

7
LDDEN 35 35 LDDEN
EV+12V 9

GN D

TX N

GN D

RX N

GN D
RXP
TXP
OSCEN- 34 34 OSCEN-
GND 10
OSCEN+ 33 33 OSCEN+
SW+1.5V(T ) 11
CN2301 40P C N101 40P
W1EN- 32 32 W1EN-
SW+1.5V(T ) 12 X 525P 40 40 HPD
W1EN+ 31 31 W1EN+
YP_OUT 39 39 DDC_SW 1
W3EN- 30 30 W3EN-
CN5604 7P GND

CR_OUT
38

37
FRA-006 38

37
DSCL

CEC
W3EN+ 29 29 W3EN+

FLEXIBLE W2EN- 28 28 W2EN-

GND 36 36 DSD A
FLAT CABLE W2EN+ 27 27 W2EN+
CB_OUT 35 35 HST_TO_M

C GND

Y_OUT
34

33
34

33
ASCK

DAT_TO_M
VO5V

VO5V
26

25
26

25
VO5V

VO5V

OSCNT 24 24 OSCNT
GND 32 32 HSM_TO_T
GNDO 23 23 GNDO
CN4501 13P C_OUT 31 31 DAM_TO_T
GNDO 22 22 GNDO
1 EV+5.8 V GND 30 30 XRST1
HFGAIN 21 21 HFGAIN
2 GND D Y_I N 29 29 MRST
DVD/CD 20 20 DVD/CD
3 SW+1.53V GND 28 28 P_CONT2
GNDA 19 19 GNDA
CN203 4P 4 SW+1.53V C/R_IN 27 27 GN D
FMO- 18 18 FMO-
SW+5V(H)
4 5 GND D GND 26 26 L_IN
FMO+ 17 17 FMO+
GND
3 6 SW+3.33V G_I N 25 25 GN D
VA5V 16 16 VA5V

RD-065 BOARD
GND
2 7 SW+3.33V GND 24 24 R_IN
SW2 15 15 SW2
SW+12.1V(H) 1 8 GND D B_IN 23 23 AMUTE1
M3 14 14 M3
9 V +12V GND 22 22 R_OUT
M2 13 13 M2
10 GND L_OUT 21 21 GNDA
M1 12 12 M1
11 V+5M GNDA 20 20 L_OUT
M4 11 11 M4
12 GND M R_OUT 19 19 GN D

13 V12M AMUTE 18 18 B_IN

AV-114 BOARD/ VREFPD 10 10 VREFPD

PR-076 R_IN 17 17 GN D
RF+ 9 9 RF+

D HARNESS GND

L_IN
16

15
16

15
G_I N

GN D
AV-118 BOARD GNDA

RF-
8

7
8

7
GNDA

RF-

VA5V 6 6 VA5V
CN5201 10P GND 14 14 C/R_I N
S3 5 5 S3
10 USBDM2 P_CONT2 13 13 GN D
S2 4 4 S2
9 GND MRST 12 12 Y_I N
S1 3 3 S1
8 USBDP2 XRST1 11 11 GN D
S4 2 2 S4
EXCEPT 7 GND DAM_TO_T 10 10 C_OUT
SW1 1 1 SW1
RDR-GX350 6 V+5USB HSM_TO_T 9 9 GN D

5 USBVFB DAT_TO_M 8 8 Y_OUT

4 GND ASCK 7 7 GN D

3 USBDM1 HST_TO_M 6 6 CB_OUT

2 GND DSDA 5 5 GN D
(AS BS) CN502 4P 4P
1 USBDP1 CEC 4 4 CR_OUT
ST2+ 4 4 ST2+
CN5101 6P CN4701 28P DSCL 3 3 GN D
ST2- 3 3 ST2-
DDC_SW 1 2 2 YP_OUT
ST1- 2 2 ST1-
HD P 1 1 X525P
ST1+ 1 1 ST1+
GND(RFE/XLL)
A_GN D

A_GN D
TPB P
TPB N

TPAP
TPAN

STREAM_7

STREAM_6

STREAM_5

STREAM_4

STREAM_3

STREAM_2

STREAM_1

STREAM_0
SDA_VDEC

SCL_VDEC
AT/XD T

XRESET

ALRCKI

ADATA

SPDIF
VCLKI

ABCKI
GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D
RX 1
TX 1
GND

GND

GND

GND

E
28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10
6

CN601 5P 5P
FVR-001 LPS2 5 5 LPS2
FLEXIBLE GNDD 4 4 GNDD
FLAT CABLE LPS1 3 3 LPS1

BLACK 2 2 BLACK

RED 1 1 RED
28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

1
GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D
STREAM_ 7

STREAM_ 6

STREAM_ 5

STREAM_ 4

STREAM_ 3

STREAM_ 2

STREAM_ 1

STREAM_ 0

GND
SCL_VDE C
NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC
VCLK
XRESET
SDA_VDEC

CN106 24P C N302 24P CN501 12P 12P

GND 24 1 GN D
VCC 12 12 VCC
C/R_I N 23 2 C/R_I N

CN202 12P CN104 28P GND 22 FVA-002 3 GN D

HU+

HU -
11

10
11

10
HU+

HU -
1 P_CONT G_I N 21 FLEXIBLE 4 G_I N
HV+ 9 9 HV+
2 SW+3.3V GND 20 FLAT CABLE 5 GN D
HV - 8 8 HV -
3 GN D B_IN 19 6 B_IN
HW + 7 7 HW +

F 4

5
SW+3.3V

GN D
GND

Y_I N
18

17
7

8
GN D

Y_I N
HW -

HB
6

5
6

5
HW -

HB
6 V+5.8E GND 16 9 GN D
U 4 4 U
7 V+5.8E NC 15 10 DT_TUO N
V 3 3 V
8 GN D NC 14 11 ANT5V_SW

PV-145 10
9 EV+12.1V

GN D
VDC-001 BOARD P-CONT2
NC 13

12
12

13
DET_ANT

P_CONT2
GNDD
W 2

1
2

1
W

GNDD

HARNESS
11 SW+1.5V NC 11 14 V +32V

12 SW+1.5V GND 10 15 GN D
CN103
EV+12V 9 16 EV+12.1V
AV-118 BOARD
DV IN GND 8 17 GN D
CN201 2P
EV+5.8V 7 18 EV+5.8V
FAN+ 1
GND 6 19 GN D
FAN– 2
EV+5.8V 5 20 EV+5.8V
CN301 5P CN106 11P CN105 17P
P-CONT 4 21 P_CONT
CN105 3 22 GN D
GND
CN03 2P

PICT BRIGE FAN- 2 23 FAN-

EV+12.1V

EV+5.8V
P_CONT

FAN

LED_HDD2
LED_D_TV
LED_PLTV
USB B TYPE

LED_A_TV
LED_DIVX
1 24 GN D

V+12R1E
GND

FLPO N
FLDATA
SDET2

FLSTB
GND

FLCLK

V +5F
GND

RDR-HX750/HX950

KEY3

KEY2

KEY1
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
FAN+

FAN–

G
2R
2C

2V

2V

2L

IR
ONLY
10

11

17
16

15

14

13

12

11

10
1

1
2

CN04 FAR-006 FAR-007

RU-001 HARNESS RV-003 HARNESS FAN
FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE
FLAT CABLE
USB A TYPE PAE-002 HARNESS FLAT CABLE

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17
10

11

9
1

9
10

GN D

GN D

GN D
USBDM 2

SDET 2

GND

2R

GND
USBVF B

2C

2Y

2V

2L

IR
USBDP1

USBDP2
USBDM1

V +5F
FLST B
TPBP

PLT V
V+5USB

FLPO N
TPAP

DITV

V+12RIE
GND

GND

GND

GND
TPBN

HDD2
D_TV
TPAN

KEY3

KEY2

KEY1

A_TV

FLCLK
CN106 5P

FLDATA
CN201 5P
GND

GND

GND

GND

KEY2 1 5 KEY2

KEY1 2
FLR-010 4 KEY1 J201
IR 3 3 IR
FLEXIBLE LINE 2 IN
GND 4 2 GND
CN102 10P CN101 6P FLAT CABLE CN202 11P CN203 17P

FL-178 BOARD
V +5F 5 1 V +5F
FR-274 BOARD

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

4-1 4-2
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS WAVEFORMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AV-114/118 BOARD VDC-001 BOARD
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards) 1 X101 7 JA402 COMPONENT PR 1 X101 (TP1125)
• : Uses unleaded solder. • Chip parts.
• : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. Transistor Diode
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) C 6 5 4 4 5 6 5 4 4 5 3 3 3 1 23
• Through hole is omitted.
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram
isn’t mounted in this model. B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 6 54
• C : panel designation 1 2 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 3 4
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF. 66.6 ns
5.1 Vp-p
H 1.0 Vp-p
40.7 ns
3.2 Vp-p
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and 5 4 3 3 4 5 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
tantalums. 6 4 3
5 4
• All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1 /10 W) un-less 2 X102 8 JA402 COMPONENT Y
otherwise specified.
kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ. 1 3 1 1 2
3
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, be-
cause it is damaged by the heat.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, 1.6 Vp-p
H
unless otherwise noted.
30.5 µs 5.1 Vp-p
• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 5 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• f : internal component 3 JA401 S-VIDEO C 9 JA501 ql
• C : adjustment for repair
• G : IN/OUT direction of (+/–) B line
• U : B+ Line
• V : B– Line
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
• Voltages are dc between measurement point and ground.
1.4 Vp-p
• Readings are taken with a color-bar signals on DVD reference H
2.0 Vp-p
disc. H
• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MΩ).
• Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production toler-
ances.
• Abbreviation 4 JA401 S-VIDEO Y 0 X601
AUS : Australian model
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.

When indicating parts by reference number, please include 1.6 Vp-p

the board name. H
4.0Vp-p
54.3ns
Note : When replacing parts, refer to “SERVICE NOTE
5. CHANGED POINTS OF SERVICE MANUAL
Revised-2”. (See page 12) 5 JA402 VIDEO

2.0 Vp-p
H

6 JA402 COMPONENT PB

1.1 Vp-p
H

WAVEFORMS
AV-114/118 VDC-001 4-3 4-4
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Q103 Q104
UMD2N-TR UMD2N-TR
D106 SA MUTE CONTROL SA MUTE CONTROL
1SS355TE-17
AV-114/118 BOARD(1/5) B+ JL20 8 JL213

A IT CONTROLLER, IR
R147
JL216 1k JL21 7 Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
B+
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- 5.4 4 1
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
R169 2.4 0
10k
Q108 JL209
5
0
3 6
4.9 Replace only with part number specified.
DTC124EUA-T106 5
2 2
BLANK 5.3 0
C135
3 6
5.0 0.1 0 0
C 127 4 1
D108 100 2.5 0.7
MC2846-TP-1 16V
JL21 0
JL27 4 Q105
2SD2114KT146

BLANK
0 0 MUTE CONTROL

SAMUTE

AMUTE1
RESE T
RXD1

TU_DCCON

HOTPLUG

MSPSTAT
TXD1

CSYNCIN
AVLIN

CEC0

P_CONT2

RFTHRU
HST_TO_M
B+

TUON
FLPON

P_CONT

FANCTL
SWVION5V

SWVION9V

EPGEQ
+5V

B L2_RIN
L2_LIN
L2_RIN
L2_LIN
2VIN B+
2VIN CN105 17P
Y2IN Y2IN
C2IN B+ KEY3 JL22 2
C2IN 17 KEY3
R_IN
R_IN KEY2 JL22 3
L_IN L_IN
R_OUT 16 KEY2

R174 100k
R_OUT KEY1 JL22 4

0.1

0.1
R172 100

R171 100

R168 180

R199 100

R167 100

R160 100

R155 100

R154 100

R153 100

R125 100
L_OUT L_OUT

0
R150 R149 15 KEY1

R175

R151 0
Y_IN

330
Y_IN 0 0 LED_PLT V JL22 5
C_OUT

R165

R159

JL15 4 R157 100k C133

C132
1 C_OUT
Y_OUT C 134
14 LED_PLTV
Y_OUT LED_DIVX JL22 6
CB_OUT 0.1
TO (3/5) CB_OUT R156 13 LED_DIVX

JL14 9 R158 100k

CR_OUT R161
CR_OUT 100 JL15 3 0 LED_D_TV JL22 7
YP_OUT YP_OUT
12 LED_D_TV
TEXTVIN TEXTVIN JL22 8

0.1
LED_A_TV

JL11 2
P_SAVE

R173 100k
P_SAVE CSYNCIN R103 11 LED_A_TV
100 TO FR-274

JL14 0

JL14 1

JL14 4

JL14 6

JL15 1

JL15 7

JL15 9

JL16 1

JL16 4

JL16 5

JL16 7

JL16 9

JL17 1

JL17 3
JL22 9

JL111

JL132

JL135

JL138

JL177

JL179

JL181

JL183
CSYNCIN SCL FLCLK LED_HDD2

C131
SCL 10 LED_HDD2 BOARD
SDA B+ CN203
SDA RCSEL1
RCSEL1 RCSEL2 9 GND THROUGH THE
RCSEL2 FLSTB JL23 0 FAR-007 FFC

4.9

4.9

3.1

5.0

4.9

3.6

4.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

4.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

4.8

4.9

2.7

4.9
4.9
BLANK
BLANK

0
XAMUTE2 8 FLSTB
XAMUTE2 FLCLK JL23 1
C AMUTE1
AMUTE1
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
FLDATA JL23 2
7 FLCL K (SEE PAGE 4-20)

RXD2

RXD1

TU_DCCON

HOTPLUG

BLANK

XCHECKER

MRST

FLON

TUON

MUTECTL

VDD2

RFTHRU
CEC

FANCTL
EPGEQ
TXD2

TXD1

FLCLK
P_CONT

P_CONT2
VDDDDA

HST_TO_M

MSPSTAT

AVLIN

CSYNCIN

SWVION5V

SWVION9V

GND
NC(IN)
6 FLDATA

NC
V+5VI 5 GND
2.0 4.9 JL185 R102 100 FLST B IC15 0 B+ JL27 5
V+12R1E JL113 81 FLSTB 50 0.5A 4 V+5 F
CVBSIN
B+ C138 0 JL186 R101 100 FLDATA
32V B+ JL23 3
V+5R8E 2.2 82 GND FLDATA 49 3 V+12R1E
50V
R176 1k JL114 2.9 0 JL187 R148 100 AVLTH JL23 4
SWVION9V 83 FILTSLC AVLTH 48 2 IR
SWVION9V C139 0.1 4.9 4.9 JL188 R146 100 FLPON JL23 5
2 P_CONT
P_CONT
84 VDDVCO XSCMUTE 47 1 FLPO N
P_CONT2
P_CONT2 DET_ANT DTBON R177 100 JL115 0 0 JL189 R152 0 P_SAVE
TO (2/5)
DET_ANT ANT5V_SW 85 DTBON P_SAVE 46
ANT5V_SW DTBON ANT5V_SW R178 100 JL116 0 0 JL190
DTBON FANCTL 86 ANT5V_SW BLAIR 45 CN106 11P
FANCTL RFTHRU DET_ANT R179 100 JL117 0 JL191
RFTHRU
TUON
SWVION5V
TUON
SWVION5V
87

88
DET_ANT

GND
IC101 CAPACITOR
NC 44

43
4.9 JL192 L2.RIN JL23 6
11

10
GND

2R
TU_DCCON R233 C140 0.1 IC103
TU_DCCON 100k 4.9 IT CONTROLLER 0 JL193 SQU BU4220G-TR
GND 89 VDD3 SQUEEZE 42 9 GND
JL118 4.9 JL194 R145 4.9 2.6 JL214 L2.LIN JL23 7
DBGP 2 R180 100 0 10k FUNC_ON
IC101 TO FR-274
D

5
90 DBGP2 FUNC_ON 41 OUT CT 8 2L
DBGP 1 R181 100 JL119 4.9 LC87F06J2A-F58W3-E 4.9
B+ 4.9 BOARD
+5V CN202

2
SAMUTE 91 DBGP1 VDD4 40 IN 7 GND
S AMUTE DBGP 0 R182 100 JL120 4.9 JL21 5 2VIN JL23 8 THROUGH THE
FUNC_IN
FUNC_IN

4
FUNC_ON 92 DBGP0 GND 39 GND NC 6 2V FAR-006 FFC
FUNC_ON LED_PLTV R183 100 JL121 0 4.9 JL195 R205 100 DDC_SW 2
3 BLANK
BLANK
93 LED_PLTV DDCSW2 38 5 GND
AVLTH
TO (4/5)
AVLTH
AVLIN LED_DIVX R184 100 JL122 0 4.8 JL196 R204 100 DDC_SW 1 C156
C157
0.1 Y2IN JL23 9 (SEE PAGE 4-19)
AVLIN 94 LED_DIVX DDCSW1 37 0.1 B 4 2Y
AVLOUT
AVLOUT LED_D_TV R185 100 JL123 0 JL197 C126 0.1
SQU
SQU 95 LED_D_TV NC 36 3 GND
LED_A_TV R186 100 JL124 0 0 JL198 R202 0 RCSEL2 JL24 0
96 LED_A_TV RCSEL2 35 2 SDET 2
LED_HDD2 R187 100 JL125 0 4.9 JL199 R203 0 RCSEL1 C2IN JL24 1
AFT
AFT
AGC
SCL
AGC
SCL DAT_TO_ M R188 330 JL126 0
97

98
LED_HDD2

DAT_TO_M
RCSEL1

XAMUTE2
34

33
4.9 JL200 R144 0 XAMUTE2 IC103 1 2C

4 SDA
SDA
DAM_TO_ T R189 470 JL127 0 JL201 IC101 VDD DET
XRST1
XRST1 MSPSTAT 99 DAM_TO_T NC 32 CN101 40P
TO (5/5) JL128 3.3 JL202 R222 0 JL24 2
MSPSTAT ASCK R200 330 0 AFT HOTPLUG
+5V 100 ASCK AFT 31 40 HPD
DDC_SW 1 JL24 3
HSM_TO_T

BATTDET
39 DDC_SW 1
MODEL1

MODEL2

AVLOUT
CN103 9P
RESET

SDET3

SDET2

SDET1
ACDET

JL10 1 JL24 4
VDD1

XRST
FUNC
DDC_SCL
KEY1

KEY2

KEY3
WDT

GND

DBGP2

AGC

SDA

SCL
CF1

CF2
TX1

TX2
NC

NC

NC

NC
DBGP2
IR

9 38 DSCL
E DBGP1 8
JL10 2 R193
100k DBGP1
R194
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
JL24 5
37 CEC
JL10 3 100k DBGP0 DDC_SDA JL24 6
DBGP0 7 36 DSDA
0

JL142 4.9

JL145 3.3

JL147 4.9

JL150 4.9

JL152 1.7

JL155 2.5

JL160 2.4

JL162 2.4

4.9

JL170 4.9

JL172 4.9

JL174 4.9

JL175 4.5

JL176 5.0
0

JL180 4.9

JL182 4.9

JL184 4.9

JL206 5.0

JL205 5.0

JL204 4.9
JL10 4 R195 JL24 7
100k RESET HST_TO_ M
RESET
JL133

JL136

JL139

JL166

JL168

JL178

JL207

JL203
6 35 HST_TO_ M
JL10 5 R196 JL24 8
100 ASCK
FOR CHECK GND 5 34 ASCK
JL10 6 RXD1 B+ B+ DAT_TO_ M JL24 9
RXD1 4 33 DAT_TO_ M
JL10 7 R104 47k JL25 0
1

HSM_TO_ T
100k

100k
R123

R124

R129

R126

R127

R133

R134

R135
TXD1
330

330

330

100

10k

1k

TXD1 3
IC102 32 HSM_TO_ T
R117

C113
1M

JL25 1
330p

DAM_TO_ T
C107

6.8k
R139
C104

6.8k
R141
GND 2 C125 DAM_TO_ T
R105

R109

R110

R111

22 31
100

330

100

100

B+ B+ ACDET 25V B+ 0.1

XRST 1 JL25 2
V+5V 1 B TO MAIN 30 XRST1
T0 JL25 3
B+ 11 AV-118 BOARD (4/5)
G TO MAIN 29 MRST
R138 470

R137 100

R140 100

R142 100

R143 100
JL272 P_CONT2 JL25 4
C106 R107
T0 28 P_CONT2
R116

R118

0.1 10k R106

5.0 12 C/R IN
0

AV-118 BOARD (3/5)

JL163

0 C124 Q102
0.1 0 27 GND
2SC4154TP-1EF
4.9

JL143 JL156
5.0

L_IN JL25 5
JL14 8

JL21 2 RESET 26 L_IN

32.768kH z

R131 0
F
15MHz
X102

X101

3 2 1 4.7k GND
25
1 JL211 R_IN JL25 6
R132 RDR-HX750(AEP1,UK) /
6.8k 24 R_IN
IN
GND

OUT

RDR-HX950(AEP1) AMUTE1 JL25 7

BD4846G-TR

C105
IC102

0.1 23 AMUTE1 TO RD-065 (3/7)

Q110 R_OU T JL25 8 BOARD
DTA143EUA-T106 22 R_OUT CN2301
C111 C112 C114 C115
EPGEQ B+
NC

NC

22p 22p 10p 10p

2 21 GNDA THROUGH THE
L_OU T JL25 9
HSM_TO_ T

4 5 R207 FAR-006 FFC

20 L_OUT
FUNC_IN

470
AVLOUT

4.9
XRST1
RESET

SCL0
SDA0
KEY1

KEY2

KEY3

(SEE PAGE 4-28)

AGC

19 GND
JL131 JL134 EPGEQ 0 C149 B TO MAIN JL26 0
10p NC/B IN
R197 18
JL137 R112 10k 50V
JL273 0
SCL0
SCL
SDA

SDA0
CEC0

DDC_SW 2

DDC_SC L

JL218 17 GND
DDC_SDA

4.9
G TO MAIN JL26 1
R208 L102 16 NC/G IN
C110 2.6 4.9 0 47uH
1 15 GND
B Q101 JL22 0 JL26 2
R224

R223

C152 C/R IN
100

100

DTC124EUA-T106 1 Q112 14 NC/C/R IN

10V JL27 7 R210
D101 RESET 4.9 C142 F 3.2 2SC4154TP-1EF 820
G 1SS355TE-17 R113
0
JL130 0
C109
R226 R228
C141
1 1000p CV I/F JL276
0.5%
Y_IN JL26 3
13 GND
5.0

5.0

4.4

4.9

5.0

4.4

4.9

15k 0 10V 50V

0.1 F JL28 0 12 Y_IN
Q111 R209
JL129 3.3k
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 3.2 2SC4154TP-1EF 11 GND
D102 JL26 4
1SS355TE-17 CV I/ F C_OU T
10 C_OUT
TC7MB3257FK(EL)

2.5 JL279
1.8 R216 9 GND
IC104

750 TEXTVI N Y_OUT JL26 5

D103 JL27 8
1SS355TE-17 8 Y_OUT
B+ JL27 0 JL27 1
C15 0 7 GND
B+ R130 R217 R215 1 R214
CB_OUT JL26 6
R201 0 1k 680 10V 3.3k
0 R701 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F 6 CB_OU T
B+ 220k R703 0
D104
5 GND
SIGNAL PATH
4.9

1SR154-400TE-25
3.6

3.6

3.6

B+ Q751 CR_OUT JL26 7

R751 2SA1576A-T106-QR CR_OU T
1k 4
JL109 IR I/F SW R221
100 3 GND VIDEO SIGNAL
JL26 8
R752
C753
100p
5.0 C751
0.1
YP_OUT
2 YP_OUT
AUDI O
JL705 4.7k JL26 9 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
C120 C122 C123 JL707 1 X525P
H 0.1 1
10V
F
470
6.3V
C118
0.22F
5.5V R755
4.7k
C752
100p
0
5.0 JL70 9 5.0
0
L751
0uH KN101 KN102 REC
JL71 1 JL712

R753 JL706
4.7k
JL710
R756
R754
150
G-LINK
C 121
1
IC104 E E
PB
1k JL713
JA751 DDC SW JL22 1

Q752 JL708 C754 JL714

100p
2SC4081T106R RDR-HX750(AEP1,UK) /
IR I/F SW RDR-HX950(AEP1)

IT CONTROLLER, IR
4-5 4-6 AV-114/118 (1/5)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-43 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AV-114 BOARD(2/5)
POWER/FAN CONT. Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
A BTOMAIN

5 GTOMAIN
B+
TO V +5V I CN302 24P
AV-114 BOARD JL322
(4/5) GND GN D
24
JL30 5
V +12R 1 FAN-
C302 23
0.1
B+ R301
0 C303 JL323 25V GN D
100 F 22
16V JL329
P_CONT P_CONT
R302 21
0
V +5R8E EV+5.8V
20
B+ B+ JL31 9
GN D
R303 19
0
EV+5.8V
18
JL306
D301 GN D
17
UDZS-TE17-15B
JL317 EV+12.1V
16
B+ C301 JL330
B V+12R1E 0.1
25V
F B+
15
GN D

V +32V
TO VDC-001
14 BOARD
CN106
P_CONT2 P_CONT2
13
JL331 THROUGH THE
DET_ANT DET_ANT
12 FVA-002 FFC
JL332
ANT5V_SW ANT5V_SW
11
JL333 (SEE PAGE 4-17)
DTBON DT_TUON
10
JL31 4 JL325
GN D
9
R218 C205
0 22 Y_IN
8
25V JL326
D201 GN D
1SS355TE-17 7
R251
L201 0 B_IN
1mH 6
C204 C202
100 0.1 GN D
C208 5
C206 16V 25V 0.1
470p F 5.4 16V G_IN
50V B 4
0.3
FANCTL GN D
3
C JL307
JL311
Q201 2
C/R_I N
R219
3.3k R220 2SD2114KT146 GN D
2.2k 1
FAN CONT
GND C/R_I N

Y_IN

B+ GND 6
V +5V I V+5V I TO

R308 0 JL34 5

R307 0 JL34 4
B+ V+5V O
AV-114 BOARD (3/5)
B+
Q302 V+9V
2SC4154TP-1EF
B+ +5V REG
JL31 2 5.6 4.9 B+ JL34 3
V+5BB
2 L303
0uH JL315
TO (1/5) 0 JL336 5.7 5.0 B+
5 5.6
R304 C305
100 0.1
JL34 1
D 25V
F 5.6
4
5.6
3 R306 0
JL339
5.6 Q306
JL30 8
1 0 33 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
6 +5V REG
Q301 C306 C307 C308
UMD2N-TR 0.1 100 100 5.7 5.6
25V 16V 16V
+5V REG F 3
4
2
4.9 JL334 1 6

JL301 0 0 C314 C315 C 316

RFTHRU 0.1 100 100
Q305 25V 16V 16V
2 UMD2N-TR F
4.8 +5V REG
B+ Q304
2SD2153T100V
+5V REG
SWVION5 V JL338

R318
0 JL313 5.6 5.0 B+ JL34 6
V+5TU
0 JL316
R305 C309 5
12.0
33 0.1 5.6 JL337 9.0 B+ JL34 7
25V
E F 5.6
3
5.6 JL34 0

JL309
4
0 9.6
7
0 Q308
1 6 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
R309 TO (5/5)
C310 C311 C312 C329 1.5k +9V REG
0.1 220 100 0.1 D304
Q303 25V 16V 16V 25V 9.7 9.6 1SS355TE-17
2
4.9 UMD2N-TR F F 4 3
+5V REG JL335 6
1
JL320 0 C318 C319 C320
TUON 0.1 100 100
25V 16V 16V
Q307 F
2 UMD2N-TR
4.8
B+ JL34 2

D302
SWVION9 V UDZSTE-179.1B
F +9V REG B+
IC317
0.5A L304
D303 L305
32V B+ 1SS355TE-17 JL32 7 0uH B+
330uH
V +32V
C323 C328
1 R313 R315 C326
R310 R314 100k 10 0.1
4.7k 50V 22k 180k 50V
F 0.5% 50V
F
JL304 12.0 JL32 1
JL302 JL303 0.3 6.2 1 4 6.2
TU_DCCO N
R311 5.7 JL324
820

C322
JL318
2
5

5.7
SIGNAL PATH
100p 6 3 R316
C324 0.6 22k
50V 0.1
25V
0.5% VIDEO SIGNAL
F AUDI O
0.3
JL310 JL32 8
GND CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
Q310 Q309
0.6
2SC5876T106QR
Q311 REC
2SC4154TP-1EF XP4401
R312
G +32V SWITCHING
REG
10k +32V SWITCHING
REG +32V SWITCHING
REG PB

POWER/FAN CONT.
AV-114 (2/5) 4-7 4-8
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-47 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AV-118 BOARD(2/5)
POWER/FAN CONT. Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
A
B+
5 V +5V I
JL322
TO GND
AV-118 BOARD(4/5) JL30 5
V +12R 1 C302
0.1
B+ R301
0 C303 JL323 25V
100 F CN301 5P
16V JL329
P_CONT 1 P_CONT
R302
0 TO POWER BLOCK
V +5R8E JL31 9 2 EV+12.1V CN202
B+ B+ THROUGH THE
3 GN D
R303 PAE-002 HARNESS
0
4 EV+5.8V
D301 JL306
(SEE PAGE 4-38)
5 GN D
UDZS-TE17-15B
JL317
B+ C301
B V+12R1E 0.1
25V
F

CN201 2P FAN
JL31 4 JL325
1 FAN +
R218 C205
0 22 2 FAN -
25V
D201
1SS355TE-17 JL326
R251
L201 0
1mH
C204 C202
100 0.1 C208
C206 16V 25V 0.1
470p F 5.4 16V
50V B
0.3
FANCTL
C JL307
JL311
Q201
R219
3.3k R220 2SD2114KT146
2.2k FAN CONT
GND GND

6
B+ TO
V +5V I V+5V I AV-118 BOARD(3/5)

JL34 5

JL34 4
B+ V+5V O
B+
Q302 V+9V

R308 0

R307 0
2SC4154TP-1EF
B+ +5V REG
JL31 2 5.6 4.9 B+ JL34 3
V+5BB
2 L303
0uH JL315
TO (1/5) 0 JL336 5.7 5.0 B+
5 5.6
R304 C305
100 0.1
JL34 1
D 25V
F 5.6
4
5.6
3 R306 0
JL339
5.6 Q306
JL30 8
1 0 33 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
6 +5V REG
Q301 C306 C307 C308
UMD2N-TR 0.1 100 100 5.7 5.6
25V 16V 16V
+5V REG F 3
4
2
4.9 JL334 1 6

JL301 0 0 C314 C315 C 316

RFTHRU 0.1 100 100
Q305 25V 16V 16V
2 UMD2N-TR F
4.8 +5V REG
B+ Q304
2SD2153T100V
+5V REG
SWVION5 V JL338

R318
0 JL313 5.6 5.0 B+ JL34 6
V+5TU
0 JL316
R305 C309 5
12.0
33 0.1 5.6 JL337 9.0 B+ JL34 7
25V
E F 5.6
3
5.6 JL34 0

JL309
4
0 9.6
7
0 Q308
1 6 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
R309 TO (5/5)
C310 C311 C312 C329 1.5k +9V REG
0.1 220 100 0.1 D304
Q303 25V 16V 16V 25V 9.7 9.6 1SS355TE-17
2
4.9 UMD2N-TR F F 4 3
+5V REG JL335 6
1
JL320 0 C318 C319 C320
TUON 0.1 100 100
25V 16V 16V
Q307 F
2 UMD2N-TR
4.8
B+ JL34 2

D302
SWVION9 V UDZSTE-179.1B
F +9V REG

IC317
0.5A L304
D303 L305
32V B+ 1SS355TE-17 JL32 7 0uH B+
330uH
V +32V
C323 C328
1 R313 R315 C326
R310 R314 100k 10 0.1
4.7k 50V 22k 180k 50V
F 0.5% 50V
F
JL304 12.0 JL32 1
JL302 JL303 0.3 6.2 1 4 6.2
TU_DCCO N
R311 5.7 JL324
820

C322
JL318
2
5

5.7
SIGNAL PATH
100p 6 3 R316
C324 0.6 22k
50V 0.1
25V
0.5% VIDEO SIGNAL
F AUDI O
0.3 GND
JL310 JL32 8
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
Q310 Q309
0.6
2SC5876T106QR
Q311 REC
2SC4154TP-1EF XP4401
R312
G +32V SWITCHING
REG
10k +32V SWITCHING
REG +32V SWITCHING
REG PB

POWER/FAN CONT.
4-9 4-10 AV-118 (2/5)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TEXTVI N

A AV-114/118 BOARD(3/5) R458

470 2.2

VIDEO/AUDIO
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- JL488
1.6
R455
47 SIGNAL PATH
Q403 IC403 VIDEO SIGNAL
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF C461 MM1503XNRE AUDI O
1
4.9 0 B JL485 4.9 JL48 7 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
3 6 IN 1 SW

1
0.5 2.0 1.6 Y_I N
2 B+ GND OUT REC

2
4.9 JL486 4.9
IN 2 Vcc

3
4.9
4 1
Q411 C460 2.3 PB
UMD2N-TR R459 1 C462
75 B 1
0.5%

IC402
BUFFER

B D420 R465 4.9 4.9

12
MC4826-TP-1 470 JL49 1 0
IC403

R_IN
L_IN
2.3 C/R W
TO
RCSEL1 Q410 AV-118 BOARD(1/5)
2.3 Q408 RCSEL
2SC4154TP-1EF 1.6 1.6
RCSEL2 0 2SC4154TP-1EF
Y_I N

RTOMAI N
IC402
C472 BA4558F-E2 C475
10 10 Q413 C/R_IN
50V 4.6 50V DTC124EUA-T106
9.0 B+ B+ 6
V+9V

8
1

4.6 4.6 TO
+
AV-114 BOARD(2/5)

7
2

C464
-

C473 V+5VI
4.6 4.6 0.1 100
+ 25V 16V

6
-
3

F V+5VO

AV1_ROUT

AV2_ROUT
AV1_LOUT

AV2_LOUT

RGBOUT
4.6

C_OU T

Y_OU T

YP_OUT
CR_OUT
CB_OUT
BLANK
5
4

GND
JL4416

R_IN
R_IN V+9V
L_IN R453 C471 C474
R463
B+ B+
10 10

UDZSTE-1711B
L_IN 8.2k V+5VI
RCSEL1 0.5% 50V 50V 8.2k
0.5% C450 C451 R401 B+ 6
C

D401
RCSEL1 4.7 4.7 0 R461
50V 50V C453 C404 680 V +5V O TO
10k 0.5% JL4424

RCSEL2 100 1
RCSEL2 JL4423 10V 10V AV-118 BOARD(2/5)
F
BLANK
GND
BLANK
10k 0.5%

C_OUT C452 C401 C402

R402 560

R403 560

100 1 100p C409 C410

C_OUT 10V 10V C403 R404 1 1
Y_OUT 50V 100p 10V 10V 4.9 0
F 0
B B
R462

50V C406 C407 C 408

R454

C413
0.1
Y_OUT

16V
0.1 1 1

B
CB_OUT
16V 10V 10V
CB_OUT JL45 5 B B B D410
CR_OUT
0 UMZ6.8N-T106
CR_OUT
JL456

YP_OUT Q402 D801

2SD2114KT146 UMZ6.8N-T106
JL454

4.6 JL453

4.5 JL452

JL451

JL450

JL449

JL448
2.3 JL447

4.9 JL446

JL445

JL444

2.3 JL443

JL442

2.3 JL441

JL440
2.3 JL439

JL438
2.3 JL437

2.3 JL436
YP_OUT R407
Y_IN 0 C486 R468
Y_IN 470 68 R469
6.3V 0.5% JL441 8 3.9 JL4422
TEXTVIN C438
4.6

4.5

4.5

9.0

4.5

4.5

4.5

2.2

2.3

2.3
1

0
TEXTVIN 10V
F C454
1 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 100
10V

1
2VIN JA401

3
VCC

VCC
A HorHDD/OUT(L)

A HorHDD/OUT(R)
A AV1/OUT(R)

A AV2/OUT(R)
A AV1/OUT(L)

A AV2/OUT(L)

A AV1/OUT2(L)

A AV1/OUT2(R)
To DVD(R)
To DVD(L)

VIDEO AGC

SLICER OUT
TO (1/5) 2VIN

MAIN C D

DVD VorY OUT

PAL SCART IN
F A DVD(R)

DVD C OUT

PAL SCART D2

F DVD C

PAL SCART D1

F DVD Y

RGB M OUT

F DVD Pb(B)

F DVD Pr(R)

F DVD PY(G)
F A DVD(L)

MAIN C IN
A DVD M C

C414 C435
C 436 4 S VIDEO

G
Y2IN 0.1 R433 1
1
D Y2IN 25V 1M 10V
C476

4
F JL457 4.5 B 10V
C2IN 1.8 JL435 BI N 0.01

2
B R470
C2IN 81 A HIFI IN(R) SCART B IN 50 25V 75 R471
C415 JL458 4.5 B 0.5% 0
XAMUTE2 0.1 2.3 JL434 R/CI N JL4420 JL441 9 JL4421
XAMUTE2 25V 82 A HIFI IN(L) SCART RorC IN 49
AMUTE1 F JL459 0 1.8 JL433 GI N D409
AMUTE1 R422 83 V DVD M C SCART G IN 48 UMZ6.8N-T106
10k JL460 4.5
R_OUT 4.9 C437
R_OUT C468 1
0.1 84 A L4 IN(R) VCC 47 R435
L_OUT JL461 4.5 0.4 1M
10V
B GOUT 3
L_OUT C469
C411 1 0 . 1 85 A L4 IN(L) PY(Y)G OUT 46 LINE 2
R408 JL483 10V B JL462 4.5
CSYNCIN TU_RIN 470 0.3 R/COUT OUT
CSYNCIN
SDA
R413
TU_LI N 470 JL484 C412 1
10V B JL463 4.5
86 A TUNER IN(R)
IC401 Pr(Cr)/RorC OUT 45
0.3 BOUT JL4401
SDA 87 A TUNER IN(L) Pb(Cb)/B OUT 44

UMZ6.8N-T106
R436

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
SCL 4.5 VIDEO/AUDIO 4.4 JL432 100 SCL
SCL SCL 43

D416
88 VREF(9V/2) SELECTOR

D413

D414

D415
R414 JL480 C419 1 R437 JA402
B+ V+5V 470 10V B JL464 4.5 4.4 JL431 100 SDA R801
V+5V
V 89 A L3 IN(R) SDA 42 0
R415 JL479 C420 1 JL465 4.5
P_SAVE 470 10V B 4.8 JL430 CSYNCI N V
P_SAVE 90 A L3 IN(L) IC401 SYNC 41
R416 JL478 C421 1 HA118326APFR-E C487 R472 R473 VIDEO
L2_RIN 470 10V B JL466 4.5 2.2 470 6.3V 68 0.5% JL4407
3.9
L2_RIN 91 A L2 IN(R) PY(Y)OUT 40
R417 C422 1 C 489 R476 0.5% R477 JL4411
L2_LIN JL477 10V B JL467 4.5 2.5 470 6.3V JL4408
470 68 3.9
L2_LIN 92 A L2 IN(L) Pr(Cr)/OUT 39
C423 1 C 488
E AV1_RIN
AV1_RIN JL4426 R418
470
R419
JL476 10V
C424
JL475 10V
B
1
JL468 4.5
93 A L5 IN(R) Pb(Cb)/OUT 38
2.5 470 6.3V
R474
68 0.5%
JL4409 R475
3.9
JL4413
JL4412 CR

AV1_LIN JL4427 470 B JL469 4.5 8

AV1_LIN 94 A L5 IN(L) GND 37
AV2_RIN 2.2 7 L
AV2_RIN 95 GND V2 OUT 36 AUDIO L
AV2_LIN JL470 2.7 JL429 6 L801
AV2_LIN 96 A AV1 R OUT(R) FBCD 35 0uH
AV2_V/YIN C455 JL471 2.5 JL428
AV2_V/YIN 4.7 97 A AV1 R OUT(L) C2 OUT 34
C439 5 CB
50V 0.1
AV1_V/YIN JL472 JL427 16V JL440 3
AV1_V/YIN 98 RF-C A OUT S1/S2 B OUT 33 B
C497 JL473 JL441 0 C478
AV2_V/YOUT C418 0.1 2.1
AV2_V/YOUT 1 25V 99 A AGC D V2 OUT 32 0
10V F JL474 1.9 R478 R480
AV1_V/YOUT F C490 JL4414 R
AV1_V/YOUT GND 470 68 3.9
100 VTR VorV&S V3 IN 31
SYNC DET OUT

S1/S2 B OUT

AUDIO R
RS IN D OUT

0.5%
VIDEO L3 IN

VIDEO L2 IN

VIDEO L1 IN

6.3V C491
BOUT L802
SEP C2 IN
V C&S C3 IN

SEP Y1 IN

SEP Y2 IN
SEO C1 IN
DL3 DRIVE

59/61PIN

47 Q406
SYNC DET
SYNC DET

TUNER IN

BOUT R482 0uH

VTR OUT
AV2 OUT

L_OUT 35V
C1 OUT

2SD2114KT146
V1 OUT

Y1 OUT

JL49 5 100 JL497

BS IN

R/COUT
COMPONENT
FBCD

FBCD
GND

GND

VCC

VCC

R/COUT
FBC

Y
BG

R439 VIDEO OUT

9 GOUT 1.8M R485
R479
470 0
JL4405
GOUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 22k R484
TO (4/5) GIN 1k 0.7 C482 C485
JL49 4 470p 0
2.3

JL40 5 1.8

4.8

JL40 6 2.3

JL40 8 1.8

JL40 9 0.6

JL41 0 2.3

JL41 3 1.8

JL41 4 1.8

JL41 5 2.7

JL41 6 1.8

2.9
JL41 7 2.2

JL41 9 1.7

JL42 0 2.7

2.2

JL42 2 2.7

JL42 4 4.9

JL42 5 2.5

4.9

2.2

GIN
0

50V
R/CIN JL49 6
F
JL40 4

JL40 7

JL41 1

JL41 2

JL41 8

JL42 1

JL42 3

R/CIN
BIN
R438
JL40 2

BIN Q401
0

RGBOUT DTC124EUA-T106
2.3
RGBOUT R420 R448 B+
AV2_ROUT P_SAVE JL40 1 0 R425 C457 0 JL49 9 0.7 C484
R421

1.8M R487
1.8M

100k 10 470p
AV2_ROUT 22k
50V R486 50V
AV2_LOUT C493
47 1k
Q407 0
R432

AV2_LOUT C 431 C432 C428 C446 R_OUT 35V

1M

AV1_ROUT JL4406 2SD2114KT146

R430

0.1 1 0.1 1
R431

R428
1M

1M

AV1_ROUT 16V 10V 16V 10V

0

AV1_LOUT C498 C499 C443 B B B B C440 C441 C442 R488 R490 JL498
0.1 1 0.1 1 C 458 D402 470 100
0.1 0.1 100
AV1_LOUT 25V 25V 10V 16V 10V 25V DTZ-TT11-6.8B
RTOMAIN F B B F 10V XAMUTE2 JL492
F F
RTOMAIN
C456 C500 C444 C445 C496 C434
0.5%

C447
R447

1 0.1 1 1 0.1 0.1 D419

75

50V 25V 0.01 10V

F 25V B
10V 25V 16V 1SS355TE-17
TU_RIN B F B 0 4.2
0.5%

B
R444

TU_RIN 6 3
75

R445
NNCD3.9F-T1B

8 2.7 0
NNCD3.9F-T1B

TU_LIN 75 AMUTE1
TU_LIN 0.5%
D421

2
D422

5
TO (5/5) TU_VIN JL493
TU_VIN
D418 1 4
4.3 Q404
G V+5V
1SS355TE-17 UMD2N-TR
AV1_V/YI N

AV2_V/YOUT

AV1_V/YOUT
AV2_V/YIN

C463 C481 C492

TU_VIN

0.1 0.1 220

Y2I N

2VI N
C2IN

25V 25V 10V

F F

VIDEO/AUDIO
AV-114/118 (3/5) 4-11 4-12
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

AV-114/118 BOARD(4/5)
EURO R516
R515 1.2k
560 JL533
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES-
R517 R518 12.0
B+ 1.5k JL53 1 10 12.0 Q502
R569 R566 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
A 1k 22k
SQU
JL532
-1.9
SWITCH
B TO MAIN C551
11 0 22 FUNC_ON D501
25V UDZS-TE17-5.1B
G T0 MAIN 1.7
TO (1/5) Q511 AVLTH JL527 AV-114 BOARD
AV-118 BOARD
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF B+ R506 0 JL529
BUFFER R568 +5V
12k

5.0
R507 R509 D527 JL53 4

0
R510 1SS355TE-17 JL528
V+12R1 4.7k 27k R574 D502
JL514 2.2M
5 R562 AVLIN 5 4 D523
0 U DZS-TE17-5.1B D526
TO V+5VI 10k Q505 DAN217UT106 1SS355TE-17
R508 JL516 2SC4154TP-1EF

VCC
4.9

TC7S66FU(TE85R)

CONT
AV-118 BOARD(2/5) 47k
GND C550 Q504 0 AV IN,OUT JL53 0
4.9 22 JL515 4.5 SWITC H

IC406
25V 2SC4154TP-1EF R511
2.9 AV IN,OUT 220k 0 6.3 4 1 9.5
Q510 3 SWITCH 4.5 C515 C 510

IN/OUT

OUT/IN
2SC4154TP-1EF 0 C517 0.1 0.1 0 0
R564

GND
BUFFER 2.3 R565 Q503 0 220p
15k TO (1/5) 5 2
680 2SC4154TP-1EF
GTOMAIN JL517 JL52 5 JL52 6 D524
AV IN,OUT 0 1 2 3
Q501
SWITCH C511 R512 R520 R513
DAN217UT106 6 3
UMH1NTN

4.5

1.1
R558 220p 100k 220 100k
B+ 10k SWITCH
V+5VI
C547
4.9 22 AVLOUT
5 25V
Q509 2.9
2SC4154TP-1EF FUNC_IN
TO BUFFER
AV-114 BOARD(2/5)
BTOMAIN
2.3 BLANK
SAMUTE
IC406 R519
56k

AV LTH SW D530
R561 R560 JL512
680 15k JL508 UDZSTE-1713B
Q506 JL513
GND HN1C03FU-TE85R
MUTE SW 0 6 3 0 R535

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
C516

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
3.9k D531 470p
B+ JL505 0.7 0.7

D516
UMZ6.8N-T106

D514

D515

D517
D513
V+12R1 JA501
R534 2 5 C518 42P
C545 C541 JL509 1000p
RTOMAIN D528 100
3.9k 4.7 R536
L851
1SS355TE-17 R542 50V 1 4 R537 L853 L852 0uH
16V 470 100 0uH 0uH
100 JL54 9 1.ROUT
AV1_ROUT

1
AV1_RIN JL55 0 2.RIN
JL55 1

2
AV1_LOUT 3.LOUT

3
AV1_LIN 4.GNDA
R539 R521

4
R543 C542 R538 5.GNDV

5
C 100 4.7
50V
470 100 68
0.5% JL51 9
R522
3.9
C520 1000p L854 0uH
JL55 2
JL55 3
6.LIN

6
BOUT 7.BOUT

7
JL55 4 8.FUNCTION
R547 R540 R541 C529

8
R546 100k 100k 9.GNDV

9
UMZ6.8N-T106
100k 470

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
100k JL55 5 10.N-LINK
6.3V
JL55 6

20 18 16 14 12 10
D522
11.GOUT

21 19 17 15 13 11
D518

D521
D519

D520
JL55 7 12.NC LINE 1 / TV
C519
R548 R549 470p 13.GNDV
C530 R523
100k 100k C 531 470 68 R524 14.GNDV
470 6.3V 0.5% JL55 8 15.R/COUT
3.9
6.3V JL520 JL55 9 16.BLANK
GOUT
R/COUT R525 68 JL521 R526 3 . 9 R529 17.GNDV
0.5% JL522 R528 75 0.5% 100k
RGBOUT 18.GNDV
R527 0 JL523 R531 0 JL56 0 19.V/YOUT
AV1_V/YOUT
AV1_V/YIN JL524 R563 0 JL56 1 20.V/YIN
9 JL510 C532 R530 JL56 2 21.GNDV
11.3

UMZ6.8N-T106
470

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
NNCD3.9F-T1B

1000p

1000p
UMZ6.8N-T106
JL506 75 R532 L501 L855

C505

C507
Q507

470p

470p
6.3V

C506

C508
TO (3/5) JL511 0.5% 75 0uH 0uH

D503

D507
HN1C03FU-TE85R

D504
JL501

D505
0

D506
0.5%
MUTE SW 0 0 R556
9
3 6 L856
R557 3.9k
L858 L857 0uH
11.2 3 . 9 k JL504 0.7 0.7 0uH 0uH JL53 5
22.ROUT

42 40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22
Q508 5 2
JL507
JL53 6
23.RIN
C543 JL53 7
DTA124EUA-T106

41 39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23
C544 4.7 4 R550 R551 24.LOUT
SA MUTE 4.7 50V R544 1 R553
470 100 25.GNDA
D AV2_ROUT
AV2_RIN
JL502 50V 100 100

L859 0uH
JL53 8
JL53 9
26.GNDV
27.LIN
AV2_LOUT 28.BIN
JL54 0
JL503 R545 100 R552 29.FUNCTION
AV2_LIN 470 R573 0uH 30.GNDV
JL54 1
BIN 31.N-LINK
JL54 2
GIN 32.GIN
D529 UDZSTE-1713B JL54 3
33.NC
34.GNDV LINE 3 / DECORDER
35.GNDV
JL54 4
R/CIN 36.R/CIN
JL54 5
37.BLANK
C528 R504 C503
470 68 R505 L862 38.GNDV
L803 100p
6.3V 0.5% JL51 8 3.9 0uH 50V 39.GNDV
AV2_V/YOUT 0 JL54 6
40.V/YOUT
AV2_V/YIN JL54 7
41.V/YIN
JL54 8
R559 42.GNDV

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
NNCD3.9F-T1B

NNCD3.9F-T1B

NNCD3.9F-T1B
0 L502 L860
C552 0uH 0uH L861

D508
R554 R555 R571 R514 R503 R502 R501

D509

D510

D511

D512
100k 100k 75 75 75 75 75 100p 0uH
0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 50V

Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted

line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.

EURO
4-13 4-14 AV-114/118 (4/5)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-43 to 4-50 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AERIAL
AV-114/118 BOARD(5/5)
TUNER IN OUT

-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- U601 (TUNER TMFE2-4707A)

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT
SIF OUT

AGC OUT

AFT OUT
GND

GND
SDA
SCL

MB
NC
BB

TU
JL603

JL605

JL608

JL609

JL610

JL611

JL612

JL616

JL617
L601 SIGNAL PATH

R638
100
0uH R635
0uH
B+ JL60 1

R636

R637
VIDEO SIGNAL

0uH

0uH
V+5B B
B+ JL602 AUDI O
V +32V
B+ B+ CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
7 V+5TU
L602
TO (2/5) 0uH REC
C602 R609
2200p 0
50V R603 C611 C608 PB
B 0 47 0.47
35V 10V
B
GND
C609 C603 C604
B JL604
100 2200p 100p
10V 50V
B
50V
JL61 8
AGC
R605 Q601
C606 4.5 10k ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
10p R607
1k 3.9 BUFFER
50V
C605 Q602 1.6 R602
10p ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 1k
50V
AGC
AFT
R606 2.2 JL620
L604 L605 10k
0uH 0uH
B+
+5V
B+
L606 C617 C638 C618 C639 L608
L607 0.1 10 0.1 3.3
100uH 0uH 0uH
25V 50V 25V 50V C641
F F 10
50V B+
C613 C614

JL632

JL635

JL637

JL639

JL641

JL643
C640
0.1 0.1 100
25V 25V 10V

2.6

2.5

3.5
F F
C C 642
100
C619
0.1

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34
10V 25V
C620 C643 F
R630 C615 C622 C621 1 100 R623
100p 56p 56p

VREFTOP
C616 330 10V 1k

MONOIN
50V 50V 10V

NC/ASG
50V

AGNDC

CAPLM
AHVSS
0.01 L609 F

SC1R
AVSS
25V 10uH TU_VIN

NC

NC

NC
B C628
4.9 5.0 0.01
AVSUP AHVSUP

33
25V

1
JL61 9 JL62 1 1.5 JL64 6 B JL65 9
AIN1 + NC JL65 6

32
TU_LIN

2
JL62 2 1.5 JL64 7
R631 AIN1 - SCOL Q604

31
4
IC601

3
4.7k C 629 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
C623 JL64 8 3900p
4.9 TESTEN SCOR BUFFER 2.2 8

30
3p 50V

4
TO (1/5) Q606 R624
1.5 50V EURO MSP JL64 9 B 3.3k 1.5
2SC4154TP-1EF CJ 2.3 XI N VREF1

29
5
SIF AMP TO (3/5 )
R632 JL614 JL62 3 2.1 JL650 R625
22 XOUT IC601 TP 3.3k

28
JL66 1

6
0.9 MSP3417G-QG-B8V3
R616 JL62 4 1.4
X601 0 TP DACML

27
JL615

7
18.432MHz C630
JL62 5 0 1.4 JL65 1 560p R626 C627 C626
DCO1 DACMR

26
MSPSTAT 50V

8
1k 0.1 0.1
C624 JL62 6 JL65 2 25V 25V
R634 R633 DCO0 VREF2 F F

25
3p

9
2.2k 100 50V
D CJ JL62 7
ADSEL TP
10

24
JL62 8 4.9 JL65 3 JL657 JL660
11 STBYQ TP

23
TU_RIN
R619 JL65 4 Q605
10k C631 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
0.01

RESETQ
C 632 BUFFER
10

DVSUP
25V

DVSS
3900p

SDA
SCL
50V B 2.2

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP
R627
B 3.3k 1.5
12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22
R628

JL63 8

JL64 0

JL64 2
JL634

JL636
3.3k

4.9

4.8
JL65 8

JL644

JL645
4.3

4.3

B+
C633
JL631

JL633

C625
560p

R620
1
50V

0
10V
F

C636 JL655
C635
22p 22p
R621 100 50V 50V
SCL
R622 100
SDA

E XRST1

Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted

line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.

TUNER
AV-114/118 (5/5) 4-15 4-16
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveform.
• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

VDC-001 BOARD
VIDEO DECODER
-REF.NO.: 40,000 SERIES-
A R161 0 B+ B+
FAN CN103 2P TP126
CN104 28P
FAN+ 1 TP127
NC
C197 0 . 1 25V 28

4.7k
4.7k
STREAM_ 0
STREAM_ 1
STREAM_ 2
STREAM_ 3

STREAM_ 4
STREAM_ 5
STREAM_ 6
STREAM_ 7

R186
R187
FAN- 2 TP15 8
GND
27
TP128 R182 0
SDA_VDEC
26
TP129 R183 0
SCL_VDEC
25
GND
24
TP130
NC
T P125 2 4 6 8 23
TP131
R164 NC
100 R176 22
100
GND
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 21
R157
0 C245 C244 XRESET
20
B C186 R175 C188 C191 C193
0.1
C195 16V C198 C200
0.1
16V GND
1 10k 1 1 1 1 F 1 1 F 19
7 5 3 1 C 246 GND
R163 18
R152 1000p R174 10k TP133 R185 0
10k 50V 10k VCLK

T P114

T P116

T P117
17

TP115
8 6 4 2 B
CN105 12P TO RD-065
T P101 GND
16 BOARD (2/7)
P-CONT 1 STREAM_ 7 TP134
B+ B+ TP1129 15
STREAM_7 CN4701
B+

3.3

1.5

3.3

1.5

3.3

1.5

3.3

0.8

0.4

0.4

0.4

1.5

0.8

0.4
1.2
SW+3.3V B+ TP135

0
2 STREAM_ 6 THROUGH THE
C103 1 T P168 T P180 TP172 STREAM_6
14 FVR-001 FFC
GND 3 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 STREAM_ 5 TP136
T P102 T P157 R125 STREAM_5
C124 C134 13
330 (SEE PAGE 4-26)

FCKQ

DVDD1N

DVDD1M

BCKM

RDEO

DVDD3H

BLK

VD

HD

DVDD1L

ROCK

ROY0

ROY1

DVDD3G

ROY2

ROY3

ROY4

ROY5

DVDD1K

ROY6

ROY7

DGND8
BCLK8
FOCP

DVDD3I
DFBI
DVDD3J

DYSI

FCSI

DGND12

FDIO9
FDIO8

FDIO7

FDIO6

FDIO5

FDIO4

FDIO3

FDIO2

DGND11

FDIO1

FDIO0

FILD

DGND10

DGND9
SW+3.3V 4 7p 7p 5.0 STREAM_ 4 TP137
TO 50V 50V T P176 C 247 STREAM_4
C106 TP1160 1000p 12
SWITCHING GND 220 C112 50V TP138
5
4V 1 Q103 L102 L106 B
STREAM_ 3
STREAM_3
REGULATOR T P103 B+ ISA1602AM1TP-1EF R129 R141 1.8 3.3 B+ 11
470 10uH 18uH 10 C 228 DVDD3F
CN202 EV+5.8V 6 0.5% 1.2 T P150 1 133 DVDD10 88 STREAM_ 2 TP139
C113 0.1 Y BPF 1.5 0.3 10
STREAM_2
2.3 DYMI ROY8
THROUGH THE EV+5.8V 7 C118 C128 C138 R137 Q107 134 87 STREAM_ 1 TP140
TP1156 22p 82p 15p 1.8k 0 1.9 STREAM_1
PV-145 HERNESS 2SC4154TP-1EF 9
GND 8 50V 50V 50V 0.5% DCGI ROY9 TP141
R145 C142 135 86 STREAM_ 0
C115 100 16V R104 1.6
BUFFER 680 1 C178 0 8
STREAM_0
T P106 47 10 DCBI ROY10
EV+12V 9 136 85
C (SEE PAGE 4-38) C101 0.1 16V 0 7
GND
GND 10 DCRI ROY11 TP142
F10 3 137 84
T P104 C114 1 6.3V B+ T P153 0 NC
6
SW+1.5V 11 AVDD1 ROY12 B+ C208 1 TP143
I EM I O R149 138 83
B+ T P122 1.5 NC
C102 C232 C233 47k 5
G C177
SW+1.5V 12 100
1
10 1000p 139 ATS1 ROY13 82 TP144
16V T P169 T P181 TP173 10V 50V T P123 0 1.5 C210 1 NC
C116 C B 4
R124 DVDD1J
220
330 F10 2 140 ATS2 81 TP145
4V TP152 R150 0 GND
C123 C133 B+ 3
7p 7p 5.0 47k AVDD3A DGND7 TP146
I EM I O R151 141 80
SW+1.5V 50V 50V T P177 T P124 3.3 3.3 NC
(NOT USE) C109
TP165
G
47k 2
1 C161 C176 C180 142 ATS3 ROFDIE 79
T P105
Q102 R128 L101 L105 R140 1.8 220 1 1000p 0 TP1128 R170 R184 1
GND
470 10uH 18uH 10 4V AGND1 FCLK8 10k C209 0
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 0.5% 1.2 T P149 143 78 1
C/R BPF AGND2 FCKM
2.3 C117 C127 C137 R136 Q106 144 77
TP1157 22p 82p 15p 1.8k 1.5 C243
50V 50V 50V 0.5% 2SC4154TP-1EF AGND3 DVDD1I 1000p C24 2
R144 C141 145 76 R171 50V 0.01
R105 1.6
BUFFER 680 1 TP1130 3.3 TP1127 47k B 16V
47 C 162 VCLY RGRED B
0.1 146 75
C163 16V TP1131 1.4 3.3 TP132
RSTB
C149 0.1 147 VCOM1 74
0.01 16V TP1132 1.5
AVI SLA0
148 73
TP1133 1.0 3.2
D T P182 TP174
C 164
0.1 149 VLPF1
SDA
72
T P170 C153 16V TP1134 1.1 3.3
0.1 150
ASYI
IC104 SCL
71

I
R126 16V TP1135 0.9 1.5 C211 1 F107

EMI
330 C125 C135
7p 7p 5.0 C 165 VRB1 DVDD1H

G
CN106 24P 0.1 151 VIDEO DECODER 70
50V 50V T P178 TP1136 1.9
TP166 C154 16V
C110 ACYI AGNDA4
IC105

O
GND 24 0.1 152 69
1 L103 L107 16V
T P109 Q104 R130 R142 2.3 TP1137 0.9 B+
470 10uH 18uH 10 C 166 IOCR
C/R_IN 23 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 0.5% 1.7 0.1 153 VRT1 68 F106 SDRAM
G BPF T P148
C155 16V TP1138 2.4 IC104 3.3 TP164 B+ C248 220 4V
2.9 0.1 154 ACSI UPD64015AGM-UEU-A AVDDA3
GND 22
TP1158
C119 C129 C139 R138 Q108 16V
67 O EM I I C252
T P110 22p 82p 15p 1.8k 0.9 0.1
G_IN 50V 50V 50V 0.5% 2SC4154TP-1EF C 182 AVDD3B AGNDA3 G C220 1 IC105 16V
21 R146 C143 1 155 66 F
R106 2.3 BUFFER 680 1 3.3 C21 2 HY57V161610FTP-6-C
GND 47 AVDD3C IOCB 1
20 156 65 C249 16V
T P111 TP1139 3.3 3.3 6.3V B+ 3.3
0.1 F
C 167 VRT2 AVDDA2

50
C147

1
B_IN 19 0.1 157 64
0.01 TP1140 0 1.3 VDD1 VSS 2 1.2
16V SDRDQ0 SDRDQ15
ASCI AGNDA2

49
2
GND 18 158 63
T P112 TP1141 0 1.2 DQ0 DQ1 5 1.9
SDRDQ1 SDRDQ14
C 168 VRB2 OYG

48
C148

3
Y_IN 17 0.1 159 62
T P171 T P183 TP175 0.01 TP1142 0 3.3 DQ1 DQ1 4
16V
AGI AVDDA1

47
4
GND 16 160 61
T P304 R127 TP1143 0 1.3 VSSQ1 VSSQ4 1.4
330 R131 C126 C136 C21 4 SDRDQ2 SDRDQ13
5.0 C 169 RSET

46
7p 7p 161 161 1

5
NC 15 470 60
E TO AV-114
T P305
C111 TP167
0.5% 50V 50V R143 T P179
10
0.1
C156 16V TP1144 0
REF
6.3V
SDRDQ3 1.2 DQ2 DQ1 3 1.5 SDRDQ12

45
0.1 162 ACBI

6
NC 14 1 59
BOARD (2/5) Q105 L104 L108 2.3 16V 0 C221 1 DQ3 DQ1 2 C224 1
T P306 B+ B+ TP1145 C240 3.3 3.3
CN302 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 10uH 18uH C 170 AGNDA1

44
C146 1000p

7
NC 13 1.7 0.1 163 VRT3 58
T P307 T P147 0.01 TP1146 0 1.5 C226 0 . 1 16V 50V VDDQ1 VDDQ4 1.6
THROUGH THE B BPF 16V
DVDD1G B SDRDQ4 1.4 SDRDQ11
2.9

43
164 ABI

8
FVA-002 FFC P-CONT2 12 C120 C132 C140 R139 Q109 57
T P308 TP1159 22p 82p 15p 1.8k C 171 TP1147 0 C241 1.3 DQ4 DQ1 1 1.6
C253 2SC4154TP-1EF 0.1 C219 SDRDQ5 SDRDQ10
50V 50V 50V 0.5% DGND6 0.1

42
0.1 165 VRB3 7p

9
NC 11 16V 56 16V
16V R107 2.3 BUFFER R147 TP1148 0 1.6 TP1126 F
50V T P159 DQ5 DQ1 0
(SEE PAGE 4-8) F 47 680 C 172 XI

10

41
GND 10 F10 1 0.1 166 VCOM3 55
T P151 B+ 0 1.6 TP1124 TP1125 1.5 VSSQ2 VSSQ3 1.6
16V SDRDQ6 SDRDQ9
XO

11

40
EV+12V 9 I EM I O 167 AVDD3D 54
C183 3.3 3.3 C216 X101 1.1 DQ6 DQ 9 1.6
C144 1 R169 1k 1 C218 SDRDQ7 SDRDQ8
G DVDD3E

12
24.576MHz

39
168 AVDD3E
GND 8
IC103 1 C151
220
4V
C158
0.1
C160
1000p C185
0.1
TP1161 3.3
53
1.1
7p
50V C222 1 3.3 DQ7 DQ 8 3.3
C25 1
1000p
50V
B

13
SDRDQ15

38
EV+5.8V 7 IC101 B+ 16V 169 VCOM4 52
5V REG 0 1.1 VDDQ2 VDDQ3
MM1563DFBE B+ C 157
TP1149

14
SDRDQ0

37
GND 6 IC103 0.1 170 ACRI 51
C254 4.8 TP187 0 C239 LDQM NC/RFU
0.1 1.9 S-1112B50MC-L7JTFG C173
16V TP1150 1.3 1000p 1 SDRW E 3.2 C225 1

15
SDRDQ14

36
EV+5.8V C145
5

5 CN 171 VLPF2 50
4

16V CON T 0.1 50V

T P309 F R103 0.01 TP1151 0 1.1 B 3.2 XW E UDQM 1.6
TP185 5.7 5.0 TP121 16V SDRCA S SDRCLK
0

16
VI N VOUT SDRDQ1

35
P-CONT 172 ARI
6

4 GND
5

49
3

B+ 5.7
SUB
C 174 0 1.5 C217 1 XCAS CLK
T P310 TP162 TP1152 SDRRA S 3.2 3.3 SDRCKE
0.1

17
VS S

34
GND 173 VRB4 DVDD1F
7

3 NC 48
2

VI N R148 16V
T P113 33k T P189 TP190 TP1153 0 1.3 3.1 XRAS CKE
3.3 4.8 C175 SDRC S
F

18
ON/OFF NC 174 VRT4

33
FAN- C234 0.1 SDRDQ13
3

2 VO C184
4

47
1

C107 100 1 16V 0 XCS NC

1 C121 0 16V C130 1.3 SDRA10 0.1 0.2 SDRA9
C150

19
2.2

32
GND 1 6.3V 1000p
1
C159
10V
R133 175 AGND4 SDRDQ2 46
50V 1 0 0.1 BA A9 0.2
B 6.3V B SDRAB P SDRA8

20

31
F105 176 AGND5 DGND5 45
TP154 B+ 0.2 A10/AP A8 0.4
SDRA0 SDRA7

SDRDQ10

SDRDQ11

SDRDQ12

21

30
IC101

SDRA10

SDRRAS

SDRDQ7

SDRDQ8

SDRDQ6

SDRDQ9

SDRDQ5

SDRDQ4

SDRDQ3
DVDD1D

DVDD3D
SDRABP

SDRCAS
DVDD3A

DVDD3B

DVDD1A

DVDD1B

DVDD3C

DVDD1C
EMI

SCKSET

SDRCKE

SDRCLK

DVDD1E
IC102

SDRWE
SDRCS
I O

DGND1

DGND2

DGND3

DGND4
SDRA9

SDRA8

SDRA7

SDRA6

SDRA5

SDRA4

SDRA3

SDRA2

SDRA1

SDRA0
TEST1

TEST2
TP107 0.2 A0 A7 0.4
MM1561FFBE G
SDRA1 SDRA6

22

29
R102
3.3V REG 10k T P186 2.4 T P188 0.2 A1 A6 0.4
0.3 SDRA2 SDRA5
C215 C207 C205

23

28
5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
4

220 1 1000p A2 A5
4V SDRA3 0.4 0.4 SDRA4

24

27
6

3.3

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.4

3.3

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.2

1.5

0.2

0.2

3.0

3.3

3.2

1.5

1.5

3.3

1.5

3.2

3.2

1.0

1.4

1.5

1.1

1.3

1.2

1.3

1.5

1.2

1.3

1.2

1.3

3.3
3

B+ 3.3 B+ B+ B+ C250 A3 A4
1000p 3.3

25

26
7

50V
2

F10 4 T P155 VDD2 VSS 1

1.5 T P108 B+ B+ B+ B
EM I O
1

C108 I C223 1 B+
R113 1 C122 C131 TP118 TP119 TP15 6
10k 6.3V 1000p 2.2 G C187 C20 2
X6S 50V 10V 1 1
B B
C206 C204 C203 C189 C235 C192 C19 9 C238
1 1000p 1 1000p C194 C236 C196 C237
1 0.1
C201 2 4 6 8
220 1 1 1000p 1 0.1 1
4V 50V 50V 16V 16V R167
R181 R180

G IC102 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
B

2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
B
TP1155
F

2 4 6 8
F

2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
100 100

1 3 5 7
100

1.5V REG
R154 R155 R156 R158 R160 R162 R165

TP1118

TP1120

TP1122
TP1119

TP1121

TP1123
100 100 100 100 R159 100 100 100
100
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
SIGNAL PATH TP1104

TP1100

TP1108

TP1106

TP1102

TP1101

TP1109

TP1110

TP1111

TP1112

TP1113

TP1114

TP1115

TP1116

TP1117
T P199
TP191

TP192

TP193

TP194

TP195

TP196

TP197

TP198
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDI O

TP1103
TP1105
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL

SDRA0 TP1107

SDRDQ1 0

SDRDQ1 1

SDRDQ1 2

SDRDQ13

SDRDQ14

SDRDQ15
SDRDQ7

SDRDQ8

SDRDQ6

SDRDQ9

SDRDQ5

SDRDQ4

SDRDQ3

SDRDQ2

SDRDQ1

SDRDQ0
REC

SDRA10

SDRRAS

SDRW E
SDRABP

SDRCAS
SDRC S
SDRA9

SDRA8

SDRA7

SDRA6

SDRA5

SDRA4

SDRA3

SDRA2

SDRA1
PB

SDRCLK

H SDRCKE

VIDEO ENCODER
4-17 4-18 VDC-001
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-41 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ND201
FLUORESCENT TUBE DISPLAY

FR-274 BOARD
FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN FUNCTION SW
-REF.NO.: 30,000 SERIES-
A

P16

P15

P14

P13

P12

P11

P10
10G

11G

12G

P9

P8

P7

P6

P5

P4

P3

P2

P1
1G

2G

3G

4G

5G

6G

7G

8G

9G
F1

F1

F2

F2
IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 51 52

JL269

JL275

JL284

JL286
JL250

JL260

JL272

JL274

JL276

JL280

JL285
JL238

JL278
JL234

JL235

JL241
JL242

JL245

JL251

JL265

JL270

JL273
JL253
JL236

JL237

JL239

JL252

JL271

JL283
JL244

JL258

JL279
JL263

JL277
JL243

JL246

JL248

JL262

JL268

JL282
JL240

JL249

JL261

JL264

JL281
JL267
JL259

JL266
JL247

SEG1 6

SEG1 5

SEG1 4

SEG1 3

SEG1 2

SEG1 1

SEG1 0

SEG9

SEG8

SEG7

SEG6

SEG5

SEG4

SEG3

SEG2

SEG1
GRD1 0

GRD1 1

GRD1 2
GRD1

GRD2

GRD3

GRD4

GRD5

GRD6

GRD7

GRD8

GRD9
L201 D210
100uH 1SS355TE-17
B+ JL223

GRD1

GRD2

GRD3

GRD4

GRD5

GRD6

GRD7

GRD8

GRD9
B Q201
2SD1898T100R D211
1SS355TE-17
DSC T201
DC-DC CONVERTER Q203

MM3Z6V2ST1
R209 C217

D216
10k TRANSFORMER C215 C216 0.1 2SB1197K-T-146-R
D208 0.1 22 50V 12V SWITCH
C201 1SS355TE-17 50V 50V B 11.8 11.8 B+ B+
100 B
25V C207 2 10
2700p C222
200V D209 0.01

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5
1SS355TE-17 R217 C211 16V
(RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950)

4.9
10k 0.1 B
3 1 JL224 11.1 B
D212

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34
SDPB31H3C0100
Q202 R223

VD D
4 7

GR3

GR8
VSS

GR1

GR2

GR4

GR5

GR6

GR7

GR9
2SD1898T100R 2.7k
DSC JL254 GRD10

33
1
5 8 R231 LED1 GR10
R10.2/P0 2.2K JL255 -22.5 GRD11
HDD

32
2
LED2 GR11
R0/P5 JL256 R4.9/P0 -22.5 GRD12
R215
IC201

31
3
6 9 5.6k LED3 GR12
R232 JL257 R0/P5
C 0
-22.5

30
4
R227 LED4 FL DRIVE VEE
27k Q205 R0/P3.9
R233 100k -24.8 SEG16

29
5
DTC124EUA-T106 R3.5/P0
OSC SG16
LED DRIVE R235 0 2.8 IC201 -22.3 SEG15

28
6
DOU T PT6315 SG15
0 Q206 FLD T R250 47 0 -24.2 SEG14

27
7
DTC143TUA-T106 DI N SG14
4.9
LED DRIVE FLC K R251 47 0 -17.8 SEG13

26
8
CLK SG13
FLSTB R252 47 4.9 -24.2 SEG12

25
9
Q204 STB SG12
MUN2213T1 R236 10k 4.9 -24.2 SEG11

10
C213

24
SWITCH K1 SG11
0.1
R237 10k 0 -24.2 SEG10

11

23
K2 SG10
0 -17.8

VSS

SG1

SG2

SG3

SG4

SG5

SG6

SG7

SG8

SG9
VDD
D214
SLI-343YC3F

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22
DVD

4.9

-22.2

SEG3 -22.3

-22.3

-22.3
-16.3

-22.3

-10.2

-10.3

-18.3
D

SEG1

SEG2

SEG4

SEG5

SEG6

SEG7

SEG8

SEG9
C221 C223
0.01 0.1
R225 16V 50V
270 B B

CN201 5P
JL201
TO
KEY2 5 CN203 17P
FL-178 JL202 JL20 6
BOARD
KEY1 4 17 FLPO N
CN106 JL203 JL20 7
THROUGH THE IR 3 16 IR
JL205 B+ JL20 8
FLR-010 FFC
GN D 2 15 V+12RI E
JL204 B+ B+ B+ JL20 9
(SEE PAGE 4-22) V +5F 1 14 V +5F
R201 R222 JL21 0
0 0 13 GND
FLD T JL21 1
12 FLDATA
FLCK JL21 2 TO
11 FLCLK AV-114/118
JL21 3
E D202
STZ6.8N-T146
FLSTB

JL21 4
10 FLSTB
BOARD(1/5)
CN105
R206 9 GND
0 JL21 5 THROUGH THE
8 HDD2 FAR-007 FFC
JL21 6
7 A_TV
R207
0
JL21 7 (SEE PAGE 4-6)
6 D_TV
R228 R238 R243 JL21 8
D203 10k 10k 10k
STZ6.8N-T146 5 DITV
JL21 9
4 PLTV
JL22 0
3 KEY1
J201 JL22 1
R205 2 KEY2
LINE 2 IN 0 JL22 2
3 4 D204 PROGRAM
3 4 S201 S203 S208 1 KEY3
STZ6.8N-T146
1 2
S VIDEO 1 2 CN202 11P CH+
5 6 2C JL225 OPEN/CLOSE REC_STOP
1 2C R244
SDET2 JL226 R229 R239
2.2k 2.2k 2.2k

F JL227
2

3
SDET2

GN D
S204
S209
CH-
7 INPUT_SELECT
VIDE O D205 2Y JL228
4 2Y TO R230
8 STZ6.8N-T146 JL229 AV-114/118 2.2k R240 R245
2.2k S210 2.2k
R213 5 GN D BOARD(1/5)
9 0 S213
R 2V JL230 CN106
10 6 2V R241
AUDI O FB201
THROUGH THE
HDD PLAY
0uH 3.3k
FB202 7
11 0uH GN D
FAR-006 FFC R246
L(MONO) 13
12
2L JL231
JL232
8 2L
S211 3.3k
SIGNAL PATH
9 GN D (SEE PAGE 4-6) R248
3.3k
D206 2R JL233
S207
R242
5.6k
STOP VIDEO SIGNAL
STZ6.8N-T146 10 2R
S212 AUDI O
11 GN D
DVD REC
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL

REC
D207
STZ6.8N-T146 PB
G
C204 C206 R218 R220
220p 220p 220k 220k

FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW

FR-274 4-19 4-20
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-55 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6

FL-178 BOARD
DV,USB,REMOCON,RECEIVER,POWER,SW
A -REF.NO.: 30,000 SERIES-

RDR-HX750/HX950
CN101
6P
JL101
TPB N 6
JL102 FL101
TO 0uH
TPBP 5
RD-065

3
JL103
BOARD(6/7) GND 4
CN5101
GND 3 CN103
THROUGH THE JL104
4P
RV-003 HARNESS TPAP 2 TPB-

2
JL105

1
TPAN 1 TPB+ DV IN
(SEE PAGE

2
TPA-
4-36)

3
TPA+

4
B
IC101
4

3
FL102 REMOTE CONTROL
0uH RECEIVER

IC101
C102 L104 GP1UM27XK0SF
1 0uH

GND
OUT
VCC
R109
33

4.9

4.9
D- VFB CN105
4P
2 1 C111
Pict Bridge 100
16V (POWER) CN106
USB 5P
JL117 TO
3 4 B type C107 S101
1 KEY2
C CN102
10P
USBDP 1
JL108
R105
33 D+ GND
0.01
JL118
2 KEY1
FR-274
BOARD
1 JL119 CN201
JL107 3 IR
GND THROUGH THE
2 R113 JL121
JL106 VDR102 VDR104 0 FLR-010 FFC
4 GND
USBDM 1 JL120
3 L105 B+
GND
0uH 5 V +5F (SEE PAGE 4-19)
TO 4 R112
JL110 0
RD-065 V+5USB
BOARD(6/7) 5 L102 CN104
JL109 B+ 0uH V+5 4P
CN5201 USBVFB
1

6 R108
THROUGH THE JL112 33 D-
USBDM 2 S102
2

7
RV-001 HARNESS C101 1
GND D+ ONE_TOUCH_DUB
3

8 R104
(SEE PAGE USBDP 2
JL111 33 GND USB
A type
4

9
4-34) L103
GND 0uH
10

DV, USB, REMOCON RECEIVER, POWER SW

4-21 4-22 FL-178
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RD-065 BOARD(1/7)
POWER BLOCK
-REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- C 4511 V +1R0 B+
4.7 V+1R 0
6.3V
B+ TP4502 TP4503 B V +2R5 B+
B+
A C 4507
C 4501
1
C 4535
1000p
V+3A B+
V+2R 5

100 6.3V 50V IC4561 V+3A

16V X6S B S-1112B50MC-L7JTFG V+3D B+
IC4511 C 4562 V+3D 1
B+ TP4504 TP4505 S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG IC4511 1
6.3V
TP4565 B+ V+5HD V+3V B+

5
1
CN4501 13P X6 S VI N VOUT V+3V TO (2/7)
C 4508 C 4502 C 4536 3.3V REG V+5D B+
220 1 1000p C456 3

2
EV+5.8 V 1 NC VI N GND V+5D
4V 6.3V 50V 1
X6S B 6.3V V+1R5_IN B+
NB

4
GND D 2 VSS CONT X6S V+1R5_IN
TP4506 TP4507
IC4561

5
SW+1.53V 3 ON/OFF VOUT GND D
C 4509 C 4537 C 4503 R4511
SW+1.53V 4 220 1000p 1 0 5V REG
B+ 4V 50V 6.3V
B+ V+3V
B X6S
TO GND D 5 C 4567 IC4562
SWITCHING TP4508 TP4509 C 4524
4.7 C 4513 TP4608 1 S-1112B33MC-L6STFG
REGURATOR SW+3.33V 6 6.3V 4.7 6.3V P_CONT2
B 6.3V X6S
CN201 C 4504 B V+3D TP6096 B+ V+3HD V+1R5_IN B+
0.1

5
1
THROUGH THE SW+3.33V 7 VI N VOUT V+1R5_IN
B+ 16V
V +12A B+
PR-076 HARNESS F
C 4570

2
GND D 8 IC4521 GND
1
V +12A
B+ TP4510 TP4511 S-1170B25UC-OTKTFG 6.3V V+3D B+
(SEE PAGE 4-38)
IC4521

4
V +12V 9 R4521 CONT NB X6S V+3D
R4501

RB501V-40TE-17
B GND 10
0 TP4501 C 4539
1000p C 4505
IC4502
2.5A C 4515
6.8k
NC VI N IC4562 V+5_AI N B+
V+5_AIN 2

4
50V 1 32V 47 2.5V REG B+

D4521
B 6.3V V+5_AO
V+5M 11 6.3V 3.3V REG TO (3/7)
VSS V+5_AO

2
X6S
TP4514 V+5_VI B+
GND M 12 ON/OFF VOUT V+5_VI

5
TP4512 TP4513 TP4571 C 4526 V+5_VO B+
V12M 13 15k RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950 V+5_VO
B+
C 4540
1000p
C 4506
0.1
I C4501
2.5A
32V C 4516
10
R4504 R4505 R4507
C 4522 C 4525
V +2R5
IC4571 GND D
16V 2.7k 2.7k 2.7k
50V 16V 1 4.7 R4574 1.8V REG GNDA
B F 6.3V 6.3V R4575
X6S B B+ 0 0 V+1R8

B+ V+1R5_IN D4571 TP4569 B+

R4573
RB501V-40TE-17
TP4572 TP4609 B+ V +1R0 0 V+3D B+
IC4531 V+3D
MM1701WHBE V +2R5 B+ 3
V+2R 5
C 4532
0.01 TO (4/7)
CONT CN 16V 4 5 GND D

4
R4531 B
IC4531 C4572 C4573
4.7

S-1132B18-U5T1G
0 220

ON/OFF

VI N
NC2 GND

3
C 4534
10 1.0V REG C 4571
C

IC4571
NC3 NC1 10V

2
4.7
C 6.3V V +1R8 B+
VI N VOUT B V+1R 8

VS S
C 4531

VOUT
1
C 4533 V+3D B+ 4

NC
1 V+3D
6.3V 6.3V
X6S X6S TO (5/7)
3 2 1 GND D

B+ V+5M

B+ V+12M V+3D B+
V+3D
TP4610 B+ V+3A B+ TP4570 B+ V +12A V+3HD B+
IC4541 V+3HD
C 4543
MM1563DFBE 1000p V+5HD B+ 5
R4541 50V R5445 R4581 V+5HD
0 B TP4567 0 100 Q4581
B+ V+5D 2SC4081T106R EV+5.8V B+ TO (6/7)

4
CONT CN EV+5.8V
1.2V REG

3
SUB GND L 4551 GND D
B+ 10uH B+ V+5_AO
C 4585 C 4586

2
VI N NC 0.1 100
16V 16V
C 4541 F

1
R4559 VO R4552
1
D 0 6.3V
X6S
C 4542
2.2
10V
0 B+ V+5_AIN V+3D B+
V+3D
B V+3A B+
R4554 V+3A
0 B+ V+5_VI V+5L B+
IC4541 R4553
V+5M B+
V+5L

V+5M
6
3V REG 0 B+ V+5_VO V+12M B+ TO (7/7)
V+12M
D4552 R4556
RB501V-40TE-17 0
GND D
B+ B+ V+5L
GND M

IC4552 IC4552
S-1170B50UC-OUJTFG
C 4553
5V REG C 4558 C 4559
100 100 1000p
16V 16V 50V
5
1

ON/OFF VOUT B
C 4555 TP4568
4.7
2

VSS
6.3V
B R4558 C 4556
E
3

NC VIN C 4557
22k 4.7
6.3V
B
0.01
16V
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
B
line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.

POWER BLOCK
RD-065 (1/7) 4-23 4-24
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

B+
RD-065 BOARD(2/7) B+
EMMA BLOCK B+
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- C1044 C1045
2P 2p (AS,BS)
1P 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
L 1831 R1812
220 B+ 1P (CS,DS)
IC1301
IC1302

NJM12904V(TE2)

NJM12904V(TE2)
O EM I I C 1812 C 1045 C 1044

+
C 1811 R1301

-
VREF V OUT
L 1821 R1802 G 2.2 1
* 50V
* 470

IC1301

IC1302
B+ C1312 R1312
B+
O EM I I
C 1802 C 1801
220 10V
B
6.3V
X6S
R1814 R1813
50V
CK CK
C 1301
2.2
10V
C 1302
0.1
16V
0.5% C 1315
2.2
10V
B
0.1
16V
F
1k
0.5%
VREF D OUT
SIGNAL PATH
G 2.2 1 B F
L 1811 15uH 33 330

+
10V 6.3V

-
B X6S R1302 VIDEO SIGNAL
C 1814 C 1813
1k
0.5% 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
AUDI O
R1804 R1803 150p 100p Q1811
L 1801 39uH 33 330 50V 50V ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
FSC BPF X 1002
X 1001
C 1804
330p
C 1803
220p
Q1801 24.576MHz 27MHz X101
TP1202
REC
VREF_D 16.9344MHz
VREF_D 50V 16V ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
CH HCL BPR R1303 C 1303
R193
A T/XDT 1k 0.1 C 1316 R1314 C 1313 PB

VREF_D
B AT/XDT
0
R114
0.5% 16V
F
10
10V
R1313
1k
0.5%
0 0.1
16V
7 HADRS7
33k
C F
HADRS7
TO (4/7) HADRS6
HADRS6
HADRS5
HADRS5
C 1304 R1030 R1031

1080P
10

XDVI
C 1805 C 1815 47 100 220 (AS,BS)

TXD0_LL
SPDIFSEL

RXD0_LL
0.047 0.047 6.3V
10V 10V 47 150 (CS,DS)
TO
B B (3/7,4/7)
TP1201
8 XRESET
TO 1080P
(3/7,4/7,5/7,7/7) 1080P

AOD0

AOBCK

AOLRCK

DACCLKO

ADCCLKO
NSCS

AIBCK0

AILRCK0
AIBD0
SPDIFO
SMCKOUT

SMDOUT

SMDIN
RXD1
XDVI
XDVI 11

JTC L

JTDI
EDIN T

JTMS

JTDO
JTMRS T
C 1058 C1027 TXD0_LL
0.01 C1028 SCL_VDEC TO (6/7)
R5856 0.1 0.1
16V R1013 10k 10V RXD0_LL
B 10k B 10V
B SDA_VDEC

VIOCLK
VIOD7

VIOD6

VIOD5

VIOD4

VIOD3

VIOD2

VIOD1

VIOD0
AIOBD
C

AIOBCK

AIOLRCK
R1181
B+ R1001

R1029
10k

R1030

R1031
82
10k
R1068
47k
* *
CN470 1
28P

K2

AG23

AG22
AF1
G2

K20

K23

AF21
L1
AC20

AB21

L20

L21

L24
H19

H20

G19

H21

M24

AE1

D18

AF22
F21
SP1ERRB/GPIO20 AD20

J19

J21

J22

J24

AD23

AD24
A T/XDT

AB22

AC22

AC24

AB20
AE21
AF23
Y19

AA20

AE20

AE24

AF24

K5
L3

L4

L5

AOBCK C19

AIOMCK0 C20
AOD0 E18

E20

AIBCK0 E19

AIOMCK1 E21
ATX D19

D20

AILRCK0 F19
K4

K3
28 AT/XDT

HCBP

HLCO

FSCO
JTMS

JTDO

FCBP

CLK24OUT

CLK27AOUT

XA2

TXD0B

RXD0B
HLCI
CLKPWM1/VIFLD/GPIO61

JTRST

JTCL

SMDOUT/SS0DOUT

AOLRCK
AIOLRCKSP0ERRB/GPIO30

SMCKOUT/SS0CKIN
CLK24IN

RXD1B/GPIO38

SP0REQB/GPIO33

AIOBCK/SP0CLK/GPIO31
NMI

RSTSWB

EDINT

FSCI

AIOBD/SP0STRT/GPIO32

VIOCLK/SP0EN/GPIO21

AIBD0
SP1EN/SS1EN/GPIO09

VIOD7/SP0DAT7/GPIO29

VIOD6/SP0DAT6/GPIO28

VIOD5/SP0DAT5/GPIO27
DCD0B/SS0SB/GPIO47
JTDI
SP1CLK/SS1CLK/GPIO08

CLKPWM0/GPIO60

VIOD4/SP0DAT4/GPIO26

VIOD3/SP0DAT3/GPIO25

VIOD2/SP0DAT2/GPIO24

VIOD1/SP0DAT1/GPIO23

VIOD0/SP0DAT0/GPIO22
CLK27AIN

XA1

TXD1B/GPIO39

CLK27BIN/GPIO6

SMDIN/SS0DIN
R4717 R4716 R470 9 R470 8 27 GND
10k 10k 10k 10k R4732
4.7k
CN1401 14P 26 SDA_VDEC

TRST 14
R1401 TP1401
22 JTMRS T IC4702 C 4702
CS R4715
10k IC4702 R4707 25 SCL_VDEC
R1414 TP1402 TC7SZ08FU(TE85R) R4713 R4731
22 HADRS7 BUFFER 1 10k 10k 4.7k
EJSNGEN 13 6.3V 24 GND
R1402 TP1403 X6S R4727 TP6045
22 JTDI 10k
TDI 12 VCC INB 23 TX1

1
TP1430 R4728 TP6048
AB23 V19 C 4705 10k
GND 11 SP1STRT/SS1STRT/GPIO10 VIVSB/RTS0B/GPIO36 1000p IN A 22 RX1

2
R1403 TP1429 50V
22 JTDO W19 U19 ADPOW VIOCLK B
TDO 10 SP1REQB/SS1ERRB/GPIO11 VIHSB/CTS0B/GPIO37 OUTY GND 21 GND

3
R1415 TP1406 R4723 R4729 TP6103
22 HADRS6 AH24 F17 AMUTE 0
DINTEN CSYNC/GPIO54 47
9 SP1DAT0/SS1DAT/GPIO12 20 XRESET
R1404 TP1404 C101 7
JTMS
D (FOR CHECK)
TMS 8
22 AG24
SP1DAT1/SS0CLK/GPIO13 VRBB
D24 0.1
10V 19 GND(RFE/XLL)
AC21 C23 B C 1016 C 4701
GND 0.1 1 IC4701
7 SP1DAT2/SS0EN/GPIO14 VCOMB 10V 18 GND
R1405 TP1405 C101 5 B 6.3V R4703 TP6063
22 JTCL AE22 C24 X6S TC74VCX245FK 100
TCK 0.1
6 SP1DAT3/SSOSTRT/GPIO15 VRTB 10V 17 VCLKI
AE23 F24 B C 1035 C 4704 R4701
0.1 TO VDC-001

20
GND 5 SP1DAT4/SS0ERRB/GPIO16 VRBR 1000p VCC DIR 16 GND

1
R1406 TP1407 10V 50V 100 BOARD
JTRS T C103 3 B TP6056
22 AD22 G21 0.1 R4721 B CN104

19
RST 4 SP1DAT5/SS0DAT/GPIO17 VCOMR OE A1 15 STREAM_7

2
R1416 TP1408 10V 100
22 HADRS5 AD21 F22 B C 1032 VIOD7 TP6057 THROUGH THE
0.1

18
JTSEL 3 SP1DAT6/GPIO18 VRTR B1 A2 14 STREAM_6

3
R1407 TP1409 10V FVR-001 FFC
EDIN T C102 9 B VIOD6 TP6058
22 AC23 G23 0.1

17
DINT 2 SP1DAT7GPIO19 VRBC B2 A3 13 STREAM_5

4
10V C 1030
TP1414 B+ B VIOD5 TP6059
H22 0.1 (SEE PAG

16
V+3 1 VCOMC B3 A4 12 STREAM_4

5
10V
C 1401 C121 C103 1 B VIOD4 TP6060
R1412 R1411 R1413 0.01 AF15 G22 0.1

15
2200p CBPD VRTC B4 A5 11 STREAM_3

6
10k 10k 47k 16V 10V
50V
B B+ C122 AG15 E22 B C 1047 VIOD3 TP6061
VRBY 0.1

14
CBBD B5 A6 10 STREAM_2

7
2200p 10V
50V C125 C103 4 B VIOD2 TP6069
1 AF18 D21 0.1

13
CEQDC VCOMY B6 A7 9 STREAM_1

8
6.3V R116 10V
C127 X6S 3.3k B C 1018 VIOD1 TP6062
0.047 AH19 VRTY D22 0.1

12
CDEF2 B7 A8 8 STREAM_0

9
10V R119 10V
B C128 0 AG19 VCLY E23
C101 9 B VIOD0
0.1 0.1 R4702

11
C1421

10
CDEF B8 GD 7 GND
E R1421
10k
R1422
10k
1
6.3V
C129
1
10V
AJ17 AB19
10V
B X525P
R4722
R4704
0
100
TP6066
X6S 6.3V CEQ CTS1B/TTXRQ/GPIO41 6 ALRCKI
C 1020 100 R4705 TP6067
X6S R109 AJ18 D23 GI 0
REQ 10 5 ADATA
CN1402 7P 6.2k ABI 16V
TP1410 TP1411 C130 R4706 TP6068
BI
TXD 1
TP1412 TP1413 RXD
4.7
6.3V
2012 C131
AF16

AF17
C
CAG ARI
F23

G24 C/RI
IC4701 C 4703
1
IC4703
TC74VHC125FK
0
4 ABCKI

RXD 2 0.068 CAGC2 6.3V R4714 3 GND

10V ACI
C133 B BUFFER X6S 0 TP6104
AG14 E24 YI
0.1

14
DTR 3 CMIRR AYI VCC 1G 2 SPDIF

1
10V R124
TP1425 B C134 0 AF14 B20
0.1

13
(FOR CHECK) CTS 4 CAMIRR COMP1 C 1001 4G 1A 1 GND

2
10V 0 . 1 10V B
TP1426 B+ B C135
0.01 AH18 B24 C 4706

12
V+5D 5 AGCIN COMP0 C 1002 1000p 4A 1Y TP6065

3
16V 0 . 1 10V B
TP1427 B 50V
R110 AG18 B22 C1006
IC4703 B

11
GNDD 6 1k RFO VREF 1 6.3V X6S 4Y 2G

4
C136
TP1428 232RST
0.1
T P131 AE17
IC1001 (1/5) A21 R1003

10
XRESET 7 CRC RSET1 680 BUFFER 3G 2A

5
10V 0.5%
C137 B
6800p AE16 AV ENC/DEC A23 R1004

9
CTEC RSET0 R4726 3A 2Y

6
16V 470
C144 0.5% PB/BOUT AIOBCK 22
0.01 AE18 A24
CBHLPP/CRAPC

8
VAB 3Y GND

7
16V
C145 B Y/GOUT
0.01 AF13 VAG B23
16V CBHWBL/CID IC1001
B C146 MC10050F1-105-LU1-A(AS,BS) PR/ROUT
F C147 C
10
10V
AG11
CREG MC10050F1-505-LU1-A(CS,DS) VAR
A22
R4725
22
AE15 B21 COUT AIOBD
0.33 CBC
6.3V VAC
B C148 AE14 YOUT AIOLRCK
0.33 CAD VAY A20
6.3V
C155 B R4724 R4712 R4711 R4710
0.47 AE12 22 CS
CWAGC 10k 10k 10k
6.3V
B C156 AE13 DGNDR K19
1800p CWHP
50V
C157 AF12 R4720 R4719 R4718 E
0.01 CADO N15 B+
16V DVDD33R 10k 10k 10k
B C158 AG12 Y15
0.01 CBCO AGND
16V
B
AGND Y14
C107 SPDIFO_LL
680p AG13 WALPF AGND Y13
50V YOUT
R104 B AJ16 YOUT
12k EXTR AGND Y12 COUT
C113 AD16 B+ COUT
4700p AH15 PCEFM2
50V AVDD33 PR/ROUT
C114 AD15 PR/ROUT
4700p AJ15
PCEFM1 AVDD33 Y/GOUT
50V
C115 AD14 B+ Y/GOU T
0.01 AH14 FCEFM2 AVDD33 PB/BOUT
G 16V
B AJ14 FCEFM1
AD13 PB/BOUT
AVDD33 R273 YI
C116
C120 AD12 0 B+ YI
0.1 AH13
0.1 10V ASY AVDD15 C/RI
10V R105
B 0 C103 C104 C106 C105 C152 C159 C154 C153 C/R I
B AJ13 M6 R274 220 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 0.1 1 10
IC1001-AJ2 EFM DLL_GND 0 4V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 16V 6.3V 16V BI
C117 AH17 L6 X6S F B B F X6S BI
9 1000p C100
1000p RFI_P DLL_VDD L 1004 GI
50V
B 50V AH16 A19 GI
TO (7/7) GNDS B RFI_M DA2_GND O EMI I X525P
C101 T P117 R271
Q102 AG16 C22 0 X525P
1000p RFEQOM G
50V DA1_GND AMUTE
RT1N141U-TP-1 T P118 B+ AMUTE
SWITCH B AG17 B19 C1051 C1052 C 1053 C164 C167 C162 C163
RFEQOP DA2_VDD3 10 1 1000p 1000p 0.1 1 220 ADPOW
10V 6.3V 50V 50V 16V 6.3V 4V
ADPOW
C21 C X6 S B F X6S
DA1_VDD3 ADCCLKO
T P119 AF20 H24 ADCCLKO
TEO/LE/SWRF1/SWRF3/RFP6 AD2_GND L 1024 DACCLKO 11
T P122 AF19 B+ DACCLKO
M23 TO (3/7)
FEO/LE/SWRF2/SWRF4/RFP5 AD1_GND AILRCK0
C 1005 C 1004 C 1003 O EMI I
T P123 AE19 H23 1000p 1 100 AILRCK0
ADIN/LE/RFP4 AD2_VDD3 B+ 50V 6.3V 4V
G
AIBCK0
L1023
T P128 AD18 X6S AIBCK0
MONI1/RFPM1 L23
AD1_VDD3 O EMI I AIBD0
TP6119 AD19 C 1041 C 1040 C 1039 AIBD0
H MONI2/RFPM2 PH_GND L22 1000p
50V
1
6.3V
X6S
100
4V
G
AOLRCK
TP6120 AC19 J20 B+ AOLRCK
MONI3/SWRF4/RFPM3 PH_VDD1
L1025 AOBCK
M10 K21 AOBCK
TEST_MODE HC_VDD3 AOD0
C102 5 C1024 O EMI I
M11 C1026 AOD0

TP1001
J23 1 100 G
FPIND PF_GND 1000p 6.3V 4V SPDIFO
50V X6S SPDIFO
M12 K24
LVSPOWD PF_VDD1 SMDIN
AD17 K22 SMDIN
TEST1 FC_VDD3 SMDOUT
DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD10(1.0V)

DVDD15(1.5V)

DVDD15(1.5V)

DVDD15(1.5V)

DVDD15(1.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD25(2.5V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)

DVDD33(3.3V)
B+ L100 3
B+ SMDOUT
O EMI SMCKOUT

PLL_GND
PLL_VDD
L1005 I
SMCKOUT
DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

15uH G
L1022 NSCS
TP1002 NSCS
O EM I RXD1
W10

M13

M14

M15
P10

P11

P12

R10

R11
N24

N10

N11

N12

N13

N14
L10

T10

T11

L11

L12

L13

L14

L15
F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

K10

K11

Y10

Y11

F10

F11

K12

K13

K14

K15
AA6

AB6
W6

B+ RXD1
P6

R6
N6

U6

G6

G7

H6

J6
A1

T6

V6

Y6

K6

K1

L2
F7

F8

F9

G
V+5D JTRS T
B+ JTRST
V+3A RXD
L 1002
B+ B+ B+ RXD
V+1R0 232RST
O EM I I L 1021
B+ B+ G B+ 232RST
V+2R5
L 1001 O EMI
I 1
V+3D
B+ B+ B+ G
I

TO (1/7) O EM I I
B+ G
V+3V B+
B+
V+1R5_IN

GNDD
C1009 C1010 C1062 C1063 C1064 C1065 C1007 C1008 C1059 C1060 C1061 C101 4 C1012 C1013 C 1066 C 1067 C 1068 C 1011 C1049 C104 8 C 1050 C 1038 C 1037 C 1036 C 1023 C 1022 C 1021
220 1 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 220 1 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 100 1 1 0.1 1000p 1000p 1000p 1 100 1000p 1 100 1000p 1 10
4V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 4V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 4V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 50V 50V 50V 6.3V 4V 50V 6.3V 4V 50V 6.3V 10V
X6 S X6S F X6 S X6S F X6 S X6S F X6S X6S X6S C

EMMA BLOCK
4-25 4-26 RD-065 (2/7)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

C 2501
R2501 1
680 6.3V
X6S Y_OUT
RD-065 BOARD(3/7)
Q2501
VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK YOUT ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
VIDEO BUFFER
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- R2502
150
0.5% C250 2
1
6.3V

IC3201 X6S

R2504
AUDIO DAC 680 CN2301 40P
R2304
C_OUT 0 TP2304
40 X525P
B+ YP_OUT TP2301

IC3201 COUT
Q2502 39 YP_OUT * MARKED:MOUNTED TEBLE
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 38 GND
AS,BS CS,DS
PCM1742KE R3229 R3228 VIDEO BUFFER
R3201 R3234 10k 10k R2505 CR_OUT TP2302
AOBCK 47 0 DACCLKO 150 37 CR_OUT C3303 15p/50V 5p/50V
0.5% C250 3

16
MCLK

1
BCKIN
R3233 1
R3202
0
R3206 6.3V 36 GND C3304 82p/50V 68p/50V
AOD0 47 47 NSCS X6S CB_OUT TP2303
R2506

15
ML

2
DATA 0 35 CB_OUT C3305 22p/50V 15p/50V
R3203 R3207 R2507
AOLRCK 47 47 SMCKOUT 680 34 GND
C3311 XX 7p/50V

14
MC TP2305

3
LRCKIN YP_OUT Y_OUT
R3208 33 Y_OUT
47 R3310 C3312 XX 7p/50V
SMDOUT *
B

13
MD

4
GND 32 GND
R3230 Q2503 TP2306
B+ 0 Y/GOUT
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
C_OUT C3313 0.01u/50V 10u/10V
31 C_OUT
VIDEO BUFFER R3337

12
V+3D ZEROL D3201
5
VDD R2508 C3314 XX 7p/50V
DAN202uT106 R3204 150 30 GND
B+ 0.5% C250 4 TP2307
0 AMUTE 1 Y_IN * C3315 XX 7p/50V

11
V+5_AO ZEROR
6
VCC 6.3V 29 Y_IN
C 3206 SMCKOUT X6S
R3302 C3316 XX 5p/50V
0.1 28 GND
16V
*

10
COM TP2308
7

VOUTL V SMDOUT C/R_IN

F R3209 R2510
100k 680 27 C/R_IN C3317 XX 68p/50V
AMUTE1 CB_OUT
AGND R3336
8

VOUTR 26 GND

9
C3318 XX 15p/50V
C 3201 C 3202
C 3219
220
C 3220
1
C 3203
1000p
C 3207
47 G_IN * TP2309
25 G_I N
1000 0.1 4V 6.3V 50V 6.3V C3319 0.01u/50V 10u/10V
6.3V 16V X6S PB/BOU T Q2504 R3232 0
F ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 24 GND
VIDEO BUFFER R3341 TP2310 C3320 XX 7p/50V
C 3204
330p
R2511
150
B_IN * 23 B_IN
50V 0.5% C250 5 R3342 C3321 XX 7p/50V
GNDA 1
6.3V
* 22 GND TO AV-114/118
TP3201 TP3202 X6S LCHOUT TP2311 BOARD (1/5 )
CN101 C3322 XX 5p/50V
21 L_OUT
R2513 TP2312 THROUGH THE
680 20 GNDA C3323 XX 68p/50V
C V+5_VO
B+ B+ CR_OUT RCHOUT TP2313
19 R_OUT
F RA-006 FFC
C3324 XX 15p/50V
B+ AMUTE1 R2302 0 TP2314 (SEE PAGE 4-6)
V+5_VI 18 AMUTE C3325 0.01u/50V 10u/10V
Q2505 TP2315
PR/ROU T ISA1602AM1TP-1EF RCHIN
P_CONT2 17 R_IN
VIDEO BUFFER C3329 XX 5p/50V
B+ R2514 C 2506
V+1R5_IN 150 10 16 GND
2 B+ LCHOUT
0.5% 10V
C LCHI N TP2317 C3330 XX 68p/50V
V+5_AIN 15 L_IN
TO R3224
(1/7)
C3331 XX 15p/50V
100
14 GND
R2301 3.3k TP2319 C3333 XX 1u/50V
B+ 13 P_CONT2
B+ TP2320
8
1

R3218 C 3216 C 3215 R3223

12 MRST
C3334 XX 1u/50V
22k 82p 82p 22k Q3302
50V 50V 0.5% RCHOUT C 3302 C3301 X RST 1 R3720 TP2321
0.5% 2SC4154TP-1EF 7p 7p
R3306 R3305 0 C3335 XX 1u/50V
7

470 11 XRST1
2

R3210 R3211 R3219

IC3202 R3227 Y EQ 50V 50V 0.5%
330
C 3342
UPC4558G2-E1 SMDOUT R3002 0 TP2322
1.2k 10k 6.8k 100 1
0.5% 0.5% C 3307 6.3V 10 DAM_TO_T C3339 XX 1u/50V
R3308 TP2323
6

C 3213 10 R3004 0
3

560p R3222 10V 10

L 3301 L3302 9 HSM_TO_T C3340 XX 1u/50V
50V 6.8k C Y_IN
IC3202 YI
R3307
18uH 10uH DAT_TO_M R3006 0 TP2324
5

8 DAT_TO_M
4

C3341 XX 1u/50V
C 3214 R3221 C 3332 * C3303 C3304 C 3305 R3301 SMCKOUT R3003 0 TP2325
D R3216
1.2k
0.5%
R3217
10k
0.5%
560p
50V
100 AUDIO LPF 1
6.3V
X6S
R3309
680
* * *
47
HST_TO_M R3007 0 TP2326
7 ASCK
L3303 XX 18uH
6 HST_TO_M
B+ Q3301 TU_DSDA R3008 0 TP6105 L3304 XX 10uH
V +12A ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 5 DSDA
R3220 Y EQ TU_CEC R3009 0 TP6106 L3305 XX 18uH
100 4 CEC
Q3304 C3312 C3311 TU_DSCL R3010 0 TP6107
R3344 L3306 XX 10uH
C 3211 C 3212
C 3218 C 3217
100 0.1
* * * * DDC_SW1 R3011 0 TP6100
3 DSCL
R3215 0.1 C3339 L3307 XX 18uH
R3213 R3214 22k 100 16V 16V C3333 2 DDC_SW1
680 6.8k 16V 16V F
F * R3314
L3303 L3304
R3312 * TU_HPD R3012 0 TP6108
1 HDP L3308 XX 10uH
* *
C/RI
R3313
* * C/R_IN
C2305
R3005 1 Q3303 XX ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
GNDD C3313 R3315 * C3329 C3330 C3331 Q3303
10k 6.3V
X6S
680 Q3304 XX 2SC4154TP-1EF
* * * * * TP2327 TP2329 TP233 1

TP2328 TP2330 Q3305 XX ISA1602AM1TP-1EF

Q3306 XX 2SC4154TP-1EF
IC3101 Q3306 C3314 C3315

R3101
A K5358AET-E2 IC3101 * * *
R3317
* TU_HPD
TU_HPD
Q3307 XX ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
E RCHIN 0 AUDIO ADC
C3334
* R3319 R3318
C3340
*
DDC_SW 1
Q3308 XX 2SC4154TP-1EF
16

AINR CKS0 DDC_SW1

1

R3102 * L3305 L3306

* G_IN TU_DSCL 13
LCHI N 0 GI
R3324
* * R2316 TU_DSCL
TO
R3302 0 47
15

AINL CKS2 10k

2

TU_CEC
(6/7)
B+
R3113
10k
C3319 R3320
680
* C3316 C3317 C3318 Q3305
TU_DSD A
TU_CEC R3307 1.8k 0.5% 5.6k 0.5%
* * * * *
14

CKS1 DIF TU_DSDA

3

R3310 10k XX
R3103
C 3105 0 ADPOW
0.1 R3312 XX 470 0.5%
13

VCOM PDN
4

16V 14
F R3107 Q3308 C3320 C3321 HSMTOT
47 AIBCK0 R3322 R3313 XX 5.6k 0.5%
* * * * TO
12

AGND SCLK HSTTOM

5

C3335 C3341 (4/7)

R3104 R3111 R3314 XX 10
0 0 ADCCLKO * R3326
L3307 L3308
R3323 *
11

VA MCLK *
6

* * * B_IN R3317 XX 330

XRST1

C 3104 R3108 BI
1 47 AILRCK0 R3325
6.3V C 3103 R3318 XX 470 0.5%
10

VD LRCK X525P
7

100
X6S
16V R3109
C3325 R3327
680
* C3322 C3323 C3324 Q3307
SPDIFO
C 3701 R3738
47 AIBD0 * * * * * BI SPDIFO R3319 XX 10
0.01 DGND SDTO BI
9
8

10k GI
16V GI
B R3105 R C/RI R3322 XX 330
1M 3106 C/RI
F B+
10k YI
PR/ROUT
PB/BOUT
YI
PR/ROUT
R3323 XX 470 0.5%
IC3707 Y/GOU T PB/BOUT
PST3813UL Y/GOUT R3324 XX 5.6k 0.5%
COUT
YOUT COUT
AMUTE YOUT R3325 XX 5.6k 0.5%
4 GND OUT 1 SMDOUT AMUTE
C 3108 C 3107 C 3106 R3716 SMDOUT R3326 XX 10
C3738 33 SMCKOUT
220 1 1000p RDR-HX650/HX750/HX750 NSCS SMCKOUT
4V 6.3V 50V 1 2
3 NC VDD NSCS 12
10
TO
SPDIFSEL
X6S
IC5701 R3715
6.3V

IC3707
DACCLKO
AOBCK
AOD0
DACCLKO
AOBCK TO
R3336 0 47

SELECT 0 AOD0 (2/7) R3337 10k XX

(2/7,4/7) AOLRCK
MRST AOLRCK
D3712 AIBD0
RB501V-40TE-17 AILRCK0 AIBD0 R3341 0 47
232RST ADCCLKO AILRCK0
IC5701 AIBCK0 ADCCLKO R3342 10k XX
D3711 TC74VHC00FT(EKJ) ADPOW AIBCK0
R5705 SPDIFO_LL ADPOW
RB501V-40TE-17 JTRST B+ 0 SPDIFO_LL
R3344 XX 330
8 SMDIN
14
1

XRESET 1A VCC RXD1 SMDIN

RXD RXD1
TO IC3701
C 3703 SPDIF O JTRST RXD
(2/7,4/7,5/7,7/7)
13

TC7WH34FU(TE12R)
2

1 1B 4B 232RST JTRST
6.3V 232RST
G DAT_TO_M
X6S RDR-GX350
R5702
12
3
1

1A VCC 1Y 4A R5708 470

R3704 390
100 SMDI N
11
4
2

3Y 1Y 2A 4Y
Q5701
HST_TO_M RXD SPDIFO_LL 2SC4154TP-1EF
10
5
3

2A 3A 2B 3B DIGITAL OPUT
R3705 L5701
IC3702
TC7SH08FU(T5RSOYJF)
100 0uH
TP609 4
JA5701
SIGNAL PATH
6

9
4

GND 2Y 2Y 3A
C 3705 R5701 DIGITAL OUT
1000p 470 R5703 R5706 TP609 5
50V 680 75
C 5704 COAXIAL
1 VIDEO SIGNAL
7

GND 3Y
1

B R3703 0.5% 50V

100 RXD1 R5704
150 R5707 AUDI O
2

C 3704 100k
10 R3708
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
IC3701
3

10V 10k
C 3706 C 3707 C
1000p 1
50V 6.3V
BUFFER
REC
B X6S C570 7 C5705 C 5708 C 5702 C5706
1 1000 p 220 1 1000p
50V
B+
6.3V
X6S B
4V 6.3V
X6S
50V
B
PB

H IC3702
AND GATE

VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK
RD-065 (3/7) 4-27 4-28
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

RD-065 BOARD(4/7) IC1001 (2/5)

MEMORY BLOCK AV ENC/DEC
IC1001
MC10050F1-105-LU1-A (AS,BS)
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- B+ MC10050F1-505-LU1-A (CS,DS)

R253 R252 R248 R256

IC201 MD0
10k 10k 10k 10k
Y3
MD0 DADD00
B4 DADRS0

MD 0 FLASH ROM MD1 AA4 A4 DADRS1

MD1 DADD01
IC201
MD 1

MD 2 C280
K4S641632K-UC60T MD2

MD3
AB1
MD2 DADD02
C5 DADRS2

DADRS3
IC1201 C1215
1 AA5 B5
DDR SDRAM

54
VSS3 DADD03 100

1
6.3V VDD1 MD3 C1235 4V
MD 5 MD 0 X6S MD15 MD4 AB3 E1 DADRS4 10 B+

53
DQ15 DADD04 10V

2
DQ0 MD4 IC1201
C287
MD5 DADRS5
C B+ K4H511638C-UCB3T C 1204
1 AA3 E2 1

52
DADD05

3
6.3V VDDQ1 VSSQ4 MD5 6.3V
MD 1 X6S MD14 MD6 DADRS6 C 1202 X6S
W4 D1

66
51
DADD06 1

4
R319 DQ14 R318

1
DQ1 MD6 VDD1 VSS3
33 33 6.3V
MD 2 MD13 MD7 DADRS7 R1241 R1248
B Y4 D2 R1245 X6S R1255

65
50
DADD07

5
DQ13 0 0

2
DQ2 MD7 22 DQ0 DQ15 22
C285 MD8 DADRS8 R1281 DDATA0 C 1203 DDATA2 3
1 W5 D3 0.1

64
49
6
47

3
VSSQ1 VDDQ4 6.3V MD8 DADD08 16V VDDQ1 VSSQ5
MD 3 X6S MD12 MD9 W3 E4 DADRS9 DADRS5 TADRS5 DDATA1 F DDATA2 2

63
48
7
DQ14

4
DQ3 DQ12 MD9 DADD09 DQ1
MD 4 MD11 MD10 TP160 Y5 C4 DADRS10 DADRS9 TADRS9 DDATA2 DDATA2 1

62
47
8
DQ13

5
DQ4 DQ11 MD10 DADD10 DQ2
C281 C 1205
1 MD11 Y2 D4 DADRS11 DADRS0 TADRS0 DDATA3 0.01 DDATA2 0

61
VSSQ3

46
9
VDDQ5

6
6.3V VDDQ2 MD11 DADD11 VSSQ1 16V
MD 5 X6S MD10 MD12 DADRS12 DADRS1 TADRS1 B
AC2 E5

10

60
45
R320 R317 DQ12

7
DQ5 DQ10 MD12 DADD12 DQ3
MD 6 33 33 MD 9 MD13 DDATA0
AB5 F5 R1242 R1246 R1256 R1249

11

59
44
0 22 22

8
DQ6 DQ9 MD13 DQ00 DQ4 DQ11 0
C288 C290 C 1216
0.1 MD14 AA1 F4 DDATA1 DDATA4 DDATA1 9
0.1 1

12

58
43

9
16V VSSQ2 VDDQ3 16V MD14 DQ01 6.3V VDDQ2 VSSQ4
F R1282
MD 7 F MD 8 MD15 Y1 G5 DDATA2 47 DDATA5 X6S DDATA1 8

13

10

57
42
C282 DQ7 DQ8 MD15 DQ02 DADRS4 TADRS4 DQ5 DQ10
1 MA0 AE3 G4 DDATA3 DDATA6 DDATA1 7

14

11

56
41
6.3V VDD2 VSS2 MA0 DQ03 DADRS6 TADRS6 DQ6 DQ9
X6S R206
LDQM C284 CAS Z 33 DDATA4 DDATA7 C 1210 DDATA1 6
1 AD3 J4 1000p

15

12

55
40
LDQM N.C/RFU MA1 DQ04 DADRS10 TADRS10 VSSQ2 VDDQ4
6.3V 50V
WE Z X6S UDQ M MA11 AF3 J5 DDATA5 B
16 UDQM

13

54
39
WE R281 MA2 DQ05 DADRS3 TADRS3 DQ7 DQ8
CAS Z 0 MCLK RAS Z AE5 H4 DDATA6
17

38

14

53
CAS CLK MA3 DQ06 NC1 NC6
C RAS Z MCKE MA2 AE4 H5 DDATA7
C 1206
0.01
18

37

15

52
RAS CKE MA4 DQ07 R1243 16V VDDQ3 VSSQ3 R1257 R1250
R210 R1247 22
C291 MA5 DDATA8 DDQS0 0 22 B 0 DDQS2
1000p 33 AD2 A8 R1283
19

36

16

51
CS N.C MA5 DQ08 LDQS UDQS
50V R205 47
MB A B MA11 MA6 33 AD1 B8 DDATA9 DADRS11 TADRS11 C 1213
20

35

17

50
BA0 A11 MA6 DQ09 NC2 NC5 0.1
C 1207 16V
MA 9 MA3 AC5 C8 DDATA1 0 DADRS2 TADRS2 F
1000p
21

34

18

49
BA1 A9 MA7 DQ10 50V VDD2 VREF
MA10 MA 8 MA4 AD4 A7 DDATA1 1 DADRS7 TADRS7 B
22

33

19

48
A10/AP A8 R202 MA8 DQ11 R1244 R1240 NC VSS2 R1258 R1251
MA 0 MA 7 MA7 33 DDATA1 2 DADRS8 TADRS8 DDM 0 33 22 22 33 DDM 2
AC1 B6
23

32

20

47
A0 A7 MA9 DQ12 LDM UDM
MA 1 MA 6 MA10 AC3 A6 DDATA1 3 TW E TCLKNO
24

31

21
/WE

46
A1 A6 MA10 DQ13 /CK
R203
MA 2 MA 5 MA9 33 AF5 C7 DDATA1 4 TCAS TCLKO
25

30

22
/CAS

45
A2 A5 (PB2) DQ14 CK
R204
MA 3 MA 4 MB A 33 AD5 B7 DDATA1 5 TRAS
26

29

/RAS

23

44
A3 A4 MBA DQ15 CKE
C283 MA8 DDATA1 6 TCS C 1218 R1252
1 AB2 G1 1
27

28

24

43
VDD3 VSS1 UDQM DQ16 /CS NC4 33
6.3V R1284 6.3V
X6S C289 MA1 DDATA1 7 DADRS12 TADRS12 C 1208 X6S TADRS1 2
AA2 G2 47 1

25

42
1000p LDQM DQ17 NC3 A12
50V B+ R1285 6.3V
C286 B UDQM AB4 G3 DDATA1 8 DBA0 47 TBA0 TBA0 X6S TADRS1 1

26

41
10 MCLKOUT DQ18 BA0 A11
10V R1286
LDQM DDATA1 9 DBA1 TBA1 TBA1 TADRS9
D C AC4 F1 47

27

40
MCKE DQ19 BA1 A9
MCKE
AF2 H3 DDATA2 0 TADRS10 TADRS8

28

39
WE Z WEB DQ20 A10/AP A8
AF4 H2 DDATA2 1 TADRS0 TADRS7
R211

29

38
RASB DQ21 A0 A7
HADRS13

0 R1287
MCLK AE2 H1 DDATA2 2 47 TADRS1 TADRS6

30

37
CASB DQ22 DW E TW E A1 A6
R117
68 J3 DDATA2 3 TADRS2 TADRS5

31

36
DQ23 DCS0B TCS A2 A5
R1071
10k P20 D9 DDATA2 4 TADRS3 TADRS4

32

35
RADD00/GPIO01 DQ24 DRAS TRAS A3 A4
HADRS1 Y20 E9 DDATA2 5 C 1217

33

34
RADD01 DQ25 DCAS TCAS 1 VDD3 VSS1
6.3V
HADRS2 Y24 D8 DDATA2 6 X6S
RADD02 DQ26
IC1102 HADRS3 AA22
RADD03 DQ27
E8 DDATA2 7
R1288 R1277
0
C 1209
1000p
C 1211
0.1
16V
FLASH ROM HADRS4 W23 DDATA2 8 DCLK O 22 TCLKO 50V
R1035 D7 B F
R1034 RADD04 DQ28
B+ 10k 10k
HADRS5 DDATA2 9 C 1231
V23 E7 R1279 C 1236
IC1102 DQ29 10

HADRS5
HADRS5 S29GL064A90TFIR90H C 1101
1000p
HADRS6 Y23
RADD05

RADD06 DQ30
D6 DDATA3 0 DCLKNO
R1289
22
390 TCLKNO
10V
C IC1221 100
4V
50V R1278 DDR SDRAM C 1223
HADRS6 HADRS16 B HADRS17 HADRS7 V21 E6 DDATA3 1 C 1221
0 1
48

A15 DQ31 1
1

HADRS6 A16 RADD07 IC1221

E 7 HADRS7 HADRS15 HADRS8 AA23 C3 DCS0B
6.3V
X6S K4H511638C-UCB3T
6.3V
X6S
47
2

HADRS7 A14 BYTE RADD08 DCS0B

TO (2/7) A T/XDT HADRS14 HADRS9 Y22 E3 C 1222

66
46

VSS2 0.1
3

1
A T/XDT A13 RADD09 DCS1B VDD1 VSS3
16V
VREF_D HADRS13 HDATA1 5 HADRS10 P22 A2 DRAS R1261 R1265 F R1273 R1268

65
45
4

22 22 0

2
VREF_D A12 DQ15/A-1 RADD10 DRASB 0 DQ0 DQ15
HADRS12 HDATA7 HADRS11 DCAS DDATA8 C 1219 DDATA3 1
U22 B2 1

64
44
5

3
A11 DQ7 RADD11 DCASB 6.3V VDDQ1 VSSQ5
HADRS11 HDATA1 4 HADRS12 P23 C2 DW E DDATA9 X6S DDATA3 0

63
43
6

DQ14

4
A10 DQ14 RADD12 DWEB DQ1
HADRS10 HDATA6 HADRS13 U21 F3 DDM 0 DDATA1 0 DDATA2 9

62
42
7

DQ13

5
A9 DQ6 RADD13 DDQM0 DQ2
C 1224
HADRS9 HDATA1 3 HADRS14 U20 A5 DDM 1 DDATA1 1 0.01 DDATA2 8

61
41
8

VDDQ5

6
A8 DQ13 RADD14 DDQM1 VSSQ1 16V
R1107 B
HADRS20 0 HDATA5 HADRS15 AB24 J1 DDM 2

60
40
9

DQ12

7
A19 DQ5 RADD15 DDQM2 DQ3
HADRS21 HDATA1 2 HADRS16 R24 B9 DDM 3 R1262 R1266 R1274 R1269
DQ11

59
39
10

0 0

8
A20 DQ12 RADD16 DDQM3 22 DQ4 22
HWS0 HDATA4 HADRS17 M21 DDQS 0 DDATA1 2 C 1225 DDATA2 7
F2 0.01

58
38
11

9
WE DQ4 RADD17 DDQS0 16V VDDQ2 VSSQ4
C 1113 HADRS18 DDQS 1 DDATA1 3 B DDATA2 6
1 N21 C6

57
37
12

10
8 XRESET
R1110
RESET VCC 6.3V RADD18 DDQS1 DQ5 DQ10
HADRS22 0 X6S HDATA1 1 HADRS19 T23 J2 DDQS 2 DDATA1 4 DDATA2 5

56
A21
36
13

11
TO DQ11 RADD19 DDQS2 DQ6 DQ9
(2/7,3/7,5/7,7/7) HDATA3 HADRS20 DDQS 3 DDATA1 5 C 1229 DDATA2 4
R1191 R1164 R1163 R22 C9
F 1000p

55
35
14

12
4.7k 4.7k 4.7k WP/ACC DQ3 RADD20 DDQS3 VSSQ2 VDDQ4 50V
R1103 HDATA1 0 HADRS21 W20 DBA0 B
B3
0
IC200

54
34
15

13
RY/BY DQ10 RADD21 DBA0 DQ7 DQ8
HADRS19 B+ HDATA2 HADRS22 P24 A3 DBA1

53
33
16

14
A18 DQ2 RADD22 DBA1 EEP ROM NC1 NC6
HADRS18 HDATA9 (NOT USE) M20 DCKE SO C 1226
D5 1000p

52
32
17

15
A17 DQ9 HADRS23 RADD23/GPIO02 DCKE R1263 R1267 50V VDDQ3 VSSQ3 R1275 R1270
HADRS8 HDATA1 HSTTOM DCLKO SCLK DDQS1 0 22 B 22 0 DDQS3
N19 C1

51
31
18

16
A7 DQ1 R1199 RADD24/GPIO03 DCLK LDQS UDQS
HADRS7 HDATA8 HSMTOT 10k P19 B1 DCLKNO C 1057 C 1214

50
30
19

17
A6 DQ8 RADD25/GPIO04 DCLKB 0.1 IC200 NC2 NC5 0.1
16V C201 16V
HADRS6 HDATA0 HDATA0 W21 SCLK SST25VF016B-50-4C-S2AF-T 0.1 C 1227
F6 F 1 F

49
29
20

18
A5 DQ0 RDATA00 DVREF 10V VDD2 VREF
R1132 R1028 B 6.3V
HADRS5 47 HDOE 10k HDATA1 Y21 A9 SI CSO Z X6S

48
28
21

19
VDD

1
A4 OE RDATA01 DIHM CE R1264 R1260 NC VSS2 R1276 R1271

8
R1021 R1027 R1037 R1036 33 22 22 33
10k HADRS4 10k HDATA2 AA21 C10 C 1056 SI C202 DDM 1 DDM 3
10 100 43

47
27
22

20
VSS1 1 HOLD 1

2
SPDIFSEL A3 RDATA02 DILM SO LDM UDM

7
0.5% 0.5% 6.3V R201 6.3V
HADRS3 HCS0 HDATA3 U23 X6 S 10k X6S TW E TCLKNO
TO

46
26
23

21
SCK /WE

3
A2 CE RDATA03 WP /CK

6
(2/7,2/7)
HADRS2 HADRS1 HDATA4 V22 AD9 SCLK TCAS TCLKO

45
25
24

22
SFSCK SI

4
A1 A0 RDATA04 VSS /CAS CK

5
HDATA5 T24 AD10 SI TRAS
R1153 R1161 R1195

44
23
RDATA05 SFSI /RAS CKE
B+ 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k R107
HDATA6 SO B+ TCS R1272
U24 AD8 47k 33 R1219

43
24
V+3D RDATA06 SFSO /CS NC4 0
G (RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950)
R1033
10k
R1032
10k HDATA7 N23 AD11 CSOZ TADRS1 2

42
A12

25
3 RDATA07 SFCS0B NC3
HDATA8 R23 TBA0 TADRS1 1

41
26
TO (1/7) GND D RDATA08 BA0 A11
C 1104 C 1105
B+ 1 0.1 HDATA9 M22 F18 R219 TBA1 TADRS9

40
R220

27
V +2R5 6.3V 16V RDATA09 IR_OUT/GPIO53 4.7k CN201 10P BA1 A9
X6S F 4.7k
HDATA1 0 T22 AA19 MD 0 T P201 TADRS10 TADRS8

39
28
RDATA10 FB/TTX/RTS1B/GPIO40 1 PW A10/AP A8
R1182 R1016
HDATA1 1 T21 V20 JL999 10k 10k
MD 1 T P202 TADRS0 TADRS7

38
29
RDATA11 GCSB0 2 A9(ATA) A0 A7
HDATA1 2 P21 T20 JL997 MD 2 T P203 TADRS1 TADRS6

37
30
RDATA12 GCSB1 3 D5(AG) A1 A6
HDATA1 3 N22 R19 SCL_G P MD 5 T P204 TADRS2 TADRS5

36
31
RDATA13 GCSB2/GPIO5 4 D1(SL) A2 A5
HSTTOM HDATA1 4 N20 T19 T P205 TADRS3 TADRS4
R1111

35
32
HSTTOM RDATA14 GCSB3/GPIO6 5 D0(MA) A3 A4
14 100k
HSMTOT HDATA1 5 SDA_GP HADRS13 T P206 C 1220 DCKE
R21 R20 (FOR CHECK) 1

34
33
HSMTOT RDATA15 GRDYB/GPIO7 6 GN D VDD3 VSS1
TO (3/7) R1018 6.3V
HDOE 0 W22 W24 JL998 T P210 X6S R1205
FOEB/GOEB FCSB1 7 XRESET 10k
R1019 T P207
HWS0 0 AA24 V24 REM O C 1228 TP614
FWEB/GWED FCSB0 8 TX_FE 1000p
R1040 REMI T P208 50V C 1212 C1230 C1291
100 9 RX_FE B 0.1 0.1 0.1
0.5% 16V 16V 16V
T P209 B+ F F
H R221
47k
R222
47k R223 10 V+3D
F
R1039 22 SCL_GP
43 SCL_GP
R1017 0.5% 15
A T/XDT

HCS0 0 SDA_GP
SDA_GP
TO (6/7)

REM I
REM I
B+ REM O
REM O 16

VREF_D
SI
SI TO (7/7)
SCLK
SCLK

MEMORY BLOCK
4-29 4-30 RD-065 (4/7)
RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RD-065 BOARD(5/7)
SATA/IDE IF
-REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- IC1001 (3/5)
A AV ENC/DEC
IC1001
CN3801 40P
MC10050F1-105-LU1-A (AS,BS)
TP3801 R3808 MC10050F1-505-LU1-A(CS,DS)
100 AT0RESET
HRESET 40

GND 39
TP3802 AT0DATA7
HDB7 38 R3810
TP3803 33 AT0DATA8 AT1DATA0 M4 V14 AT0DATA0
HDB8 37 AT1D00 AT0D00/HDD0
TP3804 AT0DATA6 AT1DATA1 R1 U11 AT0DATA1
HDB6 36 AT1D01 AT0D01/HDD
TP3805 AT0DATA9 AT1DATA2 R4 U12 AT0DATA2
HDB9 35 AT1D02 AT0D02/HDD2
TP3806 AT0DATA5 AT1DATA3 R2 W15 AT0DATA3
HDB5 34 AT1D03 AT0D03/HDD3
R3811
TP3807 33 AT0DATA10 AT1DATA4 N5 V11 AT0DATA4
HDB10 33 AT1D04 AT0D04/HDD4
TP3808 AT0DATA4 AT1DATA5 R3 T12 AT0DATA5
B HDB4 32
TP3809 AT0DATA11 AT1DATA6
AT1D05 AT0D05/HDD5
AT0DATA6
P4 P13
HDB11 31 AT1D06 AT0D06/HDD6
TP3810 AT0DATA3 AT1DATA7 T1 R15 AT0DATA7
HDB3 30 AT1D07 AT0D07/HDD7
R3812
TP3811 33 AT0DATA12 AT1DATA8 T2 R13 AT0DATA8
HDB12 29 AT1D08 AT0D08/HDD8
TP3812 AT0DATA2 AT1DATA9 P5 V10 AT0DATA9
HDB2 28 AT1D09 AT0D09/HDD9
TP3813 AT0DATA13 AT1DATA10 T3 P15 AT0DATA10
HDB13 27 AT1D10 AT0D10/HDD10
TP3814 AT0DATA1 AT1DATA11 R5 U13 AT0DATA11
HDB1 26 AT1D11 AT0D11/HDD11
R3813
TP3815 33 AT0DATA14 AT1DATA12 U1 R14 AT0DATA12
HDB14 25 AT1D12 AT0D12/HDD12
TP3816 AT0DATA0 AT1DATA13 N4 U15 AT0DATA13
HDB0 24 AT1D13 AT0D13/HDD13
TP3817 AT0DATA15 AT1DATA14 U2 W13 AT0DATA14
HDB15 23 AT1D14 AT0D14/HDD14
AT1DATA15 W1 T14 AT0DATA15
GND 22 AT1D15 AT0D15/HDD15
AT1ADR0 U3 W14 AT0ADR0
GND 21 AT1DA0 AT0DA0/HDA0
DVD TP3818 R3814
22 AT0DMARQ AT1ADR1 W2 U10 AT0ADR1
UNIT DMARQ 20 AT1DA1 AT0DA1/HDA1
C GND 19
AT1ADR2 T5
AT1DA2 AT0DA2/HDA2
U14 AT0ADR2

TP3819 R3816
82 AT0DIOW AT1DIOW U5 P14 AT0DIOW
XDIOW 18 AT1DIOWB AT0DIOWB/DIOW
A T1DIOR V1 R12 AT0DIOR
GND 17 AT1DIORB AT0DIORB/DIORB
TP3820 R3817
82 AT0DIOR A T1INTRQ M5 V12 AT0INTRQ
XDIOR 16 AT1INTRQ AT0INTRQ/HINTRQ
AT1DMACK V2 V15 AT0DMACK
R3862 AT0DMACKB/HDMACKB
GND 15 0 AT1DMACKB
TP3821 R3818
22 AT0IORDY AT1DMARQ V5 T15 AT0DMARQ
IORDY 14 AT1DMARQ AT0DMARQ/HDMARQ
TP3822 AT1CS0 T4 W12 AT0CS0
HCSEL 13 AT1CS0B AT0CS0B/HCS0B
TP3823 R3820
82 AT0DMACK AT1CS1 V3 W11 AT0CS1
XDMACK 12 AT1CS1B AT0CS1B/HCS1B
AT1IORDY U4 T13 AT0IORDY
GND 11
TP3824 R3821
22 AT0INTRQ AT1RESET V4
AT1IORDY AT0IORDY/IORDY
V13 AT0RESET
SIGNAL PATH
INTRQ 10 AT1RESETB AT0RESETB/HRSTB
TP3825 TP1005
XIOCS16 9 HIOCS16B
AD7 VIDEO SIGNAL
TP3826 R3823
82 AT0ADR1 RXD2_BRIDGE AH23 AC6 TP1003 AUDI O
HA1 8 RXD2B/GPIO42 PDIAGB
TP3827 TXD2_BRIDGE AD6 TP1004 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
AJ24
D XPDIAG 7
TP3828 AT0ADR0
TXD2B/GPIO43 DASPB

HA0 6
REC
R3824
TP3829 82 AT0ADR2
HA2 5
TP3830 AT0CS0
PB
XCS1FX 4
TP3831 AT0CS1
XCS3FX 3
TP3832
XDASP 2
TP3834

RXD2_BRIDGE

TXD2_BRIDGE

AT1CS0

AT1CS1

PDIAG

DAS P
GND 1 TP3835

R3871
22k
(RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950) R3828

R5692

R5693

R5606

R5607
22K

82

82
0

0
CN3802 40P R3835 C5632
C5604 C5631 C5630

R5612

R5613

R5614
TP3836 33 AT1RESET C5605

10k
0.01

1k

1k
Reset# 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
16V 16V 16V 16V
16V B
B B B B
GND 2

R5619
TP3837 AT1DATA7

1k
DD7 3
R3837 B+
E DD8 4
TP3838 33 AT1DATA8

TP3839 AT1DATA6
DD6 5 B+ R5610
TP3840 AT1DATA9

R5617
1k

1k
DD9 6
TP3841 R5609 R5615
AT1DATA5 10k 1k
DD5 7
R3838 R5608 R5618
TP3842 33 AT1DATA10 10k 10k
DD10 8 C5615
TP3843 AT1DATA4 (RDR-HX650/HX750/HX950) R5672 0.1
DD4 9 0 10V
TP3844 B
AT1DATA11
DD11 10 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
TP3845 AT1DATA3
UAO

VCCO2

DGND2

VCCK2

PHYRDY

PMEN

SSCEN

MSSEL
CLKSEL1

CLKSEL0

DASPn
PDIAGn

UAI
CS0n

CS1n

FXDMA
DD3 11
R3839 C5614
TP3846 33 AT1DATA12 0.01
DD12 12 16V CN5604 7P
TP3847 R5622 C5622
AT1DATA2 AT1ADR2 82 B 0.01
DD2 13 49 DA2 TXP 32 16V 1 GND
TP3848 R5623 C5623
AT1DATA13 AT1ADR0 82 B 0.01
DD13 14 50 DA0 TXN 31 16V 2 TXP
TP3849 R5624
AT1DATA1 AT1ADR1 82 B
DD1 15 51 DA1 AGND2 30 3 TXN
R3840
TP3850 33 AT1DATA14 C5624
HDD
F DD14 16
TP3851 AT1DATA0 A T1INTRQ
R5626
52 SP AVDDL 29 0.01
16V
4 GND
UNIT
DD0 17
TP3852 AT1DATA15 AT1DMACK
22
R5627
82
53 INTRQ
IC5602 RXN 28
B
C5625
0.01
5 RXN

DD15 18 54 DMACKn SATA BRIDGE RXP 27 R5651 R5652 16V 6 RXP

R5628
AT1IORDY 22 12k 100 B
GND 19 R5664 55 IORDY REXT 26 7 GND
B+
(FOR IDE HDD)

TP3853 0
KEYPIN 20 R3841 56 VCCK3 IC5602 AGND1 25
TP3854 82 R3829 R3830 R3831 88SA8040-TBC1C000 C5616
22k 22k 22k AT1DMARQ 0.1
DMARQ 21 57 DGND3 AVDDH 24 10V
R5629 B
A T1DIOR 82
R3842
GND 22 R3843 5.6k 58 DIORn XTALO 23 R5688
TP3855 22 R5630
AT1DIOW AT1DIOW 82 1M
DIOW# 23 59 DIOWn XTALI 22
R5631 R5661
AT1DMARQ 22 1k X5502 25MH z
GND 24 R3844 60 DMARQ ATAIOEN 21
TP3856 22 AT1DIOR AT1DATA15 R5689
MODE2 1k

1
DIOR# 25 61 DD15 20
AT1DATA0 R5657
R3857 1k C5617
GND 26 R3845 62 DD0 MODE1 19 0.01
0
TP3857 82 AT1IORDY AT1DATA14 16V
B

2
IORDY 27 63 DD14 MODE0 18
TP3858 AT1DATA1
CSEL 28 R3847 64 DD1 PORn 17
G DMACK# 29
TP3859 22 AT1DMACK
R5632
C5611
0.01
R5659
1k
C5629
0.01
R5658
1k
C5628
0.01
C562 7
0.01
C5626
0.01 C5640 C5641
RESETn

33 16V 16V 15p 15p

DGND1

16V 16V 16V

VCCO1

VCCK1
DD13

DD12

DD11

DD10

B B B B B
DD2

DD3

DD4

DD5

DD9

DD6

DD8

DD7

GND 30 R3848 C5606

TP3860 82 AT1INTRQ (V+3DS) 0.01 C5612
INTRQ 31 TP999 16V 0.1
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 R5690
TP3861 10V 0
RESERVED 32 R3850
R3849
10k
B
XRESET 8
TP3862 33 AT1ADR1 B+
TO
DA1 33 L 5601
TP3863 (2/7,3/7,4/7,7/7)
PDIAG
PDIAG# 34 I EMI O
TP3864 AT1ADR0 B+
G
DA0 35
R3851
TP3865 33 AT1ADR2
DA2 36
TP3866 C 5613 C5603 C5602 C560 8 C5607 C5609
AT1CS0 100 0.1 1 0.01 0.01 C561 0
CS0# 37 0.01 0.01
4V 16V 6.3V 16V 16V 16V
TP3867 F X6S B B 16V
AT1CS1 B B
CS1# 38
TP3868 DASP
R5650
82

DASP# 39
TP3869 R5638 R5642 R5646
GND 40 33 33 33

R3846
H 1k R3832
22k
R3833
22k
V+3D
B+ C 3801 C3802 C 3803 C 3804 B+
1 1 1 1
4 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V
X6S X6S X6S X6S
AT1DATA13

AT1DATA12

AT1DATA11

AT1DATA10

TO (1/7) GNDD
AT1RESET
AT1DATA2

AT1DATA3

AT1DATA4

AT1DATA5

AT1DATA9

AT1DATA6

AT1DATA8

AT1DATA7

TP3870 B+
V +1R8
B+

SATA/IDE IF
RD-065 (5/7) 4-31 4-32
 RDR-GX350/HX650/HX750/HX950

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

RD-065 BOARD(6/7)
HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES-

R5825
22

IC1001 (4/5) RSEN

AV ENC/DEC PDB
IC1001
MC10050F1-105-LU1-A(AS,BS) CTL2 IC5801
IC5801 Note: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
MC10050F1-505-LU1-A(CS,DS) The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.
C 5808
1 R5846
6.3V 4.7k
PHYLINKON X6S C5801
E16 1
LINKON 6.3V
PHYLPS C 5821 X6S (RDRHX-650/HX750/HX950)
LPS D16 R5826
B PHYLREQ D11
22
1000p
50V C5802
E15 B 1000p
LREQ/AILRCK1 50V C5815
SCLK/VICLK
D15 PHYSCLK D10
R5857
10k
B
R5842
0.1
25V
B
JA5801 19P
IC5203
E14 PHYCTL0 D9 330 AND GATE
CTL0/AIBCK1 1 Not open to public
PHYCTL1 D8 C5211
D14 1000p
CTL1/AIBD1 2 Not open to public

1
C5816 50V
PHY_D0 C5803 0.1 B+ B
E13

L 5801
R5829 1 25V

90uH
PHY_D0/VID0 CLK 56 6.3V R5843 3 Not open to public
B
D13 PHY_D1 X6S 330 C5213
1 R1006 R1005
PHY_D1/VID1 4 Not open to public 15K 15K CN5201 10P
6.3V R5201 TP5202
PHY_D2 D7 USB_DN 0

4
E12 X6S 0
PHY_D2/VID2 C5817 5 Not open to public 10 USBDM2
D12 PHY_D3 D6 0.1

3
PHY_D3/VID3 25V 6 Not open to public 9 GND
R5827 R5865
R5844 B IC5203
PHY_D4 D5 330 TC7SH08FU(T5RSOYJF) TP5203

L5201
E11 22 0

0uH
PHY_D4/VID4 7 Not open to public 8 USBDP2
TP5204

1
D11 PHY_D5 D4

1
PHY_D5/VID5 8 Not open to public VCC INB 7 GND TO FL-178

L5802
R5202

2
C5804 C5818

90uH
E10 PHY_D6 D3 1000p 0.1 (RDR-GX350) USB_DP0 0 B+ TP5201 BOARD

2
PHY_D6/VID6 50V R5845 25V 9 Not open to public INA 6 V+5USB CN102
B B R5222 TP5205
D10 PHY_D7 D2 330 USB_D_VBUS 10 THROUGH THE

3
PHY_D7/VID7 10 Not open to public OUTY GND 5 USBVF B
R5828
C IR_IN/GPIO52
F20 D1 22
11 Not open to public
R5206
47k
R5221
47k 4 GND
RU-001 HARNESS
R5216 TP5206
D0
12 Not open to public
USB_D_DN0 0
3 USBDM1
(SEE PAGE 4-21)
M2 USB_DP0 DE TP5802 R5208 TP5208

3
USB_DP0 13 Not open to public 47k VDD STANDBY C5216 2 GND
1000p

L520 2
M1 USB_DN0 HSYNC USB_CLKI 50V TP5207

L 5803
R5838 R5863

0uH
90uH
USB_DN0 R5855 33 680 14 Not open to public OUT GN D B 1 USBDP1
USB_CLKI VSYNC 10 C5805 TP5803 R5205
N1 1 68
USB_CLKI/GPIO55 6.3V 15 Not open to public
R5217

4
X5201

2
USB_H_OCI0 CTL3 C5807 X6S TP5804 USB_D_CONEECT USB_D_DP 0
M3 1 R5839 R5862 0
USB_H_OCI0/GPIO56 6.3V 470 4.7k 16 Not open to public
C560 1 C5223 R5213
N2 USB_H_PPON0 X6S 1 USB_H_OCI0 0
1000p
USB_H_PPON0/GPIO57 Q5809 6.3V 17 Not open to public 50V R5212
USB_D_DP0 R5861 UMD2N-TR X6S B USB_H_PPON0
P2 10k 0
USB_D_DP0 SWITCH 18 Not open to public
R5833 B+

1
USB_D_DN0 C5822 R5854 TP5805 C5222
P1 22 1000 p 10k 1 4 0.1
USB_D_DN0 50V 19 Not open to public 16V

L 5804
R5834

90uH
N3 USB_D_VBUS 22 B C 5806 2 5 R5824 F
USB_D_VBUS/GPIO58
P3 USB_D_CONEECT
R5831
0
1
6.3V
X6S
0.1
25V
R5832
0.1
GNDHS C5205
R5207
0
R5220
1.5k IC5204 R5214
47k

4
USB_D_CONNECT/GPIO59 1
R5837 6.3V 5V REG
0 3 6 X6S
R5803
0.1 B+
16V TP5209 C5219
C580 9
D B+
L 5805 220
4V B+ B+ C 5813
0.1
C 5812
0.1
C 5814
0.1 B+
1000p
50V
B
I EM I O 16V 16V 16V 4 5
TP5801 F F F C5209
G

VOUT
VI N
0.1
X 5101 R5203 IC5202 16V

R1173H001B
C 5117 24.576MHz 3.3k R5523N001B-TR-F F
C5218

IC5204
12p C521 2
50V C5118 2.2 1000p
PHY_XRST 50V C5210
B+ 12p 10V

ON/OFF
1
B EN VOUT 100

5
50V B

VSS
16V

NC
R5836 R5852 Q5802
GND

2
10k 10k RN2903(T5RSONY,D,F)
SWITCH

2
3 2 1 FLG VIN

4
C5217
1
15 SDA_GP 6.3V R5204
X6S 820
TO (4/7) SCL_GP
R5815
Q5804 2.7k R5814 C 5115
B+ C5133 C 5120 R5215 IC5202

L5101
4.7k 1 C5121
DTC124EUA-T106 1 1

0uH
SCL_VDEC 6.3V 100 47k
6.3V 6.3V 4V
SWITCH X6S X6S X6S USB 5V SW
11 SDA_VDEC R5813
2.7k R5812 C5116
4.7k 1 B+
TO (2/7) HDMI/XDVI

R5111
6.3V R5110
E

1k
X6S 10k
1080P

R5115

R5116
R5113

R5114

10k

10k
10k

10k
R5101 R5102
100k 100k R5117
100k
C5114
0.1 C 5119
270p

D6 17

D7 18

SUS/RES 19

DVDD 20

DGND 21

X0 22

X1 23

AGND 24

AVDD 25

PC0 26

PC1 27

PC2 28

IC(AL) 29

CMC 30

AVDD 31

CPS 32
16V
F 50V

S
R5105
68
PHY_D7
Q5808 R5131
2SK2034-TE85L 5.1k
PHY_D6 0.5%
SWITCH

33
IC5802 DGND AGND

16
TC7MB3257FK(EL) PHY_D5 R5118

34
D5 RI1 9.1k R5120 R5119

15
PHY_D4 0.5% 56 56
0.5% 0.5%

16

35
B+
1

S Vcc D4 AGND CN510 1 6P

14
R5135 TP5103
C5104 0
R5817 R5818 R5106
15
0.1

36
2

1B1 OE DGND TpB0n 6 TPBN

13
4.7k 4.7k 68 16V R5134
R5859 PHY_D3 F
IC5103 0 TP5104
14
10k

37
3

1B2 4B1 D3 TpB0p 5 TPBP TO FL-178

12
R5132
DDC_SW1 PHY_D2 0 BOARD
13

DV PHY